ECS3510-28T/52T 28/52-Port Fast Ethernet Layer 2 Switch Management Guide www.edge-core.
M ANAGEMENT G U I D E ECS3510-28T FAST ETHERNET SWITCH Layer 2 Switch with 24 10/100BASE-TX (RJ-45) Ports, and 4 Gigabit Combination Ports (RJ-45/SFP) ECS3510-52T FAST ETHERNET SWITCH Layer 2 Switch with 48 10/100BASE-TX (RJ-45) Ports, and 4 Gigabit Combination Ports (RJ-45/SFP) E022019-CS-R05 M0NEC3510201Z 149100000204A
ABOUT THIS GUIDE PURPOSE This guide gives specific information on how to operate and use the management functions of the switch. AUDIENCE The guide is intended for use by network administrators who are responsible for operating and maintaining network equipment; consequently, it assumes a basic working knowledge of general switch functions, the Internet Protocol (IP), and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
ABOUT THIS GUIDE DOCUMENTATION This documentation is provided for general information purposes only. If NOTICE any product feature details in this documentation conflict with the product datasheet, refer to the datasheet for the latest information. REVISION HISTORY This section summarizes the changes in each revision of this guide. FEBRUARY 2019 REVISION This is the fifth version of this guide. This guide is valid for software release v1.4.0.0.
ABOUT THIS GUIDE ◆ Added Multicast Data Drop parameter under "Filtering IGMP Query Packets and Multicast Data" on page 621. ◆ Updated range of Forwarding Priority under "Configuring MVR Domain Settings" on page 644. ◆ Added "mac-learning" on page 866. ◆ Added "port security mac-address-as-permanent" on page 869. ◆ Added "ip dhcp snooping limit rate" on page 896. ◆ Added "clear ip dhcp snooping database flash" on page 900.
ABOUT THIS GUIDE ◆ Added "ip igmp authentication" on page 1218 and "show ip igmp authentication" on page 1223. ◆ Updated syntax for "ip igmp query-drop" on page 1222. ◆ Added "ip multicast-data-drop" on page 1222 and "show ip multicast-data-drop" on page 1226. ◆ Added "MLD Filtering and Throttling" on page 1237. ◆ Updated range of priority parameter for "mvr priority" on page 1248. ◆ Added "clear mrv groups dynamic" on page 1257. ◆ Added "clear mrv statistics" on page 1258.
ABOUT THIS GUIDE ◆ Added "MLD Snooping (Snooping and Query for IPv6)" on page 632, and commands for "MLD Snooping" on page 1227. ◆ Added "Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6" on page 657, and commands for "MVR for IPv6" on page 1268. ◆ Added "TFTP Configuration Commands" on page 726. ◆ Added terminal command on page 737. ◆ Added daylight savings time commands "clock summer-time (date)" on page 756, "clock summer-time (predefined)" on page 758, and "clock summer-time (recurring)" on page 759.
ABOUT THIS GUIDE – 10 –
CONTENTS ABOUT THIS GUIDE SECTION I 5 CONTENTS 11 FIGURES 49 TABLES 61 GETTING STARTED 1 INTRODUCTION 69 Key Features 69 Description of Software Features 70 System Defaults 75 2 INITIAL SWITCH CONFIGURATION 79 Connecting to the Switch 79 Configuration Options 79 Required Connections 80 Remote Connections 81 Basic Configuration 82 Console Connection 82 Setting Passwords 82 Setting an IP Address 83 Downloading a Configuration File Referenced by a DHCP Server 89 Enabling S
CONTENTS Home Page 100 Configuration Options 101 Panel Display 101 Main Menu 102 4 BASIC MANAGEMENT TASKS 119 Displaying System Information 119 Displaying Hardware/Software Versions 120 Configuring Support for Jumbo Frames 122 Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities 123 Managing System Files 124 Copying Files via FTP/TFTP or HTTP 124 Saving the Running Configuration to a Local File 126 Setting the Start-Up File 127 Showing System Files 128 Automatic Operation Code Upgrade 129
CONTENTS Performing Cable Diagnostics Trunk Configuration 170 172 Configuring a Static Trunk 173 Configuring a Dynamic Trunk 175 Displaying LACP Port Counters 181 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side 182 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side 184 Configuring Load Balancing 185 Saving Power 187 Traffic Segmentation 189 Enabling Traffic Segmentation 189 Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports 190 VLAN Trunking 192 6 VLAN CONFIGURATION 195 IEEE 802.
CONTENTS Overview 235 Configuring Loopback Detection 238 Configuring Global Settings for STA 240 Displaying Global Settings for STA 245 Configuring Interface Settings for STA 246 Displaying Interface Settings for STA 250 Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees 253 Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP 257 9 CONGESTION CONTROL 259 Rate Limiting 259 Storm Control 260 Automatic Traffic Control 262 Setting the ATC Timers 264 Configuring ATC Thresholds and Responses 265 10 CLASS OF SER
CONTENTS Configuring Remote Logon Authentication Servers 308 Configuring AAA Accounting 313 Configuring AAA Authorization 319 Configuring User Accounts 322 Web Authentication 324 Configuring Global Settings for Web Authentication 325 Configuring Interface Settings for Web Authentication 326 Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) 327 Configuring Global Settings for Network Access 330 Configuring Network Access for Ports 331 Configuring Port Link Detection 333 Configuring a MAC Add
CONTENTS Configuring Interface Settings for ARP Inspection 376 Displaying ARP Inspection Statistics 377 Displaying the ARP Inspection Log 378 Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access 379 Configuring Port Security 381 Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication 383 Configuring 802.1X Global Settings 385 Configuring Port Authenticator Settings for 802.1X 386 Configuring Port Supplicant Settings for 802.1X 390 Displaying 802.
CONTENTS Simple Network Management Protocol 444 Configuring Global Settings for SNMP 446 Setting the Local Engine ID 447 Specifying a Remote Engine ID 448 Setting SNMPv3 Views 449 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups 452 Setting Community Access Strings 457 Configuring Local SNMPv3 Users 458 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users 460 Specifying Trap Managers 463 Creating SNMP Notification Logs 467 Showing SNMP Statistics 469 Remote Monitoring 471 Configuring RMON Alarms 472 Configuring RMON Event
CONTENTS Displaying Details for Local MEPs 538 Displaying Local MIPs 540 Displaying Remote MEPs 541 Displaying Details for Remote MEPs 542 Displaying the Link Trace Cache 544 Displaying Fault Notification Settings 546 Displaying Continuity Check Errors 547 OAM Configuration 548 Enabling OAM on Local Ports 548 Displaying Statistics for OAM Messages 551 Displaying the OAM Event Log 552 Displaying the Status of Remote Interfaces 553 Configuring a Remote Loop Back Test 554 Displaying
CONTENTS Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries 591 Displaying the DNS Cache 592 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 593 Specifying a DHCP Client Identifier 593 Configuring DHCP Relay Service 594 Configuring the PPPoE Intermediate Agent 598 Configuring PPPoE IA Global Settings 598 Configuring PPPoE IA Interface Settings 600 Showing PPPoE IA Statistics 602 17 MULTICAST FILTERING 605 Overview 605 Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) 606 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Quer
CONTENTS Displaying MVR Statistics Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 SECTION III 653 657 Configuring MVR6 Global Settings 658 Configuring MVR6 Domain Settings 660 Configuring MVR6 Group Address Profiles 661 Configuring MVR6 Interface Status 664 Assigning Static MVR6 Multicast Groups to Interfaces 666 Displaying MVR6 Receiver Groups 668 Displaying MVR6 Statistics 669 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 675 18 USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 677 Accessing the CLI 677 Console Connection 677 Te
CONTENTS disable 694 reload (Privileged Exec) 694 show reload 695 end 695 exit 695 20 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Device Designation 697 697 hostname 698 Banner Information 698 banner configure 699 banner configure company 700 banner configure dc-power-info 701 banner configure department 701 banner configure equipment-info 702 banner configure equipment-location 703 banner configure ip-lan 703 banner configure lp-number 704 banner configure manager-info 705 banner configur
CONTENTS General Commands 717 boot system 717 copy 718 delete 721 dir 721 whichboot 722 Automatic Code Upgrade Commands 723 upgrade opcode auto 723 upgrade opcode path 724 upgrade opcode reload 725 show upgrade 726 TFTP Configuration Commands 726 ip tftp retry 726 ip tftp timeout 727 show ip tftp 727 Line 728 line 728 databits 729 exec-timeout 730 login 731 parity 732 password 732 password-thresh 733 silent-time 734 speed 734 stopbits 735 timeout login res
CONTENTS clear log 743 show log 743 show logging 744 SMTP Alerts 745 logging sendmail 746 logging sendmail host 746 logging sendmail level 747 logging sendmail destination-email 748 logging sendmail source-email 748 show logging sendmail 749 Time 749 SNTP Commands 750 sntp client 750 sntp poll 751 sntp server 751 show sntp 752 NTP Commands 752 ntp authenticate 752 ntp authentication-key 753 ntp client 754 ntp server 755 show ntp 756 Manual Configuration Commands
CONTENTS cluster commander 767 cluster ip-pool 768 cluster member 768 rcommand 769 show cluster 769 show cluster members 770 show cluster candidates 770 21 SNMP COMMANDS 771 General SNMP Commands 773 snmp-server 773 snmp-server community 773 snmp-server contact 774 snmp-server location 774 show snmp 775 SNMP Target Host Commands 776 snmp-server enable traps 776 snmp-server host 777 snmp-server enable port-traps mac-notification 779 show snmp-server enable port-traps 780
CONTENTS 22 REMOTE MONITORING COMMANDS 793 rmon alarm 794 rmon event 795 rmon collection history 796 rmon collection rmon1 797 show rmon alarms 798 show rmon events 798 show rmon history 798 show rmon statistics 799 23 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS 801 User Accounts and Privilege Levels 802 enable password 802 username 803 privilege 805 show privilege 805 Authentication Sequence 806 authentication enable 806 authentication login 807 RADIUS Client 808 radius-server acct-port
CONTENTS aaa accounting exec 818 aaa accounting update 819 aaa authorization exec 820 aaa group server 821 server 821 accounting dot1x 822 accounting commands 822 accounting exec 823 authorization exec 823 show accounting 824 Web Server 825 ip http port 825 ip http server 826 ip http secure-port 826 ip http secure-server 827 Telnet Server 828 ip telnet max-sessions 829 ip telnet port 829 ip telnet server 830 show ip telnet 830 Secure Shell 831 ip ssh authentication
CONTENTS dot1x system-auth-control 842 Authenticator Commands 843 dot1x intrusion-action 843 dot1x max-reauth-req 843 dot1x max-req 844 dot1x operation-mode 844 dot1x port-control 845 dot1x re-authentication 846 dot1x timeout quiet-period 846 dot1x timeout re-authperiod 847 dot1x timeout supp-timeout 847 dot1x timeout tx-period 848 dot1x re-authenticate 848 Supplicant Commands 849 dot1x identity profile 849 dot1x max-start 850 dot1x pae supplicant 850 dot1x timeout auth-pe
CONTENTS Port Security 866 mac-learning 866 port security 867 port security mac-address-as-permanent 869 show port security 869 Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) 871 network-access aging 872 network-access mac-filter 873 mac-authentication reauth-time 874 network-access dynamic-qos 874 network-access dynamic-vlan 875 network-access guest-vlan 876 network-access link-detection 877 network-access link-detection link-down 877 network-access link-detection link-up 878 ne
CONTENTS DHCPv4 Snooping 891 ip dhcp snooping 892 ip dhcp snooping information option 894 ip dhcp snooping information policy 895 ip dhcp snooping limit rate 896 ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address 896 ip dhcp snooping vlan 897 ip dhcp snooping information option circuit-id 898 ip dhcp snooping trust 899 clear ip dhcp snooping binding 900 clear ip dhcp snooping database flash 900 ip dhcp snooping database flash 901 show ip dhcp snooping 901 show ip dhcp snooping binding 902 DHCP
CONTENTS ipv6 source-guard 921 ipv6 source-guard max-binding 922 show ipv6 source-guard 923 show ipv6 source-guard binding 924 ARP Inspection 924 ip arp inspection 925 ip arp inspection filter 926 ip arp inspection log-buffer logs 927 ip arp inspection validate 928 ip arp inspection vlan 929 ip arp inspection limit 930 ip arp inspection trust 930 show ip arp inspection configuration 931 show ip arp inspection interface 931 show ip arp inspection log 932 show ip arp inspection
CONTENTS permit, deny (Standard IP ACL) 945 permit, deny (Extended IPv4 ACL) 946 ip access-group 948 show ip access-group 949 show ip access-list 949 IPv6 ACLs 950 access-list ipv6 950 permit, deny (Standard IPv6 ACL) 951 permit, deny (Extended IPv6 ACL) 952 ipv6 access-group 954 show ipv6 access-group 955 show ipv6 access-list 955 MAC ACLs 956 access-list mac 956 permit, deny (MAC ACL) 957 mac access-group 960 show mac access-group 961 show mac access-list 961 ARP ACLs
CONTENTS shutdown 974 speed-duplex 975 clear counters 976 show discard 977 show interfaces brief 977 show interfaces counters 978 show interfaces status 979 show interfaces switchport 980 Transceiver Threshold Configuration 982 transceiver-monitor 982 transceiver-threshold-auto 982 transceiver-threshold current 983 transceiver-threshold rx-power 984 transceiver-threshold temperature 985 transceiver-threshold tx-power 986 transceiver-threshold voltage 987 show interfaces tran
CONTENTS Trunk Status Display Commands 1004 show lacp 1004 show port-channel load-balance 1007 28 PORT MIRRORING COMMANDS Local Port Mirroring Commands 1009 1009 port monitor 1009 show port monitor 1011 RSPAN Mirroring Commands 1012 rspan source 1014 rspan destination 1015 rspan remote vlan 1016 no rspan session 1017 show rspan 1017 29 CONGESTION CONTROL COMMANDS Rate Limit Commands rate-limit 1019 1019 1020 Storm Control Commands 1021 storm-sample-type 1021 switchport packet-
CONTENTS snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-control-apply 1035 snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-control-release 1035 ATC Display Commands 1036 show auto-traffic-control 1036 show auto-traffic-control interface 1036 30 UNIDIRECTIONAL LINK DETECTION COMMANDS 1039 udld message-interval 1039 udld aggressive 1040 udld port 1041 show udld 1042 31 LOOPBACK DETECTION COMMANDS 1045 loopback-detection 1046 loopback-detection action 1046 loopback-detection recover-time 1
CONTENTS spanning-tree transmission-limit 1065 max-hops 1066 mst priority 1066 mst vlan 1067 name 1068 revision 1068 spanning-tree bpdu-filter 1069 spanning-tree bpdu-guard 1070 spanning-tree cost 1071 spanning-tree edge-port 1072 spanning-tree link-type 1073 spanning-tree loopback-detection 1073 spanning-tree loopback-detection action 1074 spanning-tree loopback-detection release-mode 1075 spanning-tree loopback-detection trap 1076 spanning-tree mst cost 1076 spanning-tree
CONTENTS node-id 1093 non-erps-dev-protect 1094 non-revertive 1095 propagate-tc 1099 raps-def-mac 1100 raps-without-vc 1100 ring-port 1102 rpl neighbor 1103 rpl owner 1104 version 1105 wtr-timer 1106 clear erps statistics 1106 erps clear 1107 erps forced-switch 1107 erps manual-switch 1109 show erps 1111 35 VLAN COMMANDS 1117 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 1118 bridge-ext gvrp 1118 garp timer 1119 switchport forbidden vlan 1120 switchport gvrp 1120 show bridg
CONTENTS Displaying VLAN Information show vlan 1131 1131 Configuring IEEE 802.
CONTENTS switchport priority default 1162 show queue mode 1163 show queue weight 1163 Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) 1164 qos map cos-dscp 1164 qos map dscp-mutation 1166 qos map phb-queue 1167 qos map trust-mode 1168 show qos map cos-dscp 1169 show qos map dscp-mutation 1169 show qos map phb-queue 1170 show qos map trust-mode 1171 37 QUALITY OF SERVICE COMMANDS 1173 class-map 1174 description 1175 match 1176 rename 1177 policy-map 1177 class 1178 police flow 1179
CONTENTS ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 1196 ip igmp snooping tcn-flood 1197 ip igmp snooping tcn-query-solicit 1198 ip igmp snooping unregistered-data-flood 1198 ip igmp snooping unsolicited-report-interval 1199 ip igmp snooping version 1200 ip igmp snooping version-exclusive 1200 ip igmp snooping vlan general-query-suppression 1201 ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave 1202 ip igmp snooping vlan last-memb-query-count 1203 ip igmp snooping vlan last-memb-query-intvl 1203 ip
CONTENTS show ip igmp filter 1224 show ip igmp profile 1224 show ip igmp query-drop 1225 show ip igmp throttle interface 1225 show ip multicast-data-drop 1226 MLD Snooping 1227 ipv6 mld snooping 1228 ipv6 mld snooping querier 1228 ipv6 mld snooping query-interval 1229 ipv6 mld snooping query-max-response-time 1229 ipv6 mld snooping robustness 1230 ipv6 mld snooping router-port-expire-time 1230 ipv6 mld snooping unknown-multicast mode 1231 ipv6 mld snooping version 1232 ipv6 mld
CONTENTS show ipv6 mld throttle interface MVR for IPv4 1245 1246 mvr 1247 mvr associated-profile 1247 mvr domain 1248 mvr priority 1248 mvr profile 1249 mvr proxy-query-interval 1250 mvr proxy-switching 1250 mvr robustness-value 1252 mvr source-port-mode dynamic 1252 mvr upstream-source-ip 1253 mvr vlan 1254 mvr immediate-leave 1254 mvr type 1255 mvr vlan group 1256 clear mrv groups dynamic 1257 clear mrv statistics 1258 show mvr 1258 show mvr associated-profile 1259 s
CONTENTS mvr6 vlan group 1278 clear mvr6 groups dynamic 1279 clear mvr6 statistics 1279 show mvr6 1280 show mvr6 associated-profile 1281 show mvr6 interface 1281 show mvr6 members 1282 show mvr6 profile 1284 show mvr6 statistics 1284 39 LLDP COMMANDS 1287 lldp 1289 lldp holdtime-multiplier 1289 lldp med-fast-start-count 1290 lldp notification-interval 1290 lldp refresh-interval 1291 lldp reinit-delay 1291 lldp tx-delay 1292 lldp admin-status 1293 lldp basic-tlv managemen
CONTENTS lldp notification 1304 show lldp config 1305 show lldp info local-device 1306 show lldp info remote-device 1307 show lldp info statistics 1309 40 CFM COMMANDS 1311 Defining CFM Structures 1314 ethernet cfm ais level 1314 ethernet cfm ais ma 1315 ethernet cfm ais period 1316 ethernet cfm ais suppress alarm 1316 ethernet cfm domain 1317 ethernet cfm enable 1319 ma index name 1320 ma index name-format 1321 ethernet cfm mep 1322 ethernet cfm port-enable 1323 clear eth
CONTENTS ethernet cfm mep crosscheck 1339 show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote crosscheck 1340 Link Trace Operations 1340 ethernet cfm linktrace cache 1340 ethernet cfm linktrace cache hold-time 1341 ethernet cfm linktrace cache size 1342 ethernet cfm linktrace 1343 clear ethernet cfm linktrace-cache 1344 show ethernet cfm linktrace-cache 1344 Loopback Operations ethernet cfm loopback Fault Generator Operations 1345 1345 1346 mep fault-notify alarm-time 1346 mep fault-notify lo
CONTENTS ip domain-lookup 1366 ip domain-name 1367 ip host 1368 ip name-server 1369 ipv6 host 1370 clear dns cache 1370 clear host 1371 show dns 1371 show dns cache 1372 show hosts 1372 43 DHCP COMMANDS 1375 DHCP Client 1375 DHCP for IPv4 1376 ip dhcp client class-id 1376 ip dhcp restart client 1377 DHCP for IPv6 1377 ipv6 dhcp client rapid-commit vlan 1377 ipv6 dhcp restart client vlan 1378 show ipv6 dhcp duid 1379 show ipv6 dhcp vlan 1380 DHCP Relay Option 82 1381
CONTENTS arp timeout 1395 clear arp-cache 1396 show arp 1396 IPv6 Interface 1397 Interface Address Configuration and Utilities 1398 ipv6 default-gateway 1398 ipv6 address 1399 ipv6 address autoconfig 1400 ipv6 address eui-64 1401 ipv6 address link-local 1403 ipv6 enable 1404 ipv6 mtu 1406 show ipv6 default-gateway 1407 show ipv6 interface 1407 show ipv6 mtu 1409 show ipv6 traffic 1410 clear ipv6 traffic 1414 ping6 1414 traceroute6 1416 Neighbor Discovery 1417 ipv6 nd
CONTENTS SECTION IV clear ipv6 nd snooping prefix 1429 show ipv6 nd snooping 1430 show ipv6 nd snooping binding 1430 show ipv6 nd snooping prefix 1430 APPENDICES 1433 A SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS 1435 Software Features 1435 Management Features 1436 Standards 1437 Management Information Bases 1437 B TROUBLESHOOTING 1439 Problems Accessing the Management Interface 1439 Using System Logs 1440 C LICENSE INFORMATION 1441 The GNU General Public License 1441 GLOSSARY 1445 COMMAND LIS
CONTENTS – 48 –
FIGURES Figure 1: Home Page 100 Figure 2: Front Panel Indicators 101 Figure 3: System Information 120 Figure 4: General Switch Information (ECS3510-52T) 121 Figure 5: Configuring Support for Jumbo Frames 122 Figure 6: Displaying Bridge Extension Configuration 124 Figure 7: Copy Firmware 126 Figure 8: Saving the Running Configuration 127 Figure 9: Setting Start-Up Files 128 Figure 10: Displaying System Files 128 Figure 11: Configuring Automatic Code Upgrade 132 Figure 12: Manually Sett
FIGURES Figure 32: Configuring Local Port Mirroring 156 Figure 33: Configuring Local Port Mirroring 157 Figure 34: Displaying Local Port Mirror Sessions 158 Figure 35: Configuring Remote Port Mirroring 158 Figure 36: Configuring Remote Port Mirroring (Source) 161 Figure 37: Configuring Remote Port Mirroring (Intermediate) 161 Figure 38: Configuring Remote Port Mirroring (Destination) 162 Figure 39: Showing Port Statistics (Table) 165 Figure 40: Showing Port Statistics (Chart) 166 Figure 4
FIGURES Figure 68: Creating Static VLANs 199 Figure 69: Modifying Settings for Static VLANs 200 Figure 70: Showing Static VLANs 200 Figure 71: Configuring Static Members by VLAN Index 203 Figure 72: Configuring Static VLAN Members by Interface 204 Figure 73: Configuring Static VLAN Members by Interface Range 204 Figure 74: Configuring Global Status of GVRP 206 Figure 75: Configuring GVRP for an Interface 207 Figure 76: Showing Dynamic VLANs Registered on the Switch 207 Figure 77: Showing
FIGURES Figure 104: Configuring Port Loopback Detection 239 Figure 105: Configuring Global Settings for STA (STP) 244 Figure 106: Configuring Global Settings for STA (RSTP) 244 Figure 107: Configuring Global Settings for STA (MSTP) 245 Figure 108: Displaying Global Settings for STA 246 Figure 109: Configuring Interface Settings for STA 250 Figure 110: STA Port Roles 252 Figure 111: Displaying Interface Settings for STA 252 Figure 112: Creating an MST Instance 254 Figure 113: Displaying MS
FIGURES Figure 140: Showing the Rules for a Class Map 287 Figure 141: Configuring a Policy Map 294 Figure 142: Showing Policy Maps 295 Figure 143: Adding Rules to a Policy Map 296 Figure 144: Showing the Rules for a Policy Map 296 Figure 145: Attaching a Policy Map to a Port 297 Figure 146: Configuring a Voice VLAN 301 Figure 147: Configuring an OUI Telephony List 302 Figure 148: Showing an OUI Telephony List 302 Figure 149: Configuring Port Settings for a Voice VLAN 304 Figure 150: Con
FIGURES Figure 176: Showing the MAC Address Filter Table for Network Access 335 Figure 177: Showing Addresses Authenticated for Network Access 337 Figure 178: Configuring HTTPS 339 Figure 179: Downloading the Secure-Site Certificate 340 Figure 180: Configuring the SSH Server 344 Figure 181: Generating the SSH Host Key Pair 346 Figure 182: Showing the SSH Host Key Pair 346 Figure 183: Copying the SSH User’s Public Key 347 Figure 184: Showing the SSH User’s Public Key 348 Figure 185: Settin
FIGURES Figure 212: Configuring Interface Settings for 802.1X Port Authenticator 390 Figure 213: Configuring Interface Settings for 802.1X Port Supplicant 392 Figure 214: Showing Statistics for 802.1X Port Authenticator 394 Figure 215: Showing Statistics for 802.
FIGURES Figure 248: Creating an SNMP View 450 Figure 249: Showing SNMP Views 451 Figure 250: Adding an OID Subtree to an SNMP View 451 Figure 251: Showing the OID Subtree Configured for SNMP Views 452 Figure 252: Creating an SNMP Group 456 Figure 253: Showing SNMP Groups 456 Figure 254: Setting Community Access Strings 457 Figure 255: Showing Community Access Strings 458 Figure 256: Configuring Local SNMPv3 Users 459 Figure 257: Showing Local SNMPv3 Users 460 Figure 258: Configuring Rem
FIGURES Figure 284: Setting ERPS Global Status 492 Figure 285: Sub-ring with Virtual Channel 501 Figure 286: Sub-ring without Virtual Channel 502 Figure 287: Creating an ERPS Ring 506 Figure 288: Creating an ERPS Ring 507 Figure 289: Showing Configured ERPS Rings 507 Figure 290: Blocking an ERPS Ring Port 512 Figure 291: Single CFM Maintenance Domain 513 Figure 292: Multiple CFM Maintenance Domains 514 Figure 293: Configuring Global Settings for CFM 518 Figure 294: Configuring Interface
FIGURES Figure 320: Running a Remote Loop Back Test 556 Figure 321: Displaying the Results of Remote Loop Back Testing 557 Figure 322: Pinging a Network Device 560 Figure 323: Tracing the Route to a Network Device 562 Figure 324: Setting the ARP Timeout 563 Figure 325: Displaying ARP Entries 564 Figure 326: Configuring the IPv4 Default Gateway 565 Figure 327: Configuring a Static IPv4 Address 567 Figure 328: Configuring a Dynamic IPv4 Address 567 Figure 329: Showing the IPv4 Address Confi
FIGURES Figure 356: Configuring a Static Interface for a Multicast Router 613 Figure 357: Showing Static Interfaces Attached a Multicast Router 613 Figure 358: Showing Current Interfaces Attached a Multicast Router 614 Figure 359: Assigning an Interface to a Multicast Service 615 Figure 360: Showing Static Interfaces Assigned to a Multicast Service 615 Figure 361: Configuring IGMP Snooping on a VLAN 620 Figure 362: Showing Interface Settings for IGMP Snooping 621 Figure 363: Dropping IGMP Que
FIGURES Figure 392: Showing the Static MVR Groups Assigned to a Port 652 Figure 393: Displaying MVR Receiver Groups 653 Figure 394: Displaying MVR Statistics – Query 655 Figure 395: Displaying MVR Statistics – VLAN 656 Figure 396: Displaying MVR Statistics – Port 657 Figure 397: Configuring Global Settings for MVR6 659 Figure 398: Configuring Domain Settings for MVR6 661 Figure 399: Configuring an MVR6 Group Address Profile 663 Figure 400: Displaying MVR6 Group Address Profiles 663 Figure
TABLES Table 1: Key Features 69 Table 2: System Defaults 75 Table 3: Options 60, 66 and 67 Statements 90 Table 4: Options 55 and 124 Statements 90 Table 5: Web Page Configuration Buttons 101 Table 6: Switch Main Menu 102 Table 7: Port Statistics 162 Table 8: LACP Port Counters 181 Table 9: LACP Internal Configuration Information 182 Table 10: LACP Remote Device Configuration Information 184 Table 11: Traffic Segmentation Forwarding 190 Table 12: Recommended STA Path Cost Range 247 T
TABLES Table 32: ERPS Request/State Priority 509 Table 33: Remote MEP Priority Levels 521 Table 34: MEP Defect Descriptions 521 Table 35: OAM Operation State 549 Table 36: OAM Operation State 555 Table 37: Address Resolution Protocol 562 Table 38: Show IPv6 Neighbors - display description 578 Table 39: Show IPv6 Statistics - display description 580 Table 40: Show MTU - display description 585 Table 41: General Command Modes 682 Table 42: Configuration Command Modes 685 Table 43: Keyst
TABLES Table 68: RMON Commands 793 Table 69: Authentication Commands 801 Table 70: User Access Commands 802 Table 71: Default Login Settings 804 Table 72: Authentication Sequence Commands 806 Table 73: RADIUS Client Commands 808 Table 74: TACACS+ Client Commands 812 Table 75: AAA Commands 816 Table 76: Web Server Commands 825 Table 77: HTTPS System Support 828 Table 78: Telnet Server Commands 828 Table 79: Secure Shell Commands 831 Table 80: show ssh - display description 840 Tabl
TABLES Table 104: ARP ACL Commands 962 Table 105: ACL Information Commands 965 Table 106: Interface Commands 967 Table 107: show interfaces switchport - display description 981 Table 108: Link Aggregation Commands 995 Table 109: show lacp counters - display description 1005 Table 110: show lacp internal - display description 1005 Table 111: show lacp neighbors - display description 1006 Table 112: show lacp sysid - display description 1007 Table 113: Port Mirroring Commands 1009 Table 1
TABLES Table 140: IP Subnet VLAN Commands 1147 Table 141: MAC Based VLAN Commands 1149 Table 142: Voice VLAN Commands 1150 Table 143: Priority Commands 1159 Table 144: Priority Commands (Layer 2) 1159 Table 145: Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) 1164 Table 146: Default Mapping of CoS/CFI to Internal PHB/Drop Precedence 1165 Table 147: Default Mapping of DSCP Values to Internal PHB/Drop Values 1166 Table 148: Mapping Internal Per-hop Behavior to Hardware Queues 1167 Table 149: Quality of S
TABLES Table 176: LLDP Commands 1287 Table 177: LLDP MED Location CA Types 1300 Table 178: CFM Commands 1311 Table 179: show ethernet cfm configuration traps - display description 1325 Table 180: show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local detail mep - display 1329 Table 181: show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote detail - display 1330 Table 182: show ethernet cfm errors - display description 1336 Table 183: show ethernet cfm linktrace-cache - display description 1344 Table 184: Remote
SECTION I GETTING STARTED This section provides an overview of the switch, and introduces some basic concepts about network switches. It also describes the basic settings required to access the management interface.
SECTION I | Getting Started – 68 –
1 INTRODUCTION This switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching. It includes a management agent that allows you to configure the features listed in this manual. The default configuration can be used for most of the features provided by this switch. However, there are many options that you should configure to maximize the switch’s performance for your particular network environment.
CHAPTER 1 | Introduction Description of Software Features Table 1: Key Features (Continued) Feature Description IEEE 802.1D Bridge Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning Store-and-Forward Switching Supported to ensure wire-speed switching while eliminating bad frames Spanning Tree Algorithm Supports standard STP, Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), and Multiple Spanning Trees (MSTP) Virtual LANs Up to 4094 using IEEE 802.
CHAPTER 1 | Introduction Description of Software Features TACACS+). Port-based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802.1X protocol. This protocol uses Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs (EAPOL) to request user credentials from the 802.1X client, and then uses the EAP between the switch and the authentication server to verify the client’s right to access the network via an authentication server (i.e., RADIUS or TACACS+ server).
CHAPTER 1 | Introduction Description of Software Features STORM CONTROL Broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast storm suppression prevents traffic from overwhelming the network.When enabled on a port, the level of broadcast traffic passing through the port is restricted. If broadcast traffic rises above a pre-defined threshold, it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the threshold. STATIC MAC A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch.
CHAPTER 1 | Introduction Description of Software Features 802.1D STP standard. It is intended as a complete replacement for STP, but can still interoperate with switches running the older standard by automatically reconfiguring ports to STP-compliant mode if they detect STP protocol messages from attached devices. ◆ Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP, IEEE 802.1s) – This protocol is a direct extension of RSTP. It can provide an independent spanning tree for different VLANs.
CHAPTER 1 | Introduction Description of Software Features frames when they enter the service provider’s network, and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network. TRAFFIC This switch prioritizes each packet based on the required level of service, PRIORITIZATION using four priority queues with strict priority, Weighted Round Robin (WRR), or a combination of strict and weighted queuing. It uses IEEE 802.1p and 802.
CHAPTER 1 | Introduction System Defaults LINK LAYER LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices within DISCOVERY PROTOCOL the local broadcast domain. LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that advertises information about the sending device and collects information gathered from neighboring network nodes it discovers. Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value (TLV) format according to the IEEE 802.
CHAPTER 1 | Introduction System Defaults Table 2: System Defaults (Continued) Function Parameter Default Authentication and Security Measures (continued) Port Security Disabled IP Filtering Disabled DHCP Snooping Disabled IP Source Guard Disabled (all ports) HTTP Server Enabled HTTP Port Number 80 HTTP Secure Server Enabled HTTP Secure Server Port 443 SNMP Agent Enabled Community Strings “public” (read only) “private” (read/write) Traps Authentication traps: enabled Link-up-down ev
CHAPTER 1 | Introduction System Defaults Table 2: System Defaults (Continued) Function Parameter Default Virtual LANs Default VLAN 1 PVID 1 Acceptable Frame Type All Ingress Filtering Disabled Switchport Mode (Egress Mode) Hybrid GVRP (global) Disabled GVRP (port interface) Disabled QinQ Tunneling Disabled Ingress Port Priority 0 Queue Mode WRR Queue Weight Queue: 0 1 2 3 Weight: 1 2 4 6 Class of Service Enabled IP Precedence Priority Disabled IP DSCP Priority Disabled Manage
CHAPTER 1 | Introduction System Defaults – 78 –
2 INITIAL SWITCH CONFIGURATION This chapter includes information on connecting to the switch and basic configuration procedures. CONNECTING TO THE SWITCH The switch includes a built-in network management agent. The agent offers a variety of management options, including SNMP, RMON and a webbased interface. A PC may also be connected directly to the switch for configuration and monitoring via a command line interface (CLI). NOTE: An IPv4 address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default.
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Connecting to the Switch ◆ Control port access through IEEE 802.1X security or static address filtering ◆ Filter packets using Access Control Lists (ACLs) ◆ Configure up to 4094 IEEE 802.
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Connecting to the Switch ■ Set the emulation mode to VT100. ■ When using HyperTerminal, select Terminal keys, not Windows keys. NOTE: Once you have set up the terminal correctly, the console login screen will be displayed. For a description of how to use the CLI, see "Using the Command Line Interface" on page 677. For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the CLI, refer to "CLI Command Groups" on page 686.
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Basic Configuration BASIC CONFIGURATION CONSOLE The CLI program provides two different command levels — normal access CONNECTION level (Normal Exec) and privileged access level (Privileged Exec). The commands available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of those available at the Privileged Exec level and allow you to only display information and use basic utilities.
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Basic Configuration Username: admin Password: CLI session with the ECS3510-28T* is opened. To end the CLI session, enter [Exit]. Console#configure Console(config)#username guest password 0 [password] Console(config)#username admin password 0 [password] Console(config)# * This manual covers the ECS3510-28T and ECS3510-52T switches. Other than the difference in the number of ports, there are no significant differences.
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Basic Configuration ASSIGNING AN IPV4 ADDRESS Before you can assign an IP address to the switch, you must obtain the following information from your network administrator: ◆ IP address for the switch ◆ Network mask for this network ◆ Default gateway for the network To assign an IPv4 address to the switch, complete the following steps 1. From the Global Configuration mode prompt, type “interface vlan 1” to access the interface-configuration mode.
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Basic Configuration To configure an IPv6 link local address for the switch, complete the following steps: 1. From the Global Configuration mode prompt, type “interface vlan 1” to access the interface-configuration mode. Press . 2. Type “ipv6 address” followed by up to 8 colon-separated 16-bit hexadecimal values for the ipv6-address similar to that shown in the example, followed by the “link-local” command parameter. Then press .
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Basic Configuration To generate an IPv6 global unicast address for the switch, complete the following steps: 1. From the global configuration mode prompt, type “interface vlan 1” to access the interface-configuration mode. Press . 2. From the interface prompt, type “ipv6 address ipv6-address” or “ipv6 address ipv6-address/prefix-length,” where “prefix-length” indicates the address bits used to form the network portion of the address.
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Basic Configuration DYNAMIC CONFIGURATION Obtaining an IPv4 Address If you select the “bootp” or “dhcp” option, the system will immediately start broadcasting service requests. IP will be enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received. Requests are broadcast every few minutes using exponential backoff until IP configuration information is obtained from a BOOTP or DHCP server.
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Basic Configuration Console(config)#interface vlan 1 Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp Console(config-if)#end Console#show ip interface VLAN 1 is Administrative Up - Link Up Address is 00-12-CF-DA-FC-E8 Index: 1001, MTU: 1500 Address Mode is DHCP IP Address: 192.168.0.2 Mask: 255.255.255.0 Console#copy running-config startup-config Startup configuration file name []: startup \Write to FLASH Programming. \Write to FLASH finish. Success.
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Basic Configuration Address for Multi-segment Network — To generate an IPv6 address that can be used in a network containing more than one subnet, the switch can be configured to automatically generate a unique host address based on the local subnet address prefix received in router advertisement messages. (DHCP for IPv6 will also be supported in future software releases.
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Basic Configuration Note the following DHCP client behavior: ◆ The bootup configuration file received from a TFTP server is stored on the switch with the original file name. If this file name already exists in the switch, the file is overwritten. ◆ If the name of the bootup configuration file is the same as the Factory Default Configuration file, the download procedure will be terminated, and the switch will not send any further DHCP client requests.
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Basic Configuration The following configuration examples are provided for a Linux-based DHCP daemon (dhcpd.conf file). In the “Vendor class” section, the server will always send Option 66 and 67 to tell the switch to download the “test” configuration file from server 192.168.255.101. ddns-update-style ad-hoc; default-lease-time 600; max-lease-time 7200; log-facility local7; server-name "Server1"; Server-identifier 192.168.255.
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Basic Configuration “private” community string that provides read/write access to the entire MIB tree. However, you may assign new views to version 1 or 2c community strings that suit your specific security requirements (see "Setting SNMPv3 Views" on page 449).
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Managing System Files where “host-address” is the IP address for the trap receiver, “communitystring” specifies access rights for a version 1/2c host, or is the user name of a version 3 host, “version” indicates the SNMP client version, and “auth | noauth | priv” means that authentication, no authentication, or authentication and privacy is used for v3 clients. Then press .
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Managing System Files uploaded via FTP/TFTP to a server for backup. The file named “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” contains all the system default settings and cannot be deleted from the system. If the system is booted with the factory default settings, the switch will also create a file named “startup1.cfg” that contains system settings for switch initialization, including information about the unit identifier, and MAC address for the switch.
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Managing System Files To save the current configuration settings, enter the following command: 1. From the Privileged Exec mode prompt, type “copy running-config startup-config” and press . 2. Enter the name of the start-up file. Press . Console#copy running-config startup-config Startup configuration file name []: startup \Write to FLASH Programming. \Write to FLASH finish. Success.
CHAPTER 2 | Initial Switch Configuration Managing System Files – 96 –
SECTION II WEB CONFIGURATION This section describes the basic switch features, along with a detailed description of how to configure each feature via a web browser.
SECTION II | Web Configuration – 98 –
3 USING THE WEB INTERFACE This switch provides an embedded HTTP web agent. Using a web browser you can configure the switch and view statistics to monitor network activity. The web agent can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard web browser (Internet Explorer 6, Mozilla Firefox 4, or Google Chrome 29, or more recent versions). NOTE: You can also use the Command Line Interface (CLI) to manage the switch over a serial connection to the console port or via Telnet.
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface NOTE: Users are automatically logged off of the HTTP server or HTTPS server if no input is detected for 600 seconds. NOTE: Connection to the web interface is not supported for HTTPS using an IPv6 link local address. NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE To access the web-browser interface you must first enter a user name and password. The administrator has Read/Write access to all configuration parameters and statistics.
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface CONFIGURATION Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop-down list. Once a OPTIONS configuration change has been made on a page, be sure to click on the Apply button to confirm the new setting. The following table summarizes the web page configuration buttons. Table 5: Web Page Configuration Buttons Button Action Apply Sets specified values to the system.
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface MAIN MENU Using the onboard web agent, you can define system parameters, manage and control the switch, and all its ports, or monitor network conditions. The following table briefly describes the selections available from this program.
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Table 6: Switch Main Menu (Continued) Menu Description Page Interface 151 Port 152 General Configure by Port List Configures connection settings per port 152 Configure by Port Range Configures connection settings for a range of ports 154 Show Information Displays port connection status 155 Mirror 156 Add Sets the source and target ports for mirroring 156 Show Shows the configured mirror sessions 156 Statistics
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Table 6: Switch Main Menu (Continued) Menu Neighbors Description Page Displays configuration settings and operational state for the remote side of a link aggregation 184 Configure Trunk 175 Configure Configures connection settings 175 Show Displays port connection status 175 Show Member Shows the active members in a trunk 175 Statistics Shows Interface, Etherlike, and RMON port statistics 162 Chart Shows Interface,
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Table 6: Switch Main Menu (Continued) Menu Description Page Protocol 216 Configure Protocol 217 Add Creates a protocol group, specifying supported protocols 217 Show Shows configured protocol groups 217 Configure Interface 218 Add Maps a protocol group to a VLAN 218 Show Shows the protocol groups mapped to each VLAN 218 IP Subnet 220 Add Maps IP subnet traffic to a VLAN 220 Show Shows IP subnet to VLAN mappi
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Table 6: Switch Main Menu (Continued) Menu MSTP Description Page Multiple Spanning Tree Algorithm 253 Configure Global 253 Add Configures initial VLAN and priority for an MST instance 253 Modify Configures the priority or an MST instance 253 Show Configures global settings for an MST instance 253 Add Member Adds VLAN members for an MST instance 253 Show Member Adds or deletes VLAN members for an MST instance 253
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Table 6: Switch Main Menu (Continued) Menu Description Page Show Shows configured class maps 284 Modify Modifies the name of a class map 284 Add Rule Configures the criteria used to classify ingress traffic 284 Show Rule Shows the traffic classification rules for a class map 284 Configure Policy 287 Add Creates a policy map to apply to multiple interfaces 287 Show Shows configured policy maps 287 Modify Modifie
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Table 6: Switch Main Menu (Continued) Menu Configure Service Description Page Sets the accounting method applied to specific interfaces for 802.
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Table 6: Switch Main Menu (Continued) Menu Description Page Configure Host Key 345 Generate Generates the host key pair (public and private) 345 Show Displays RSA and DSA host keys; deletes host keys 345 Configure User Key 346 Copy Imports user public keys from TFTP server 346 Show Displays RSA and DSA user keys; deletes user keys 346 Access Control Lists 348 Configures the time to apply an ACL 350 Add Specifie
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Table 6: Switch Main Menu (Continued) Menu Description Page Shows the addresses to be allowed management access 379 Port Security Configures per port security, including status, response for security breach, and maximum allowed MAC addresses 381 Port Authentication IEEE 802.
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Table 6: Switch Main Menu (Continued) Menu Port/Trunk Details Description Page Displays detailed information about a remote device connected to this switch 434 Show Device Statistics 442 General Displays statistics for all connected remote devices 442 Port/Trunk Displays statistics for remote devices on a selected port or trunk 442 Simple Network Management Protocol 444 Enables SNMP agent status, and sets related trap f
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Table 6: Switch Main Menu (Continued) Menu Description Page Remote Monitoring 471 Alarm Sets threshold bounds for a monitored variable 472 Event Creates a response event for an alarm 475 Alarm Shows all configured alarms 472 Event Shows all configured events 475 History Periodically samples statistics on a physical interface 477 Statistics Enables collection of statistics on a physical interface 480 History Sho
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Table 6: Switch Main Menu (Continued) Menu Description Page Configure Details Configures the archive hold time and fault notification settings 519 Show Shows list of configured maintenance domains 519 Configure Maintenance Associations 524 Add Defines a unique CFM service instance, identified by its parent MD, the MA index, the VLAN assigned to the MA, and the MIP creation method 524 Configure Details Configures detaile
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Table 6: Switch Main Menu (Continued) Menu Remote Loopback Description Page Performs a loopback test on the specified port 554 IP 559 General Ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network 559 Trace Route Shows the route packets take to the specified destination 561 Address Resolution Protocol 562 Configure General Sets the aging time for dynamic entries in the ARP cache 563 Show Information Shows
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Table 6: Switch Main Menu (Continued) Menu Description DHCP Page Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 593 Client Specifies the DHCP client identifier for an interface Relay Configures DHCP relay service for attached host devices, including 594 DHCP option 82 information, and relay servers Snooping 409 Configure Global Enables DHCP snooping globally, MAC-address verification, information option; and sets the information pol
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Table 6: Switch Main Menu (Continued) Menu Description Page Filter Configure General 627 Enables IGMP filtering for the switch Configure Profile 627 628 Add Adds IGMP filter profile; and sets access mode 628 Show Shows configured IGMP filter profiles 628 Add Multicast Group Range Assigns multicast groups to selected profile 628 Show Multicast Group Range Shows multicast groups assigned to a profile 628 Assigns IGMP
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Table 6: Switch Main Menu (Continued) Menu Show Configure Interface Description Page Shows addresses profile to domain mapping 645 Configures MVR interface type and immediate leave mode; also displays MVR operational and active status 648 Configure Static Group Member 650 Add Statically assigns MVR multicast streams to an interface 650 Show Shows MVR multicast streams assigned to an interface 650 Shows the multicast gro
CHAPTER 3 | Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface – 118 –
4 BASIC MANAGEMENT TASKS This chapter describes the following topics: ◆ Displaying System Information – Provides basic system description, including contact information. ◆ Displaying Hardware/Software Versions – Shows the hardware version, power status, and firmware versions ◆ Configuring Support for Jumbo Frames – Enables support for jumbo frames. ◆ Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities – Shows the bridge extension parameters.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Displaying Hardware/Software Versions PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ System Description – Brief description of device type. ◆ System Object ID – MIB II object ID for switch’s network management subsystem. ◆ System Up Time – Length of time the management agent has been up. ◆ System Name – Name assigned to the switch system. ◆ System Location – Specifies the system location. ◆ System Contact – Administrator responsible for the system.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Displaying Hardware/Software Versions PARAMETERS The following parameters are displayed: Main Board Information ◆ Serial Number – The serial number of the switch. ◆ Number of Ports – Number of built-in ports. ◆ Hardware Version – Hardware version of the main board. ◆ Main Power Status – Displays the status of the internal power supply. Management Software Information ◆ Role – Shows that this switch is operating as Master or Slave.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Configuring Support for Jumbo Frames CONFIGURING SUPPORT FOR JUMBO FRAMES Use the System > Capability page to configure support for layer 2 jumbo frames. The switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 10240 bytes for Gigabit Ethernet. Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities DISPLAYING BRIDGE EXTENSION CAPABILITIES Use the System > Capability page to display settings based on the Bridge MIB. The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast Filtering, Traffic Classes, and Virtual LANs. You can access these extensions to display default settings for the key variables.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Managing System Files WEB INTERFACE To view Bridge Extension information: 1. Click System, then Capability. Figure 6: Displaying Bridge Extension Configuration MANAGING SYSTEM FILES This section describes how to upgrade the switch operating software or configuration files, and set the system start-up files. COPYING FILES VIA Use the System > File (Copy) page to upload/download firmware or FTP/TFTP OR HTTP configuration settings using FTP, TFTP or HTTP.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Managing System Files PARAMETERS The following parameters are displayed: ◆ Copy Type – The firmware copy operation includes these options: ■ FTP Upload – Copies a file from an FTP server to the switch. ■ FTP Download – Copies a file from the switch to an FTP server. ■ HTTP Upload – Copies a file from a management station to the switch.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Managing System Files 6. Set the file type to Operation Code. 7. Enter the name of the file to download. 8. Select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name. 9. Then click Apply. Figure 7: Copy Firmware If you replaced a file currently used for startup and want to start using the new file, reboot the system via the System > Reset menu.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Managing System Files WEB INTERFACE To save the running configuration file: 1. Click System, then File. 2. Select Copy from the Action list. 3. Select Running-Config from the Copy Type list. 4. Select the current startup file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name. 5. Then click Apply.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Managing System Files Figure 9: Setting Start-Up Files To start using the new firmware or configuration settings, reboot the system via the System > Reset menu. SHOWING Use the System > File (Show) page to show the files in the system SYSTEM FILES directory, or to delete a file. NOTE: Files designated for start-up, and the Factory_Default_Config.cfg file, cannot be deleted.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Managing System Files AUTOMATIC Use the System > File (Automatic Operation Code Upgrade) page to OPERATION CODE automatically download an operation code file when a file newer than the UPGRADE currently installed one is discovered on the file server. After the file is transferred from the server and successfully written to the file system, it is automatically set as the startup file, and the switch is rebooted.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Managing System Files ◆ Note that the switch itself does not distinguish between upper and lower-case file names, and only checks to see if the file stored on the server is more recent than the current runtime image. ◆ If two operation code image files are already stored on the switch’s file system, then the non-startup image is deleted before the upgrade image is transferred.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Managing System Files ftp://[username[:password@]]host[/filedir]/ ■ ftp:// – Defines FTP protocol for the server connection. ■ username – Defines the user name for the FTP connection. If the user name is omitted, then “anonymous” is the assumed user name for the connection. ■ password – Defines the password for the FTP connection.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Managing System Files ■ ftp://switches:upgrade@192.168.0.1/switches/opcode/ The user name is “switches” and the password is “upgrade”. The image file is in the “opcode” directory, which is within the “switches” parent directory, relative to the FTP root. WEB INTERFACE To configure automatic code upgrade: 1. Click System, then File. 2. Select Automatic Operation Code Upgrade from the Action list. 3. Mark the check box to enable Automatic Opcode Upgrade. 4.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Setting the System Clock SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) allows the switch to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server (SNTP or NTP). Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries. You can also manually set the clock.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Setting the System Clock Figure 12: Manually Setting the System Clock SETTING THE SNTP Use the System > Time (Configure General - SNTP) page to set the polling POLLING INTERVAL interval at which the switch will query the specified time servers. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "Time" on page 749 PARAMETERS The following parameters are displayed: ◆ Current Time – Shows the current time set on the switch.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Setting the System Clock Figure 13: Setting the Polling Interval for SNTP CONFIGURING NTP Use the System > Time (Configure General - NTP) page to configure NTP authentication and show the polling interval at which the switch will query the specified time servers. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "Time" on page 749 PARAMETERS The following parameters are displayed: ◆ Current Time – Shows the current time set on the switch.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Setting the System Clock Figure 14: Configuring NTP CONFIGURING Use the System > Time (Configure Time Server) pages to specify the IP TIME SERVERS address for NTP/SNTP time servers, or to set the authentication key for NTP time servers. SPECIFYING SNTP TIME SERVERS Use the System > Time (Configure Time Server – Configure SNTP Server) page to specify the IP address for up to three SNTP time servers.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Setting the System Clock Figure 15: Specifying SNTP Time Servers SPECIFYING NTP TIME SERVERS Use the System > Time (Configure Time Server – Add NTP Server) page to add the IP address for up to 50 NTP time servers. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "ntp server" on page 755 PARAMETERS The following parameters are displayed: ◆ NTP Server IP Address – Adds the IPv4 or IPv6 address for up to 50 time servers.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Setting the System Clock Figure 16: Adding an NTP Time Server To show the list of configured NTP time servers: 1. Click System, then Time. 2. Select Configure Time Server from the Step list. 3. Select Show NTP Server from the Action list. Figure 17: Showing the NTP Time Server List SPECIFYING NTP AUTHENTICATION KEYS Use the System > Time (Configure Time Server – Add NTP Authentication Key) page to add an entry to the authentication key list.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Setting the System Clock WEB INTERFACE To add an entry to NTP authentication key list: 1. Click System, then Time. 2. Select Configure Time Server from the Step list. 3. Select Add NTP Authentication Key from the Action list. 4. Enter the index number and MD5 authentication key string. 5. Click Apply. Figure 18: Adding an NTP Authentication Key To show the list of configured NTP authentication keys: 1. Click System, then Time. 2.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Setting the System Clock SETTING THE Use the System > Time (Configure Time Server) page to set the time zone. TIME ZONE SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time (or UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT) based on the time at the Earth’s prime meridian, zero degrees longitude, which passes through Greenwich, England. To display a time corresponding to your local time, you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east (before) or west (after) of UTC.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Configuring the Console Port CONFIGURING THE CONSOLE PORT Use the System > Console menu to configure connection parameters for the switch’s console port. You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the switch’s serial console port. Management access through the console port is controlled by various parameters, including a password (only configurable through the CLI), time outs, and basic communication settings.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Configuring the Console Port NOTE: The password for the console connection can only be configured through the CLI (see "password" on page 732). NOTE: Password checking can be enabled or disabled for logging in to the console connection (see "login" on page 731). You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the password command, or by passwords set up for specific user-name accounts.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Configuring Telnet Settings CONFIGURING TELNET SETTINGS Use the System > Telnet menu to configure parameters for accessing the CLI over a Telnet connection. You can access the onboard configuration program over the network using Telnet (i.e., a virtual terminal). Management access via Telnet can be enabled/disabled and other parameters set, including the TCP port number, time outs, and a password. Note that the password is only configurable through the CLI.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Displaying CPU Utilization authentication by a single global password as configured for the password command, or by passwords set up for specific user-name accounts. The default is for local passwords configured on the switch. WEB INTERFACE To configure parameters for the console port: 1. Click System, then Telnet. 2. Specify the connection parameters as required. 3.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Displaying Memory Utilization WEB INTERFACE To display CPU utilization: 1. Click System, then CPU Utilization. 2. Change the update interval if required. Note that the interval is changed as soon as a new setting is selected. Figure 23: Displaying CPU Utilization DISPLAYING MEMORY UTILIZATION Use the System > Memory Status page to display memory utilization parameters.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Resetting the System WEB INTERFACE To display memory utilization: 1. Click System, then Memory Status. Figure 24: Displaying Memory Utilization RESETTING THE SYSTEM Use the System > Reset menu to restart the switch immediately, at a specified time, after a specified delay, or at a periodic interval.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Resetting the System System Reload Configuration ◆ Reset Mode – Restarts the switch immediately or at the specified time(s). ■ Immediately – Restarts the system immediately. ■ In – Specifies an interval after which to reload the switch. (The specified time must be equal to or less than 24 days.) ■ ■ ■ hours – The number of hours, combined with the minutes, before the switch resets.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Resetting the System 3. For any option other than to reset immediately, fill in the required parameters 4. Click Apply. 5. When prompted, confirm that you want reset the switch.
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Resetting the System Figure 27: Restarting the Switch (At) Figure 28: Restarting the Switch (Regularly) – 149 –
CHAPTER 4 | Basic Management Tasks Resetting the System – 150 –
5 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION This chapter describes the following topics: ◆ Port Configuration – Configures connection settings, including autonegotiation, or manual setting of speed, duplex mode, and flow control. ◆ Local Port Mirroring – Sets the source and target ports for mirroring on the local switch. ◆ Remote Port Mirroring – Configures mirroring of traffic from remote switches for analysis at a destination port on the local switch.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration PORT CONFIGURATION This section describes how to configure port connections, mirror traffic from one port to another, and run cable diagnostics. CONFIGURING BY Use the Interface > Port > General (Configure by Port List) page to enable/ PORT LIST disable an interface, set auto-negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise, or manually fix the speed, duplex mode, and flow control.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration ◆ ■ SFP-Forced-1000SFP - Always uses the SFP port (even if a module is not installed), and configured for a 1000BASE SFP transceiver. ■ SFP-Forced-100FX - Always uses the SFP port (even if a module is not installed), and configured for a 100BASE-FX transceiver. ■ SFP-Preferred-Auto - Uses SFP port if both combination types are functioning and the SFP port has a valid link. (This is the default for the combination ports.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration Figure 29: Configuring Connections by Port List CONFIGURING BY Use the Interface > Port > General (Configure by Port Range) page to PORT RANGE enable/disable an interface, set auto-negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise, or manually fix the speed, duplex mode, and flow control. For more information on command usage and a description of the parameters, refer to "Configuring by Port List" on page 152.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration Figure 30: Configuring Connections by Port Range DISPLAYING Use the Interface > Port > General (Show Information) page to display the CONNECTION STATUS current connection status, including link state, speed/duplex mode, flow control, and auto-negotiation. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "show interfaces status" on page 979 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Port – Port identifier. ◆ Type – Indicates the port type.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration Figure 31: Displaying Port Information CONFIGURING Use the Interface > Port > Mirror page to mirror traffic from any source LOCAL PORT port to a target port for real-time analysis. You can then attach a logic MIRRORING analyzer or RMON probe to the target port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration ◆ Note that Spanning Tree BPDU packets are not mirrored to the target port. ◆ The destination port cannot be a trunk or trunk member port. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Source Port – The port whose traffic will be monitored. ◆ Target Port – The port that will mirror the traffic on the source port. ◆ Type – Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port, Rx (receive), Tx (transmit), or Both.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration Figure 34: Displaying Local Port Mirror Sessions CONFIGURING Use the Interface > RSPAN page to mirror traffic from remote switches for REMOTE PORT analysis at a destination port on the local switch. This feature, also called MIRRORING Remote Switched Port Analyzer (RSPAN), carries traffic generated on the specified source ports for each session over a user-specified VLAN dedicated to that RSPAN session in all participating switches.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration ◆ Configuration Guidelines Take the following step to configure an RSPAN session: 1. Use the VLAN Static List (see "Configuring VLAN Groups" on page 198) to reserve a VLAN for use by RSPAN (marking the “Remote VLAN” field on this page. (Default VLAN 1 is prohibited.) 2. Set up the source switch on the RSPAN configuration page by specifying the mirror session, the switch’s role (Source), the RSPAN VLAN, and the uplink port1.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration ■ Port Security – If port security is enabled on any port, that port cannot be set as an RSPAN uplink port, even though it can still be configured as an RSPAN source or destination port. Also, when a port is configured as an RSPAN uplink port, port security cannot be enabled on that port. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Session – A number identifying this RSPAN session.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration ◆ Destination Port – Specifies the destination port1 to monitor the traffic mirrored from the source ports. Only one destination port can be configured on the same switch per session, but a destination port can be configured on more than one switch for the same session. Also note that a destination port can still send and receive switched traffic, and participate in any Layer 2 protocols to which it has been assigned.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration Figure 38: Configuring Remote Port Mirroring (Destination) SHOWING PORT OR Use the Interface > Port/Trunk > Statistics or Chart page to display TRUNK STATISTICS standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and Ethernet-like MIBs, as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON MIB. Interfaces and Ethernet-like statistics display errors on the traffic passing through each port.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration Table 7: Port Statistics (Continued) Parameter Description Transmitted Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors. Received Unicast Packets The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higherlayer protocol.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration Table 7: Port Statistics (Continued) Parameter Description Internal MAC Receive Errors A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error. Internal MAC Transmit Errors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration WEB INTERFACE To show a list of port statistics: 1. Click Interface, Port, Statistics. 2. Select the statistics mode to display (Interface, Etherlike, RMON or Utilization). 3. Select a port from the drop-down list. 4. Use the Refresh button to update the screen. Figure 39: Showing Port Statistics (Table) To show a chart of port statistics: 1. Click Interface, Port, Chart. 2.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration Figure 40: Showing Port Statistics (Chart) DISPLAYING Use the Interface > Port > Transceiver page to display identifying TRANSCEIVER DATA information, and operational for optical transceivers which support Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM). CLI REFERENCES ◆ "show interfaces transceiver" on page 988 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Port – Port number.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration The switch can display diagnostic information for SFP modules which support the SFF-8472 Specification for Diagnostic Monitoring Interface for Optical Transceivers. This information allows administrators to remotely diagnose problems with optical devices. This feature, referred to as Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) provides information on transceiver parameters.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration ◆ "transceiver-threshold temperature" on page 985 ◆ "transceiver-threshold tx-power" on page 986 ◆ "transceiver-threshold voltage" on page 987 ◆ "show interfaces transceiver-threshold" on page 989 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Port – Port number. (Range: 1-28/52) ◆ General – Information on connector type and vendor-related parameters.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration The threshold value for Rx and Tx power is calculated as the power ratio in decibels (dB) of the measured power referenced to one milliwatt (mW). Threshold values for alarm and warning messages can be configured as described below. ■ A high-threshold alarm or warning message is sent if the current value is greater than or equal to the threshold, and the last sample value was less than the threshold.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration Figure 42: Configuring Transceiver Thresholds PERFORMING Use the Interface > Port > Cable Test page to test the cable attached to a CABLE DIAGNOSTICS port. The cable test will check for any cable faults (short, open, etc.). If a fault is found, the switch reports the length to the fault. Otherwise, it reports the cable length. It can be used to determine the quality of the cable, connectors, and terminations.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Port Configuration ■ ◆ Impedance mismatch: Terminating impedance is not in the reference range. Ports are linked down while running cable diagnostics. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Port – Switch port identifier. ◆ Type – Displays media type. (FE – Fast Ethernet, GE – Gigabit Ethernet, Other – SFP) ◆ Link Status – Shows if the port link is up or down.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Trunk Configuration TRUNK CONFIGURATION This section describes how to configure static and dynamic trunks. You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual, aggregate link. A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments where bottlenecks exist, as well as providing a faulttolerant link between two devices. You can create up to 5 trunks at a time on the switch.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Trunk Configuration CONFIGURING A Use the Interface > Trunk > Static page to create a trunk, assign member STATIC TRUNK ports, and configure the connection parameters.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Trunk Configuration 5. Set the unit and port for the initial trunk member. 6. Click Apply. Figure 45: Creating Static Trunks To add member ports to a static trunk: 1. Click Interface, Trunk, Static. 2. Select Configure Trunk from the Step list. 3. Select Add Member from the Action list. 4. Select a trunk identifier. 5. Set the unit and port for an additional trunk member. 6. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Trunk Configuration Figure 47: Configuring Connection Parameters for a Static Trunk To display trunk connection parameters: 1. Click Interface, Trunk, Static. 2. Select Configure General from the Step list. 3. Select Show Information from the Action list.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Trunk Configuration CLI REFERENCES ◆ "Link Aggregation Commands" on page 995 COMMAND USAGE ◆ To avoid creating a loop in the network, be sure you enable LACP before connecting the ports, and also disconnect the ports before disabling LACP. ◆ If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports, the trunk will be activated automatically. ◆ A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available trunk ID.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Trunk Configuration transmit LACPDU interval to 1 second. When it receives an LACPDU set with a long timeout from the actor, it adjusts the transmit LACPDU interval to 30 seconds. If the actor does not receive an LACPDU from its partner before the configured timeout expires, the partner port information will be deleted from the LACP group. When a dynamic port-channel member leaves a port-channel, the default timeout value will be restored on that port.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Trunk Configuration NOTE: Configuring LACP settings for a port only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with that port. NOTE: Configuring the port partner sets the remote side of an aggregate link; i.e., the ports on the attached device. The command attributes have the same meaning as those used for the port actor.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Trunk Configuration Figure 51: Enabling LACP on a Port To configure LACP parameters for group members: 1. Click Interface, Trunk, Dynamic. 2. Select Configure Aggregation Port from the Step list. 3. Select Configure from the Action list. 4. Click Actor or Partner. 5. Configure the required settings. 6. Click Apply. Figure 52: Configuring LACP Parameters on a Port To show the active members of a dynamic trunk: 1. Click Interface, Trunk, Dynamic. 2.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Trunk Configuration Figure 53: Showing Members of a Dynamic Trunk To configure connection parameters for a dynamic trunk: 1. Click Interface, Trunk, Dynamic. 2. Select Configure Trunk from the Step List. 3. Select Configure from the Action List. 4. Modify the required interface settings. (See "Configuring by Port List" on page 152 for a description of the interface settings.) 5. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Trunk Configuration DISPLAYING LACP Use the Interface > Trunk > Dynamic (Configure Aggregation Port - Show PORT COUNTERS Information - Counters) page to display statistics for LACP protocol messages. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "show lacp" on page 1004 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: Table 8: LACP Port Counters Parameter Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Trunk Configuration Figure 56: Displaying LACP Port Counters DISPLAYING LACP Use the Interface > Trunk > Dynamic (Configure Aggregation Port - Show SETTINGS AND STATUS Information - Internal) page to display the configuration settings and FOR THE LOCAL SIDE operational state for the local side of a link aggregation.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Trunk Configuration Table 9: LACP Internal Configuration Information (Continued) Parameter Description Admin State, Oper State (continued) ◆ Aggregation – The system considers this link to be aggregatable; i.e., a potential candidate for aggregation. ◆ Long timeout – Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate. ◆ LACP-Activity – Activity control value with regard to this link.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Trunk Configuration DISPLAYING LACP Use the Interface > Trunk > Dynamic (Configure Aggregation Port - Show SETTINGS AND STATUS Information - Neighbors) page to display the configuration settings and FOR THE REMOTE SIDE operational state for the remote side of a link aggregation.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Trunk Configuration Figure 58: Displaying LACP Port Remote Information CONFIGURING Use the Interface > Trunk > Load Balance page to set the load-distribution LOAD BALANCING method used among ports in aggregated links. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "port channel load-balance" on page 996 COMMAND USAGE ◆ This command applies to all static and dynamic trunks on the switch.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Trunk Configuration trunk. This mode works best for switch-to-router trunk links where traffic through the switch is received from and destined for many different hosts. ■ Source and Destination MAC Address: All traffic with the same source and destination MAC address is output on the same link in a trunk. This mode works best for switch-to-switch trunk links where traffic through the switch is received from and destined for many different hosts.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Saving Power Figure 59: Configuring Load Balancing SAVING POWER Use the Interface > Green Ethernet page to enable power savings mode on the selected port. CLI REFERENCES ◆ ◆ "power-save" on page 992 "show power-save" on page 993 COMMAND USAGE ◆ IEEE 802.3 defines the Ethernet standard and subsequent power requirements based on cable connections operating at 100 meters.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Saving Power NOTE: Power savings can only be implemented on Gigabit Ethernet ports when using twisted-pair cabling. Power-savings mode on a active link only works when connection speed is 1 Gbps, and line length is less than 60 meters. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Port – Power saving mode only applies to the Gigabit Ethernet ports using copper media.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Traffic Segmentation TRAFFIC SEGMENTATION If tighter security is required for passing traffic from different clients through downlink ports on the local network and over uplink ports to the service provider, port-based traffic segmentation can be used to isolate traffic for individual clients. Traffic belonging to each client is isolated to the allocated downlink ports.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Traffic Segmentation Figure 61: Enabling Traffic Segmentation CONFIGURING UPLINK Use the Interface > Traffic Segmentation (Configure Session) page to AND DOWNLINK PORTS assign the downlink and uplink ports to use in the segmented group. Ports designated as downlink ports can not communicate with any other ports on the switch except for the uplink ports. Uplink ports can communicate with any other ports on the switch and with any designated downlink ports.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration Traffic Segmentation assigned downlink ports will not be able to communicate with any other ports. ◆ If a downlink port is not configured for the session, the assigned uplink ports will operate as normal ports. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Session ID – Traffic segmentation session. (Range: 1-4) ◆ Direction – Adds an interface to the segmented group by setting the direction to uplink or downlink.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration VLAN Trunking To show the members of the traffic segmentation group: 1. Click Interface, Traffic Segmentation. 2. Select Configure Session from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 63: Showing Traffic Segmentation Members VLAN TRUNKING Use the Interface > VLAN Trunking page to allow unknown VLAN groups to pass through the specified interface.
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration VLAN Trunking connecting VLANs 1 and 2, you only need to create these VLAN groups in switches A and B. Switches C, D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 (groups that are unknown to those switches) to pass through their VLAN trunking ports. ◆ VLAN trunking is mutually exclusive with the “access” switchport mode (see "Adding Static Members to VLANs" on page 200).
CHAPTER 5 | Interface Configuration VLAN Trunking Figure 65: Configuring VLAN Trunking – 194 –
6 VLAN CONFIGURATION This chapter includes the following topics: ◆ IEEE 802.1Q VLANs – Configures static and dynamic VLANs. ◆ IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling – Configures QinQ tunneling to maintain customer-specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations across a service provider network, even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs. ◆ Protocol VLANs – Configures VLAN groups based on specified protocols.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q VLANs since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN. This switch supports the following VLAN features: ◆ Up to 4094 VLANs based on the IEEE 802.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q VLANs VLAN Classification – When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the frame in one of two ways. If the frame is untagged, the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN (based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port). But if the frame is tagged, the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q VLANs Figure 67: Using GVRP Port-based VLAN 2 1 9 10 11 3 4 5 13 12 6 7 8 15 16 14 18 19 Forwarding Tagged/Untagged Frames If you want to create a small port-based VLAN for devices attached directly to a single switch, you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN. However, to participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches, you should create a VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q VLANs ◆ Remote VLAN – Reserves this VLAN for RSPAN (see "Configuring Remote Port Mirroring" on page 158). Modify ◆ VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094). ◆ VLAN Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters). ◆ Status – Enables or disables the specified VLAN. Show ◆ VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN. ◆ VLAN Name – Name of the VLAN. ◆ Status – Operational status of configured VLAN.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q VLANs To modify the configuration settings for VLAN groups: 1. Click VLAN, Static. 2. Select Modify from the Action list. 3. Select the identifier of a configured VLAN. 4. Modify the VLAN name or operational status as required. 5. Click Apply. Figure 69: Modifying Settings for Static VLANs To show the configuration settings for VLAN groups: 1. Click VLAN, Static. 2. Select Show from the Action list.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q VLANs CLI REFERENCES ◆ ◆ "Configuring VLAN Interfaces" on page 1125 "Displaying VLAN Information" on page 1131 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: Edit Member by VLAN ◆ VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094). ◆ Interface – Displays a list of ports or trunks. ◆ Port – Port Identifier. (Range: 1-28/52) ◆ Trunk – Trunk Identifier. (Range: 1-16) ◆ Mode – Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q VLANs ◆ ■ If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to all other ports (except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port). ■ If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded. ■ Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as GVRP or STP.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q VLANs WEB INTERFACE To configure static members by the VLAN index: 1. Click VLAN, Static. 2. Select Edit Member by VLAN from the Action list. 3. Set the Interface type to display as Port or Trunk. 4. Modify the settings for any interface as required. 5. Click Apply. Figure 71: Configuring Static Members by VLAN Index To configure static members by interface: 1. Click VLAN, Static. 2. Select Edit Member by Interface from the Action list. 3.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q VLANs Figure 72: Configuring Static VLAN Members by Interface To configure static members by interface range: 1. Click VLAN, Static. 2. Select Edit Member by Interface Range from the Action list. 3. Set the Interface type to display as Port or Trunk. 4. Enter an interface range. 5. Modify the VLAN parameters as required.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q VLANs CONFIGURING Use the VLAN > Dynamic page to enable GVRP globally on the switch, or to DYNAMIC VLAN enable GVRP and adjust the protocol timers per interface.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q VLANs Show Dynamic VLAN – Show VLAN VLAN ID – Identifier of a VLAN this switch has joined through GVRP. VLAN Name – Name of a VLAN this switch has joined through GVRP. Status – Indicates if this VLAN is currently operational. (Display Values: Enabled, Disabled) Show Dynamic VLAN – Show VLAN Member ◆ VLAN – Identifier of a VLAN this switch has joined through GVRP. ◆ Interface – Displays a list of ports or trunks which have joined the selected VLAN through GVRP.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q VLANs Figure 75: Configuring GVRP for an Interface To show the dynamic VLAN joined by this switch: 1. Click VLAN, Dynamic. 2. Select Show Dynamic VLAN from the Step list. 3. Select Show VLAN from the Action list. Figure 76: Showing Dynamic VLANs Registered on the Switch To show the members of a dynamic VLAN: 1. Click VLAN, Dynamic. 2. Select Show Dynamic VLAN from the Step list. 3. Select Show VLAN Members from the Action list.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling IEEE 802.1Q TUNNELING IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling (QinQ) is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks. QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer-specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Layer 2 Flow for Packets Coming into a Tunnel Uplink Port An uplink port receives one of the following packets: ◆ Untagged ◆ One tag (CVLAN or SPVLAN) ◆ Double tag (CVLAN + SPVLAN) The ingress process does source and destination lookups. If both lookups are successful, the ingress process writes the packet to memory. Then the egress process transmits the packet. Packets entering a QinQ uplink port are processed in the following manner: 1.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Configuration Limitations for QinQ ◆ The native VLAN of uplink ports should not be used as the SPVLAN. If the SPVLAN is the uplink port's native VLAN, the uplink port must be an untagged member of the SPVLAN. Then the outer SPVLAN tag will be stripped when the packets are sent out. Another reason is that it causes non-customer packets to be forwarded to the SPVLAN.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling ENABLING QINQ Use the VLAN > Tunnel (Configure Global) page to configure the switch to TUNNELING ON operate in IEEE 802.1Q (QinQ) tunneling mode, which is used for passing THE SWITCH Layer 2 traffic across a service provider’s metropolitan area network. You can also globally set the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of the tunnel port if the attached client is using a nonstandard 2-byte ethertype to identify 802.1Q tagged frames.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Figure 79: Enabling QinQ Tunneling CREATING Use the VLAN > Tunnel (Configure Service) page to create a CVLAN to CVLAN TO SPVLAN SPVLAN mapping entry.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling ◆ Service VLAN ID – VLAN ID for the outer VLAN tag. (Range: 1-4094) WEB INTERFACE To configure a mapping entry: 1. Click VLAN, Tunnel. 2. Select Configure Service from the Step list. 3. Select Add from the Action list. 4. Select an interface from the Port list. 5. Specify the CVID to SVID mapping for packets exiting the specified port. 6. Click Apply. Figure 80: Configuring CVLAN to SPVLAN Mapping Entries To show the mapping table: 1.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling The preceding example sets the SVID to 99 in the outer tag for egress packets exiting port 1 when the packet’s CVID is 2. For a more detailed example, see the switchport dot1q-tunnel service match cvid command on page 1135. ADDING AN INTERFACE Follow the guidelines in the preceding section to set up a QinQ tunnel on TO A QINQ TUNNEL the switch. Then use the VLAN > Tunnel (Configure Interface) page to set the tunnel mode for any participating interface.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration Protocol VLANs 3. Set the mode for any tunnel access port to Access and the tunnel uplink port to Uplink. 4. Click Apply. Figure 82: Adding an Interface to a QinQ Tunnel PROTOCOL VLANS The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN. This may require non-standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration Protocol VLANs CONFIGURING Use the VLAN > Protocol (Configure Protocol - Add) page to create protocol PROTOCOL VLAN groups. GROUPS CLI REFERENCES ◆ "protocol-vlan protocol-group (Configuring Groups)" on page 1144 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Frame Type – Choose either Ethernet, RFC 1042, or LLC Other as the frame type used by this protocol. ◆ Protocol Type – Specifies the protocol type to match. The available options are IP, ARP, RARP and IPv6.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration Protocol VLANs Figure 83: Configuring Protocol VLANs To configure a protocol group: 1. Click VLAN, Protocol. 2. Select Configure Protocol from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 84: Displaying Protocol VLANs MAPPING Use the VLAN > Protocol (Configure Interface - Add) page to map a PROTOCOL GROUPS protocol group to a VLAN for each interface that will participate in the TO INTERFACES group.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration Protocol VLANs ◆ When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN, it is processed in the following manner: ■ If the frame is tagged, it will be processed according to the standard rules applied to tagged frames. ■ If the frame is untagged and the protocol type matches, the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN. ■ If the frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match, the frame is forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration Configuring IP Subnet VLANs Figure 85: Assigning Interfaces to Protocol VLANs To show the protocol groups mapped to a port or trunk: 1. Click VLAN, Protocol. 2. Select Configure Interface from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. 4. Select a port or trunk. Figure 86: Showing the Interface to Protocol Group Mapping CONFIGURING IP SUBNET VLANS Use the VLAN > IP Subnet page to configure IP subnet-based VLANs.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration Configuring IP Subnet VLANs CLI REFERENCES ◆ "Configuring IP Subnet VLANs" on page 1147 COMMAND USAGE ◆ Each IP subnet can be mapped to only one VLAN ID. An IP subnet consists of an IP address and a mask. The specified VLAN need not be an existing VLAN. ◆ When an untagged frame is received by a port, the source IP address is checked against the IP subnet-to-VLAN mapping table, and if an entry is found, the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the frame.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration Configuring MAC-based VLANs Figure 87: Configuring IP Subnet VLANs To show the configured IP subnet VLANs: 1. Click VLAN, IP Subnet. 2. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 88: Showing IP Subnet VLANs CONFIGURING MAC-BASED VLANS Use the VLAN > MAC-Based page to configure VLAN based on MAC addresses. The MAC-based VLAN feature assigns VLAN IDs to ingress untagged frames according to source MAC addresses.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration Configuring MAC-based VLANs ◆ When MAC-based, IP subnet-based, and protocol-based VLANs are supported concurrently, priority is applied in this sequence, and then port-based VLANs last. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ MAC Address – A source MAC address which is to be mapped to a specific VLAN. The MAC address must be specified in the format xx-xxxx-xx-xx-xx. ◆ VLAN – VLAN to which ingress traffic matching the specified source MAC address is forwarded.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration Configuring VLAN Mirroring Figure 90: Showing MAC-Based VLANs CONFIGURING VLAN MIRRORING Use the VLAN > Mirror (Add) page to mirror traffic from one or more source VLANs to a target port for real-time analysis. You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the target port and study the traffic crossing the source VLAN(s) in a completely unobtrusive manner.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration Configuring VLAN Mirroring PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Source VLAN – A VLAN whose traffic will be monitored. (Range: 1-4094) ◆ Target Port – The destination port that receives the mirrored traffic from the source VLAN. (Range: 1-28/52) WEB INTERFACE To configure VLAN mirroring: 1. Click VLAN, Mirror. 2. Select Add from the Action list. 3. Select the source VLAN, and select a target port. 4. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 6 | VLAN Configuration Configuring VLAN Mirroring – 226 –
7 ADDRESS TABLE SETTINGS Switches store the addresses for all known devices. This information is used to pass traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports. All the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table. You can also manually configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port. This chapter describes the following topics: ◆ MAC Address Learning – Enables or disables address learning on an interface.
CHAPTER 7 | Address Table Settings Configuring MAC Address Learning ◆ Also note that MAC address learning cannot be disabled if any of the following conditions exist: ■ 802.1X Port Authentication has been globally enabled on the switch (see "Configuring 802.1X Global Settings" on page 385). ■ Security Status (see "Configuring Port Security" on page 381) is enabled on the same interface. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Interface – Displays a list of ports or trunks.
CHAPTER 7 | Address Table Settings Setting Static Addresses SETTING STATIC ADDRESSES Use the MAC Address > Static page to configure static MAC addresses. A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch. Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved. When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table.
CHAPTER 7 | Address Table Settings Changing the Aging Time 4. Click Apply. Figure 94: Configuring Static MAC Addresses To show the static addresses in MAC address table: 1. Click MAC Address, Static. 2. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 95: Displaying Static MAC Addresses CHANGING THE AGING TIME Use the MAC Address > Dynamic (Configure Aging) page to set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table. The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information.
CHAPTER 7 | Address Table Settings Displaying the Dynamic Address Table WEB INTERFACE To set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table: 1. Click MAC Address, Dynamic. 2. Select Configure Aging from the Action list. 3. Modify the aging status if required. 4. Specify a new aging time. 5. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 7 | Address Table Settings Clearing the Dynamic Address Table WEB INTERFACE To show the dynamic address table: 1. Click MAC Address, Dynamic. 2. Select Show Dynamic MAC from the Action list. 3. Select the Sort Key (MAC Address, VLAN, or Interface). 4. Enter the search parameters (MAC Address, VLAN, or Interface). 5. Click Query.
CHAPTER 7 | Address Table Settings Configuring MAC Address Mirroring 3. Select the method by which to clear the entries (i.e., All, MAC Address, VLAN, or Interface). 4. Enter information in the additional fields required for clearing entries by MAC Address, VLAN, or Interface. 5. Click Clear.
CHAPTER 7 | Address Table Settings Configuring MAC Address Mirroring PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Source MAC – MAC address in the form of xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx or xxxxxxxxxxxx. ◆ Target Port – The port that will mirror the traffic from the source port. (Range: 1-28/52) WEB INTERFACE To mirror packets based on a MAC address: 1. Click MAC Address, Mirror. 2. Select Add from the Action list. 3. Specify the source MAC address and destination port. 4. Click Apply.
8 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM This chapter describes the following basic topics: ◆ Loopback Detection – Configures detection and response to loopback BPDUs. ◆ Global Settings for STA – Configures global bridge settings for STP, RSTP and MSTP. ◆ Interface Settings for STA – Configures interface settings for STA, including priority, path cost, link type, and designation as an edge port.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Overview lowest cost spanning tree, it enables all root ports and designated ports, and disables all other ports. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports, eliminating any possible network loops.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Overview Figure 102: MSTP Region, Internal Spanning Tree, Multiple Spanning Tree IST (for this Region) MST 1 Region R MST 2 An MST Region consists of a group of interconnected bridges that have the same MST Configuration Identifiers (including the Region Name, Revision Level and Configuration Digest – see "Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees" on page 253). An MST Region may contain multiple MSTP Instances.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Loopback Detection CONFIGURING LOOPBACK DETECTION Use the Spanning Tree > Loopback Detection page to configure loopback detection on an interface. When loopback detection is enabled and a port or trunk receives it’s own BPDU, the detection agent drops the loopback BPDU, sends an SNMP trap, and places the interface in discarding mode. This loopback state can be released manually or automatically.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Loopback Detection ◆ Shutdown Interval – The duration to shut down the interface. (Range: 60-86400 seconds; Default: 60 seconds) If an interface is shut down due to a detected loopback, and the release mode is set to “Auto,” the selected interface will be automatically enabled when the shutdown interval has expired.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Global Settings for STA CONFIGURING GLOBAL SETTINGS FOR STA Use the Spanning Tree > STA (Configure Global - Configure) page to configure global settings for the spanning tree that apply to the entire switch. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "Spanning Tree Commands" on page 1057 COMMAND USAGE ◆ Spanning Tree Protocol2 This option uses RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode. It uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D BPDUs.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Global Settings for STA ■ Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes. Changing modes stops all spanning-tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode, temporarily disrupting user traffic. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: Basic Configuration of Global Settings ◆ Spanning Tree Status – Enables/disables STA on this switch.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Global Settings for STA Advanced Configuration Settings The following attributes are based on RSTP, but also apply to STP since the switch uses a backwards-compatible subset of RSTP to implement STP, and also apply to MSTP which is based on RSTP according to the standard: ◆ ◆ Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Global Settings for STA RSTP does not depend on the forward delay timer in most cases. It is able to confirm that a port can transition to the forwarding state without having to rely on any timer configuration. To achieve fast convergence, RSTP relies on the use of edge ports, and automatic detection of point-to-point link types, both of which allow a port to directly transition to the forwarding state.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Global Settings for STA Figure 105: Configuring Global Settings for STA (STP) Figure 106: Configuring Global Settings for STA (RSTP) – 244 –
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Displaying Global Settings for STA Figure 107: Configuring Global Settings for STA (MSTP) DISPLAYING GLOBAL SETTINGS FOR STA Use the Spanning Tree > STA (Configure Global - Show Information) page to display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the entire switch.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Interface Settings for STA ◆ Root Port – The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root. This switch communicates with the root device through this port. If there is no root port, then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree network. ◆ Root Path Cost – The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root device. ◆ Configuration Changes – The number of times the Spanning Tree has been reconfigured.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Interface Settings for STA CLI REFERENCES ◆ "Spanning Tree Commands" on page 1057 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Interface – Displays a list of ports or trunks. ◆ Spanning Tree – Enables/disables STA on this interface. (Default: Enabled) ◆ BPDU Flooding - Enables/disables the flooding of BPDUs to other ports when global spanning tree is disabled (page 240) or when spanning tree is disabled on a specific port.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Interface Settings for STA Table 13: Default STA Path Costs ◆ Port Type Short Path Cost (IEEE 802.1D-1998) Long Path Cost (IEEE 802.1w-2001) Ethernet 65,535 1,000,000 Fast Ethernet 65,535 100,000 Gigabit Ethernet 10,000 10,000 Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface. ■ Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge. ■ Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Interface Settings for STA An interface cannot function as an edge port under the following conditions: ■ If spanning tree mode is set to STP (page 240), edge-port mode cannot automatically transition to operational edge-port state using the automatic setting. ■ If loopback detection is enabled (page 238) and a loopback BPDU is detected, the interface cannot function as an edge port until the loopback state is released.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Displaying Interface Settings for STA Figure 109: Configuring Interface Settings for STA DISPLAYING INTERFACE SETTINGS FOR STA Use the Spanning Tree > STA (Configure Interface - Show Information) page to display the current status of ports or trunks in the Spanning Tree. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "show spanning-tree" on page 1082 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Spanning Tree – Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Displaying Interface Settings for STA The rules defining port status are: ■ A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is always forwarding. ■ If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other STA device attached to this segment, the port with the smaller ID forwards packets and the other is discarding.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Displaying Interface Settings for STA Figure 110: STA Port Roles R: Root Port A: Alternate Port D: Designated Port B: Backup Port Alternate port receives more useful BPDUs from another bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated R port. R A D x R A x Backup port receives more useful BPDUs from the same bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated port. R D B WEB INTERFACE To display interface settings for STA: 1.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees CONFIGURING MULTIPLE SPANNING TREES Use the Spanning Tree > MSTP (Configure Global) page to create an MSTP instance, or to add VLAN groups to an MSTP instance. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "Spanning Tree Commands" on page 1057 COMMAND USAGE MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees WEB INTERFACE To create instances for MSTP: 1. Click Spanning Tree, MSTP. 2. Select Configure Global from the Step list. 3. Select Add from the Action list. 4. Specify the MST instance identifier and the initial VLAN member. Additional member can be added using the Spanning Tree > MSTP (Configure Global - Add Member) page. If the priority is not specified, the default value 32768 is used. 5. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees To modify the priority for an MST instance: 1. Click Spanning Tree, MSTP. 2. Select Configure Global from the Step list. 3. Select Modify from the Action list. 4. Modify the priority for an MSTP Instance. 5. Click Apply. Figure 114: Modifying the Priority for an MST Instance To display global settings for MSTP: 1. Click Spanning Tree, MSTP. 2. Select Configure Global from the Step list. 3.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees To add additional VLAN groups to an MSTP instance: 1. Click Spanning Tree, MSTP. 2. Select Configure Global from the Step list. 3. Select Add Member from the Action list. 4. Select an MST instance from the MST ID list. 5. Enter the VLAN group to add to the instance in the VLAN ID field. Note that the specified member does not have to be a configured VLAN. 6.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP CONFIGURING INTERFACE SETTINGS FOR MSTP Use the Spanning Tree > MSTP (Configure Interface - Configure) page to configure the STA interface settings for an MST instance. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "Spanning Tree Commands" on page 1057 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ MST ID – Instance identifier to configure. (Default: 0) ◆ Interface – Displays a list of ports or trunks.
CHAPTER 8 | Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP The recommended range is listed in Table 12 on page 247. The default path costs are listed in Table 13 on page 248. WEB INTERFACE To configure MSTP parameters for a port or trunk: 1. Click Spanning Tree, MSTP. 2. Select Configure Interface from the Step list. 3. Select Configure from the Action list. 4. Enter the priority and path cost for an interface 5. Click Apply.
9 CONGESTION CONTROL The switch can set the maximum upload or download data transfer rate for any port. It can also control traffic storms by setting a maximum threshold for broadcast traffic or multicast traffic. It can also set bounding thresholds for broadcast and multicast storms which can be used to automatically trigger rate limits or to shut down a port. Congestion Control includes following options: ◆ Rate Limiting – Sets the input and output rate limits for a port.
CHAPTER 9 | Congestion Control Storm Control ◆ Rate – Sets the rate limit level. (Range: 64 - 100,000 kbits per second for Fast Ethernet ports; 64 - 1,000,000 kbits per second for Gigabit Ethernet ports) WEB INTERFACE To configure rate limits: 1. Click Traffic, Rate Limit. 2. Set the interface type to Port or Trunk. 3. Enable the Rate Limit Status for the required interface. 4. Set the rate limit for the individual ports. 5. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 9 | Congestion Control Storm Control ◆ When traffic exceeds the threshold specified for broadcast and multicast or unknown unicast traffic, packets exceeding the threshold are dropped until the rate falls back down beneath the threshold. ◆ Traffic storms can be controlled at the hardware level using Storm Control or at the software level using Automatic Traffic Control which triggers various control responses. However, only one of these control types can be applied to a port.
CHAPTER 9 | Congestion Control Automatic Traffic Control 4. Set the required threshold beyond which the switch will start dropping packets. 5. Click Apply. Figure 121: Configuring Storm Control AUTOMATIC TRAFFIC CONTROL Use the Traffic > Congestion Control > Auto Traffic Control pages to configure bounding thresholds for broadcast and multicast storms which can automatically trigger rate limits or shut down a port.
CHAPTER 9 | Congestion Control Automatic Traffic Control The key elements of this diagram are described below: ◆ Alarm Fire Threshold – The highest acceptable traffic rate. When ingress traffic exceeds the threshold, ATC sends a Storm Alarm Fire Trap and logs it. ◆ When traffic exceeds the alarm fire threshold and the apply timer expires, a traffic control response is applied, and a Traffic Control Apply Trap is sent and logged.
CHAPTER 9 | Congestion Control Automatic Traffic Control SETTING THE Use the Traffic > Auto Traffic Control (Configure Global) page to set the ATC TIMERS time at which to apply the control response after ingress traffic has exceeded the upper threshold, and the time at which to release the control response after ingress traffic has fallen beneath the lower threshold.
CHAPTER 9 | Congestion Control Automatic Traffic Control Figure 124: Configuring ATC Timers CONFIGURING ATC Use the Traffic > Auto Traffic Control (Configure Interface) page to set the THRESHOLDS AND storm control mode (broadcast or multicast), the traffic thresholds, the RESPONSES control response, to automatically release a response of rate limiting, or to send related SNMP trap messages.
CHAPTER 9 | Congestion Control Automatic Traffic Control ◆ Auto Release Control – Automatically stops a traffic control response of rate limiting when traffic falls below the alarm clear threshold and the release timer expires as illustrated in Figure 122 on page 262. When traffic control stops, the event is logged by the system and a Traffic Release Trap can be sent.
CHAPTER 9 | Congestion Control Automatic Traffic Control WEB INTERFACE To configure the response timers for automatic storm control: 1. Click Traffic, Auto Traffic Control. 2. Select Configure Interface from the Step field. 3. Enable or disable ATC as required, set the control response, specify whether or not to automatically release the control response of rate limiting, set the upper and lower thresholds, and specify which trap messages to send. 4. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 9 | Congestion Control Automatic Traffic Control – 268 –
10 CLASS OF SERVICE Class of Service (CoS) allows you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion. This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port. Data packets in a port’s high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority queues. You can set the default priority for each interface, and configure the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.
CHAPTER 10 | Class of Service Layer 2 Queue Settings frames. If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority bits will be used. ◆ If the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN, these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Interface – Displays a list of ports or trunks. ◆ CoS – The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on the specified interface.
CHAPTER 10 | Class of Service Layer 2 Queue Settings COMMAND USAGE ◆ Strict priority requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced. ◆ WRR queuing specifies a relative weight for each queue. WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue. This prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing.
CHAPTER 10 | Class of Service Layer 2 Queue Settings WEB INTERFACE To configure the queue mode: 1. Click Traffic, Priority, Queue. 2. Set the queue mode. 3. If the weighted queue mode is selected, the queue weight can be modified if required. 4. If the queue mode that uses a combination of strict and weighted queueing is selected, the queues which are serviced first must be specified by enabling strict mode parameter in the table. 5. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 10 | Class of Service Layer 2 Queue Settings MAPPING COS VALUES Use the Traffic > Priority > PHB to Queue page to specify the hardware TO EGRESS QUEUES output queues to use based on the internal per-hop behavior value. (For more information on exact manner in which the ingress priority tags are mapped to egress queues for internal processing, see "Mapping CoS Priorities to Internal DSCP Values" on page 279).
CHAPTER 10 | Class of Service Layer 2 Queue Settings ◆ The default internal PHB to output queue mapping is shown below. Table 16: Mapping Internal Per-hop Behavior to Hardware Queues ◆ Per-hop Behavior 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Hardware Queues 1 0 0 1 2 2 3 3 The specified mapping applies to all interfaces. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Port – Specifies a port. ◆ PHB – Per-hop behavior, or the priority used for this router hop.
CHAPTER 10 | Class of Service Layer 3/4 Priority Settings 3. Select an interface. Figure 131: Showing CoS Values to Egress Queue Mapping LAYER 3/4 PRIORITY SETTINGS Mapping Layer 3/4 Priorities to CoS Values The switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3/4 traffic to meet application requirements. Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a frame, using the priority bits in the Type of Service (ToS) octet, or the number of the TCP/UDP port.
CHAPTER 10 | Class of Service Layer 3/4 Priority Settings SETTING PRIORITY The switch allows a choice between using DSCP or CoS priority processing PROCESSING TO methods. Use the Priority > Trust Mode page to select the required DSCP OR COS processing method. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "qos map trust-mode" on page 1168 COMMAND USAGE ◆ If the QoS mapping mode is set to DSCP, and the ingress packet type is IPv4, then priority processing will be based on the DSCP value in the ingress packet.
CHAPTER 10 | Class of Service Layer 3/4 Priority Settings Figure 132: Setting the Trust Mode MAPPING INGRESS DSCP VALUES TO INTERNAL DSCP VALUES Use the Traffic > Priority > DSCP to DSCP page to map DSCP values in incoming packets to per-hop behavior and drop precedence values for internal priority processing. The DSCP is six bits wide, allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors.
CHAPTER 10 | Class of Service Layer 3/4 Priority Settings PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Port – Specifies a port. ◆ DSCP – DSCP value in ingress packets. (Range: 0-63) ◆ PHB – Per-hop behavior, or the priority used for this router hop. (Range: 0-7) ◆ Drop Precedence – Drop precedence used for Random Early Discard in controlling traffic congestion.
CHAPTER 10 | Class of Service Layer 3/4 Priority Settings Figure 133: Configuring DSCP to DSCP Internal Mapping To show the DSCP to internal PHB/drop precedence map: 1. Click Traffic, Priority, DSCP to DSCP. 2. Select Show from the Action list. 3. Select a port.
CHAPTER 10 | Class of Service Layer 3/4 Priority Settings ◆ If a packet arrives with a 802.1Q header but it is not an IP packet, then the CoS/CFI-to-PHB/Drop Precedence mapping table is used to generate priority and drop precedence values for internal processing. Note that priority tags in the original packet are not modified by this command.
CHAPTER 10 | Class of Service Layer 3/4 Priority Settings WEB INTERFACE To map CoS/CFI values to internal PHB/drop precedence: 1. Click Traffic, Priority, CoS to DSCP. 2. Select Configure from the Action list. 3. Select a port. 4. Set the PHB and drop precedence for any of the CoS/CFI combinations. 5. Click Apply. Figure 135: Configuring CoS to DSCP Internal Mapping To show the CoS/CFI to internal PHB/drop precedence map: 1. Click Traffic, Priority, CoS to DSCP. 2. Select Show from the Action list. 3.
CHAPTER 10 | Class of Service Layer 3/4 Priority Settings – 282 –
11 QUALITY OF SERVICE This chapter describes the following tasks required to apply QoS policies: Class Map – Creates a map which identifies a specific class of traffic. Policy Map – Sets the boundary parameters used for monitoring inbound traffic, and the action to take for conforming and non-conforming traffic. Binding to a Port – Applies a policy map to an ingress port.
CHAPTER 11 | Quality of Service Configuring a Class Map COMMAND USAGE To create a service policy for a specific category or ingress traffic, follow these steps: 1. Use the Configure Class (Add) page to designate a class name for a specific category of traffic. 2. Use the Configure Class (Add Rule) page to edit the rules for each class which specify a type of traffic based on an access list, a DSCP or IP Precedence value, or a VLAN, or a CoS value. 3.
CHAPTER 11 | Quality of Service Configuring a Class Map ◆ Description – A brief description of a class map. (Range: 1-64 characters) Add Rule ◆ Class Name – Name of the class map. ◆ Type – The criteria specified by the match command. (This field is set on the Add page.) ◆ ACL – Name of an access control list. Any type of ACL can be specified, including standard or extended IPv4/IPv6 ACLs and MAC ACLs. ◆ IP DSCP – A DSCP value. (Range: 0-63) ◆ IP Precedence – An IP Precedence value.
CHAPTER 11 | Quality of Service Configuring a Class Map To show the configured class maps: 1. Click Traffic, DiffServ. 2. Select Configure Class from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 138: Showing Class Maps To edit the rules for a class map: 1. Click Traffic, DiffServ. 2. Select Configure Class from the Step list. 3. Select Add Rule from the Action list. 4. Select the name of a class map. 5.
CHAPTER 11 | Quality of Service Creating QoS Policies To show the rules for a class map: 1. Click Traffic, DiffServ. 2. Select Configure Class from the Step list. 3. Select Show Rule from the Action list. Figure 140: Showing the Rules for a Class Map CREATING QOS POLICIES Use the Traffic > DiffServ (Configure Policy) page to create a policy map that can be attached to multiple interfaces.
CHAPTER 11 | Quality of Service Creating QoS Policies conforming to the maximum throughput, or exceeding the maximum throughput. srTCM Police Meter – Defines an enforcer for classified traffic based on a single rate three color meter scheme defined in RFC 2697. This metering policy monitors a traffic stream and processes its packets according to the committed information rate (CIR, or maximum throughput), committed burst size (BC, or burst rate), and excess burst size (BE).
CHAPTER 11 | Quality of Service Creating QoS Policies When a packet of size B bytes arrives at time t, the following happens if srTCM is configured to operate in Color-Aware mode: ■ If the packet has been precolored as green and Tc(t)-B0, the packet is green and Tc is decremented by B down to the minimum value of 0, else ■ If the packet has been precolored as yellow or green and if Te(t)-B 0, the packets is yellow and Te is decremented by B down to the minimum value of 0, else ■ the packet is re
CHAPTER 11 | Quality of Service Creating QoS Policies count Tp is incremented by one PIR times per second up to BP and the token count Tc is incremented by one CIR times per second up to BC. When a packet of size B bytes arrives at time t, the following happens if trTCM is configured to operate in Color-Blind mode: ■ If Tp(t)-B < 0, the packet is red, else ■ if Tc(t)-B < 0, the packet is yellow and Tp is decremented by B, else ■ the packet is green and both Tp and Tc are decremented by B.
CHAPTER 11 | Quality of Service Creating QoS Policies ◆ Description – A brief description of a policy map. (Range: 1-64 characters) Add Rule ◆ Policy Name – Name of policy map. ◆ Class Name – Name of a class map that defines a traffic classification upon which a policy can act. ◆ Action – This attribute is used to set an internal QoS value in hardware for matching packets.
CHAPTER 11 | Quality of Service Creating QoS Policies ■ Conform – Specifies that traffic conforming to the maximum rate (CIR) will be transmitted without any change to the DSCP service level. ■ ■ ■ Transmit – Transmits in-conformance traffic without any change to the DSCP service level. Violate – Specifies whether the traffic that exceeds the maximum rate (CIR) will be dropped or the DSCP service level will be reduced. ■ Set IP DSCP – Decreases DSCP priority for out of conformance traffic.
CHAPTER 11 | Quality of Service Creating QoS Policies ■ ■ ■ Exceed – Specifies whether traffic that exceeds the maximum rate (CIR) but is within the excess burst size (BE) will be dropped or the DSCP service level will be reduced. ■ Set IP DSCP – Decreases DSCP priority for out of conformance traffic. (Range: 0-63) ■ Drop – Drops out of conformance traffic. Violate – Specifies whether the traffic that exceeds the excess burst size (BE) will be dropped or the DSCP service level will be reduced.
CHAPTER 11 | Quality of Service Creating QoS Policies ■ Conform – Specifies that traffic conforming to the maximum rate (CIR) will be transmitted without any change to the DSCP service level. ■ ■ ■ Transmit – Transmits in-conformance traffic without any change to the DSCP service level. Exceed – Specifies whether traffic that exceeds the maximum rate (CIR) but is within the peak information rate (PIR) will be dropped or the DSCP service level will be reduced.
CHAPTER 11 | Quality of Service Creating QoS Policies To show the configured policy maps: 1. Click Traffic, DiffServ. 2. Select Configure Policy from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 142: Showing Policy Maps To edit the rules for a policy map: 1. Click Traffic, DiffServ. 2. Select Configure Policy from the Step list. 3. Select Add Rule from the Action list. 4. Select the name of a policy map. 5.
CHAPTER 11 | Quality of Service Creating QoS Policies Figure 143: Adding Rules to a Policy Map To show the rules for a policy map: 1. Click Traffic, DiffServ. 2. Select Configure Policy from the Step list. 3. Select Show Rule from the Action list.
CHAPTER 11 | Quality of Service Attaching a Policy Map to a Port ATTACHING A POLICY MAP TO A PORT Use the Traffic > DiffServ (Configure Interface) page to bind a policy map to a port. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "Quality of Service Commands" on page 1173 COMMAND USAGE First define a class map, define a policy map, and then bind the service policy to the required interface. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Port – Specifies a port. ◆ Ingress – Applies the selected rule to ingress traffic.
CHAPTER 11 | Quality of Service Attaching a Policy Map to a Port – 298 –
12 VOIP TRAFFIC CONFIGURATION This chapter covers the following topics: ◆ Global Settings – Enables VOIP globally, sets the Voice VLAN, and the aging time for attached ports. ◆ Telephony OUI List – Configures the list of phones to be treated as VOIP devices based on the specified Organization Unit Identifier (OUI).
CHAPTER 12 | VoIP Traffic Configuration Configuring VoIP Traffic CLI REFERENCES ◆ "Configuring Voice VLANs" on page 1150 COMMAND USAGE All ports are set to VLAN hybrid mode by default. Prior to enabling VoIP for a port (by setting the VoIP mode to Auto or Manual as described below), first ensure that VLAN membership is not set to access mode (see "Adding Static Members to VLANs" on page 200).
CHAPTER 12 | VoIP Traffic Configuration Configuring Telephony OUI Figure 146: Configuring a Voice VLAN CONFIGURING TELEPHONY OUI VoIP devices attached to the switch can be identified by the vendor’s Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI) in the source MAC address of received packets. OUI numbers are assigned to vendors and form the first three octets of device MAC addresses. The MAC OUI numbers for VoIP equipment can be configured on the switch so that traffic from these devices is recognized as VoIP.
CHAPTER 12 | VoIP Traffic Configuration Configuring VoIP Traffic Ports 5. Select a mask from the pull-down list to define a MAC address range. 6. Enter a description for the devices. 7. Click Apply. Figure 147: Configuring an OUI Telephony List To show the MAC OUI numbers used for VoIP equipment: 1. Click Traffic, VoIP. 2. Select Configure OUI from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list.
CHAPTER 12 | VoIP Traffic Configuration Configuring VoIP Traffic Ports COMMAND USAGE All ports are set to VLAN hybrid mode by default. Prior to enabling VoIP for a port (by setting the VoIP mode to Auto or Manual as described below), first ensure that VLAN membership is not set to access mode (see "Adding Static Members to VLANs" on page 200). PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Mode – Specifies if the port will be added to the Voice VLAN when VoIP traffic is detected.
CHAPTER 12 | VoIP Traffic Configuration Configuring VoIP Traffic Ports time should be added to the overall aging time. For example, if you configure the MAC address table aging time to 30 seconds, and the voice VLAN aging time to 5 minutes, then after 5.5 minutes, a port will be removed from voice VLAN when VoIP traffic is no longer received on the port. Alternatively, if you clear the MAC address table manually, then the switch will also start counting down the Remaining Age.
13 SECURITY MEASURES You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods. Port-based authentication using IEEE 802.1X can also be configured to control either management access to the uplink ports or client access to the data ports.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting ◆ IPv4 Source Guard – Filters IPv4 traffic on insecure ports for which the source address cannot be identified via DHCPv4 snooping nor static source bindings. ◆ IPv6 Source Guard – Filters IPv6 traffic on insecure ports for which the source address cannot be identified via ND snooping, DHCPv6 snooping, nor static source bindings.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting To configure AAA on the switch, you need to follow this general process: 1. Configure RADIUS and TACACS+ server access parameters. See "Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication" on page 307. 2. Define RADIUS and TACACS+ server groups to support the accounting and authorization of services. 3.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Authentication Sequence – Select the authentication, or authentication sequence required: ■ Local – User authentication is performed only locally by the switch. ■ RADIUS – User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only. ■ TACACS – User authentication is performed using a TACACS+ server only.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Figure 151: Authentication Server Operation console Web Telnet RADIUS/ TACACS+ server 1. Client attempts management access. 2. Switch contacts authentication server. 3. Authentication server challenges client. 4. Client responds with proper password or key. 5. Authentication server approves access. 6. Switch grants management access. RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting sequence of servers. The process ends when a server either approves or denies access to a user. ◆ ■ Server IP Address – Address of authentication server. (A Server Index entry must be selected to display this item.) ■ Accounting Server UDP Port – Network (UDP) port on authentication server used for accounting messages.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting ■ Set Key – Mark this box to set or modify the encryption key. ■ Authentication Key – Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 48 characters) ■ Confirm Authentication Key – Re-type the string entered in the previous field to ensure no errors were made. The switch will not change the encryption key if these two fields do not match.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Figure 152: Configuring Remote Authentication Server (RADIUS) Figure 153: Configuring Remote Authentication Server (TACACS+) To configure the RADIUS or TACACS+ server groups to use for accounting and authorization: 1. Click Security, AAA, Server. 2. Select Configure Group from the Step list. 3. Select Add from the Action list. 4. Select RADIUS or TACACS+ server type. 5.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Figure 154: Configuring AAA Server Groups To show the RADIUS or TACACS+ server groups used for accounting and authorization: 1. Click Security, AAA, Server. 2. Select Configure Group from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: Configure Global ◆ Periodic Update - Specifies the interval at which the local accounting service updates information for all users on the system to the accounting server. (Range: 1-2147483647 minutes) Configure Method ◆ ◆ Accounting Type – Specifies the service as: ■ 802.1X – Accounting for end users.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting ◆ ■ Console Method Name – Specifies a user-defined method name to apply to commands entered at the specified CLI privilege level through the console interface. ■ VTY Method Name – Specifies a user-defined method name to apply to commands entered at the specified CLI privilege level through Telnet. Exec ■ Console Method Name – Specifies a user defined method name to apply to console connections.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Figure 156: Configuring Global Settings for AAA Accounting To configure the accounting method applied to various service types and the assigned server group: 1. Click Security, AAA, Accounting. 2. Select Configure Method from the Step list. 3. Select Add from the Action list. 4. Select the accounting type (802.1X, Command, Exec). 5. Specify the name of the accounting method and server group name. 6. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Figure 158: Showing AAA Accounting Methods To configure the accounting method applied to specific interfaces, console commands entered at specific privilege levels, and local console, Telnet, or SSH connections: 1. Click Security, AAA, Accounting. 2. Select Configure Service from the Step list. 3. Select the accounting type (802.1X, Command, Exec). 4. Enter the required accounting method. 5. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Figure 160: Configuring AAA Accounting Service for Command Service Figure 161: Configuring AAA Accounting Service for Exec Service To display a summary of the configured accounting methods and assigned server groups for specified service types: 1. Click Security, AAA, Accounting. 2. Select Show Information from the Step list. 3. Click Summary.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting To display basic accounting information and statistics recorded for user sessions: 1. Click Security, AAA, Accounting. 2. Select Show Information from the Step list. 3. Click Statistics.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting ◆ Server Group Name - Specifies the authorization server group. (Range: 1-64 characters) The group name “tacacs+” specifies all configured TACACS+ hosts (see "Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication" on page 307). Any other group name refers to a server group configured on the TACACS+ Group Settings page. Authorization is only supported for TACACS+ servers.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Figure 164: Configuring AAA Authorization Methods To show the authorization method applied to the EXEC service type and the assigned server group: 1. Click Security, AAA, Authorization. 2. Select Configure Method from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 165: Showing AAA Authorization Methods To configure the authorization method applied to local console, Telnet, or SSH connections: 1.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring User Accounts Figure 166: Configuring AAA Authorization Methods for Exec Service To display a the configured authorization method and assigned server groups for The Exec service type: 1. Click Security, AAA, Authorization. 2. Select Show Information from the Step list.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring User Accounts PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ User Name – The name of the user. (Maximum length: 32 characters; maximum number of users: 16) ◆ Access Level – Specifies the user level. (Options: 0 - Normal, 15 - Privileged) Normal privilege level provides access to a limited number of the commands which display the current status of the switch, as well as several database clear and reset functions.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Web Authentication Figure 168: Configuring User Accounts To show user accounts: 1. Click Security, User Accounts. 2. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 169: Showing User Accounts WEB AUTHENTICATION Web authentication allows stations to authenticate and access the network in situations where 802.1X or Network Access authentication are infeasible or impractical.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Web Authentication Local/Remote Logon Authentication" on page 307.) NOTE: Web authentication cannot be configured on trunk ports. CONFIGURING GLOBAL Use the Security > Web Authentication (Configure Global) page to edit the SETTINGS FOR WEB global parameters for web authentication. AUTHENTICATION CLI REFERENCES ◆ "Web Authentication" on page 885 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Web Authentication Status – Enables web authentication for the switch.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Web Authentication Figure 170: Configuring Global Settings for Web Authentication CONFIGURING Use the Security > Web Authentication (Configure Interface) page to INTERFACE SETTINGS enable web authentication on a port, and display information for any FOR WEB connected hosts. AUTHENTICATION CLI REFERENCES ◆ "Web Authentication" on page 885 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Port – Indicates the port being configured.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) 4. Mark the check box for any host addresses that need to be reauthenticated, and click Re-authenticate. Figure 171: Configuring Interface Settings for Web Authentication NETWORK ACCESS (MAC ADDRESS AUTHENTICATION) Some devices connected to switch ports may not be able to support 802.1X authentication due to hardware or software limitations.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) The user name and password are both equal to the MAC address being authenticated. On the RADIUS server, PAP user name and passwords must be configured in the MAC address format XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX (all in upper case). ◆ Authenticated MAC addresses are stored as dynamic entries in the switch secure MAC address table and are removed when the aging time expires.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) For example, the attribute “service-policy-in=pp1;rate-limitinput=100” specifies that the diffserv profile name is “pp1,” and the ingress rate limit profile value is 100 kbps. ◆ If duplicate profiles are passed in the Filter-ID attribute, then only the first profile is used. For example, if the attribute is “service-policy-in=p1;service-policyin=p2”, then the switch applies only the DiffServ profile “p1.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) CONFIGURING GLOBAL SETTINGS FOR NETWORK ACCESS MAC address authentication is configured on a per-port basis, however there are two configurable parameters that apply globally to all ports on the switch. Use the Security > Network Access (Configure Global) page to configure MAC address authentication aging and reauthentication time.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) Figure 172: Configuring Global Settings for Network Access CONFIGURING Use the Security > Network Access (Configure Interface - General) page to NETWORK ACCESS configure MAC authentication on switch ports, including enabling address FOR PORTS authentication, setting the maximum MAC count, and enabling dynamic VLAN or dynamic QoS assignments.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) ◆ Dynamic VLAN – Enables dynamic VLAN assignment for an authenticated port. When enabled, any VLAN identifiers returned by the RADIUS server through the 802.1X authentication process are applied to the port, providing the VLANs have already been created on the switch. (GVRP is not used to create the VLANs.) (Default: Enabled) The VLAN settings specified by the first authenticated MAC address are implemented for a port.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) Figure 173: Configuring Interface Settings for Network Access CONFIGURING Use the Security > Network Access (Configure Interface - Link Detection) PORT LINK DETECTION page to send an SNMP trap and/or shut down a port when a link event occurs.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) WEB INTERFACE To configure link detection on switch ports: 1. Click Security, Network Access. 2. Select Configure Interface from the Step list. 3. Click the Link Detection button. 4. Modify the link detection status, trigger condition, and the response for any port. 5. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) ◆ MAC Address Mask – The filter rule will check for the range of MAC addresses defined by the MAC bit mask. If you omit the mask, the system will assign the default mask of an exact match. (Range: 000000000000 - FFFFFFFFFFFF; Default: FFFFFFFFFFFF) WEB INTERFACE To add a MAC address filter for MAC authentication: 1. Click Security, Network Access. 2. Select Configure MAC Filter from the Step list. 3.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) DISPLAYING SECURE Use the Security > Network Access (Show Information) page to display the MAC ADDRESS authenticated MAC addresses stored in the secure MAC address table. INFORMATION Information on the secure MAC entries can be displayed and selected entries can be removed from the table.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring HTTPS Figure 177: Showing Addresses Authenticated for Network Access CONFIGURING HTTPS You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTPS) over the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an encrypted connection) to the switch’s web interface. CONFIGURING GLOBAL Use the Security > HTTPS (Configure Global) page to enable or disable SETTINGS FOR HTTPS HTTPS and specify the UDP port used for this service.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring HTTPS ◆ The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection. A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 6, Mozilla Firefox 4, or Google Chrome 29, or more recent versions. ◆ The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS: Table 20: HTTPS System Support ◆ Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 6.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring HTTPS Figure 178: Configuring HTTPS REPLACING THE Use the Security > HTTPS (Copy Certificate) page to replace the default DEFAULT SECURE-SITE secure-site certificate. CERTIFICATE When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS (for secure access), a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate appears for the switch. By default, the certificate that the web browser displays will be associated with a warning that the site is not recognized as a secure site.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring HTTPS ◆ Private Key Source File Name – Name of private key file stored on the TFTP server. ◆ Private Password – Password stored in the private key file. This password is used to verify authorization for certificate use, and is verified when downloading the certificate to the switch. ◆ Confirm Password – Re-type the string entered in the previous field to ensure no errors were made. The switch will not download the certificate if these two fields do not match.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring the Secure Shell CONFIGURING THE SECURE SHELL The Berkeley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments. These tools, including commands such as rlogin (remote login), rsh (remote shell), and rcp (remote copy), are not secure from hostile attacks.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring the Secure Shell 79355942303577413098022737087794545240839717526463580581767167 09574804776117 3. Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – See "Importing User Public Keys" on page 346, or use the copy tftp public-key command (page 718) to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client’s granted management access to the switch. (Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as described on page 322.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring the Secure Shell c. If a match is found, the switch uses its secret key to generate a random 256-bit string as a challenge, encrypts this string with the user’s public key, and sends it to the client. d. The client uses its private key to decrypt the challenge string, computes the MD5 checksum, and sends the checksum back to the switch. e. The switch compares the checksum sent from the client against that computed for the original string it sent.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring the Secure Shell ◆ Version – The Secure Shell version number. Version 2.0 is displayed, but the switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1.5 or 2.0 clients. ◆ Authentication Timeout – Specifies the time interval in seconds that the SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring the Secure Shell GENERATING THE Use the Security > SSH (Configure Host Key - Generate) page to generate HOST KEY PAIR a host public/private key pair used to provide secure communications between an SSH client and the switch. After generating this key pair, you must provide the host public key to SSH clients and import the client’s public key to the switch as described in the section "Importing User Public Keys" on page 346.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring the Secure Shell Figure 181: Generating the SSH Host Key Pair To display or clear the SSH host key pair: 1. Click Security, SSH. 2. Select Configure Host Key from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. 4. Select the host-key type to clear. 5. Click Clear. Figure 182: Showing the SSH Host Key Pair IMPORTING USER Use the Security > SSH (Configure User Key - Copy) page to upload a PUBLIC KEYS user’s public key to the switch.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring the Secure Shell PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ User Name – This drop-down box selects the user who’s public key you wish to manage. Note that you must first create users on the User Accounts page (see "Configuring User Accounts" on page 322). ◆ User Key Type – The type of public key to upload. ■ RSA: The switch accepts a RSA version 1 encrypted public key. ■ DSA: The switch accepts a DSA version 2 encrypted public key.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists To display or clear the SSH user’s public key: 1. Click Security, SSH. 2. Select Configure User Key from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. 4. Select a user from the User Name list. 5. Select the host-key type to clear. 6. Click Clear.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists COMMAND USAGE The following restrictions apply to ACLs: ◆ The maximum number of ACLs is 64. ◆ The maximum number of rules per system is 512 rules. ◆ An ACL can have up to 64 rules. However, due to resource restrictions, the average number of rules bound to the ports should not exceed 20.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists SETTING A Use the Security > ACL (Configure Time Range) page to sets a time range TIME RANGE during which ACL functions are applied. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "Time Range" on page 762 COMMAND USAGE If both an absolute rule and one or more periodic rules are configured for the same time range (i.e., named entry), that entry will only take effect if the current time is within the absolute time range and one of the periodic time ranges.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists Figure 185: Setting the Name of a Time Range To show a list of time ranges: 1. Click Security, ACL. 2. Select Configure Time Range from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 186: Showing a List of Time Ranges To configure a rule for a time range: 1. Click Security, ACL. 2. Select Configure Time Range from the Step list. 3. Select Add Rule from the Action list. 4. Select the name of time range from the drop-down list. 5.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists Figure 187: Add a Rule to a Time Range To show the rules configured for a time range: 1. Click Security, ACL. 2. Select Configure Time Range from the Step list. 3. Select Show Rule from the Action list.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists Source Guard filter rules, Quality of Service (QoS) processes, QinQ, MAC-based VLANs, VLAN translation, or traps. For example, when binding an ACL to a port, each rule in an ACL will use two PCEs; and when setting an IP Source Guard filter rule for a port, the system will also use two PCEs. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Total Policy Control Entries – The number policy control entries in use.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ ACL Name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 32 characters) ◆ Type – The following filter modes are supported: ■ IP Standard: IPv4 ACL mode filters packets based on the source IPv4 address. ■ IP Extended: IPv4 ACL mode filters packets based on the source or destination IPv4 address, as well as the protocol type and protocol port number.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists To show a list of ACLs: 1. Click Security, ACL. 2. Select Configure ACL from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 191: Showing a List of ACLs CONFIGURING A Use the Security > ACL (Configure ACL - Add Rule - IP Standard) page to STANDARD IPV4 ACL configure a Standard IPv4 ACL.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists ◆ Source Subnet Mask – A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255, each separated by a period. The mask uses 1 bits to indicate “match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address, and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned. ◆ Time Range – Name of a time range. WEB INTERFACE To add rules to an IPv4 Standard ACL: 1.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists CONFIGURING AN Use the Security > ACL (Configure ACL - Add Rule - IP Extended) page to EXTENDED IPV4 ACL configure an Extended IPv4 ACL. CLI REFERENCES ◆ ◆ ◆ "permit, deny (Extended IPv4 ACL)" on page 946 "show ip access-list" on page 949 "Time Range" on page 762 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Type – Selects the type of ACLs to show in the Name list. ◆ Name – Shows the names of ACLs matching the selected type.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists where the equivalent binary bit “1” means to match a bit and “0” means to ignore a bit.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists Figure 193: Configuring an Extended IPv4 ACL CONFIGURING A Use the Security > ACL (Configure ACL - Add Rule - IPv6 Standard) page to STANDARD IPV6 ACL configure a Standard IPv6ACL. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "permit, deny (Standard IPv6 ACL)" on page 951 ◆ "show ipv6 access-list" on page 955 ◆ "Time Range" on page 762 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed in the web interface: ◆ Type – Selects the type of ACLs to show in the Name list.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists ◆ Time Range – Name of a time range. WEB INTERFACE To add rules to a Standard IPv6 ACL: 1. Click Security, ACL. 2. Select Configure ACL from the Step list. 3. Select Add Rule from the Action list. 4. Select IPv6 Standard from the Type list. 5. Select the name of an ACL from the Name list. 6. Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). 7. Select the source address type (Any, Host, or IPv6-prefix). 8. If you select “Host,” enter a specific address.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists CONFIGURING AN Use the Security > ACL (Configure ACL - Add Rule - IPv6 Extended) page EXTENDED IPV6 ACL to configure an Extended IPv6 ACL. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "permit, deny (Extended IPv6 ACL)" on page 952 ◆ "show ipv6 access-list" on page 955 ◆ "Time Range" on page 762 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed in the web interface: ◆ Type – Selects the type of ACLs to show in the Name list.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists WEB INTERFACE To add rules to an Extended IPv6 ACL: 1. Click Security, ACL. 2. Select Configure ACL from the Step list. 3. Select Add Rule from the Action list. 4. Select IPv6 Extended from the Type list. 5. Select the name of an ACL from the Name list. 6. Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). 7. Select the address type (Any or IPv6-prefix). 8. If you select “Host,” enter a specific address.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists CONFIGURING Use the Security > ACL (Configure ACL - Add Rule - MAC) page to A MAC ACL configure a MAC ACL based on hardware addresses, packet format, and Ethernet type. CLI REFERENCES ◆ ◆ ◆ "permit, deny (MAC ACL)" on page 957 "show ip access-list" on page 949 "Time Range" on page 762 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Type – Selects the type of ACLs to show in the Name list. ◆ Name – Shows the names of ACLs matching the selected type.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists WEB INTERFACE To add rules to a MAC ACL: 1. Click Security, ACL. 2. Select Configure ACL from the Step list. 3. Select Add Rule from the Action list. 4. Select MAC from the Type list. 5. Select the name of an ACL from the Name list. 6. Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). 7. Select the address type (Any, Host, or MAC). 8. If you select “Host,” enter a specific address (e.g., 11-22-33-44-5566).
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists CONFIGURING Use the Security > ACL (Configure ACL - Add Rule - ARP) page to configure AN ARP ACL ACLs based on ARP message addresses. ARP Inspection can then use these ACLs to filter suspicious traffic (see "Configuring Global Settings for ARP Inspection" on page 372).
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists WEB INTERFACE To add rules to an ARP ACL: 1. Click Security, ACL. 2. Select Configure ACL from the Step list. 3. Select Add Rule from the Action list. 4. Select ARP from the Type list. 5. Select the name of an ACL from the Name list. 6. Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). 7. Select the packet type (Request, Response, All). 8. Select the address type (Any, Host, or IP). 9. If you select “Host,” enter a specific address (e.g., 11-22-33-44-5566).
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists BINDING A PORT TO AN After configuring ACLs, use the Security > ACL (Configure Interface – ACCESS CONTROL Configure) page to bind the ports that need to filter traffic to the LIST appropriate ACLs. You can assign one IP access list and one MAC access list to any port.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists Figure 198: Binding a Port to an ACL CONFIGURING After configuring ACLs, use the Security > ACL (Configure Interface – Add ACL MIRRORING Mirror) page to mirror traffic matching an ACL from one or more source ports to a target port for real-time analysis. You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the target port and study the traffic crossing the source VLAN(s) in a completely unobtrusive manner.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists 3. Select Add Mirror from the Action list. 4. Select a port. 5. Select the name of an ACL from the ACL list. 6. Click Apply. Figure 199: Configuring ACL Mirroring To show the ACLs to be mirrored: 1. Select Configure Interface from the Step list. 2. Select Show Mirror from the Action list. 3. Select a port.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Access Control Lists SHOWING Use the Security > ACL > Configure Interface (Show Hardware Counters) ACL HARDWARE page to show statistics for ACL hardware counters. COUNTERS CLI REFERENCES ◆ "show access-list" on page 966 ◆ "clear access-list hardware counters" on page 965 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Port – Port identifier. (Range: 1-28/52) ◆ Type – Selects the type of ACL. ◆ Direction – Displays statistics for ingress.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures ARP Inspection Figure 201: Showing ACL Statistics ARP INSPECTION ARP Inspection is a security feature that validates the MAC Address bindings for Address Resolution Protocol packets. It provides protection against ARP traffic with invalid MAC-to-IP address bindings, which forms the basis for certain “man-in-the-middle” attacks.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures ARP Inspection ◆ ■ When ARP Inspection is disabled, all ARP request and reply packets will bypass the ARP Inspection engine and their switching behavior will match that of all other packets. ■ Disabling and then re-enabling global ARP Inspection will not affect the ARP Inspection configuration of any VLANs. ■ When ARP Inspection is disabled globally, it is still possible to configure ARP Inspection for individual VLANs.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures ARP Inspection ARP Inspection Logging ◆ By default, logging is active for ARP Inspection, and cannot be disabled. ◆ The administrator can configure the log facility rate. ◆ When the switch drops a packet, it places an entry in the log buffer, then generates a system message on a rate-controlled basis. After the system message is generated, the entry is cleared from the log buffer.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures ARP Inspection WEB INTERFACE To configure global settings for ARP Inspection: 1. Click Security, ARP Inspection. 2. Select Configure General from the Step list. 3. Enable ARP inspection globally, enable any of the address validation options, and adjust any of the logging parameters if required. 4. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures ARP Inspection packets not matching any rules are dropped, and the DHCP snooping bindings database check is bypassed. ◆ If Static is not specified, ARP packets are first validated against the selected ACL; if no ACL rules match the packets, then the DHCP snooping bindings database determines their validity. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ ARP Inspection VLAN ID – Selects any configured VLAN.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures ARP Inspection CONFIGURING Use the Security > ARP Inspection (Configure Interface) page to specify INTERFACE SETTINGS the ports that require ARP inspection, and to adjust the packet inspection FOR ARP INSPECTION rate. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "ARP Inspection" on page 924 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Interface – Port or trunk identifier. ◆ Trust Status – Configures the port as trusted or untrusted.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures ARP Inspection Figure 204: Configuring Interface Settings for ARP Inspection DISPLAYING Use the Security > ARP Inspection (Show Information - Show Statistics) ARP INSPECTION page to display statistics about the number of ARP packets processed, or STATISTICS dropped for various reasons.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures ARP Inspection WEB INTERFACE To display statistics for ARP Inspection: 1. Click Security, ARP Inspection. 2. Select Show Information from the Step list. 3. Select Show Statistics from the Action list. Figure 205: Displaying Statistics for ARP Inspection DISPLAYING THE Use the Security > ARP Inspection (Show Information - Show Log) page to ARP INSPECTION LOG show information about entries stored in the log, including the associated VLAN, port, and address components.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access WEB INTERFACE To display the ARP Inspection log: 1. Click Security, ARP Inspection. 2. Select Show Information from the Step list. 3. Select Show Log from the Action list.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access ◆ You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by specifying both the start address and end address. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Mode ■ Web – Configures IP address(es) for the web group. ■ SNMP – Configures IP address(es) for the SNMP group. ■ Telnet – Configures IP address(es) for the Telnet group. ■ All – Configures IP address(es) for all groups.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring Port Security To show a list of IP addresses authorized for management access: 1. Click Security, IP Filter. 2. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 208: Showing IP Addresses Authorized for Management Access CONFIGURING PORT SECURITY Use the Security > Port Security page to configure the maximum number of device MAC addresses that can be learned by a switch port, stored in the address table, and authorized to access the network.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring Port Security ◆ When the port security state is changed from enabled to disabled, all dynamically learned entries are cleared from the address table. ◆ If port security is enabled, and the maximum number of allowed addresses are set to a non-zero value, any device not in the address table that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication The maximum address count is effective when port security is enabled or disabled. ◆ Current MAC Count – The number of MAC addresses currently associated with this interface. ◆ MAC Filter – Shows if MAC address filtering has been set under Security > Network Access (Configure MAC Filter) as described on page 334. ◆ MAC Filter ID – The identifier for a MAC address filter.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network. This switch uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs (EAPOL) to exchange authentication protocol messages with the client, and a remote RADIUS authentication server to verify user identity and access rights. When a client (i.e., Supplicant) connects to a switch port, the switch (i.e.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication ◆ Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1X client software installed and properly configured. ◆ The RADIUS server and 802.1X client support EAP. (The switch only supports EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client.) ◆ The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP authentication type – MD5, PEAP, TLS, or TTLS.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication ◆ Identity Profile Password – The dot1x supplicant password used to identify this switch as a supplicant when responding to an MD5 challenge from the authenticator. (Range: 1-8 characters) ◆ Confirm Profile Password – This field is used to confirm the dot1x supplicant password. ◆ Default – Sets all configurable 802.1X global and port settings to their default values. WEB INTERFACE To configure global settings for 802.1X: 1.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication COMMAND USAGE ◆ When the switch functions as a local authenticator between supplicant devices attached to the switch and the authentication server, configure the parameters for the exchange of EAP messages between the authenticator and clients on the Authenticator configuration page.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication In this mode, only one host connected to a port needs to pass authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access. Similarly, a port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails re-authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message. ■ MAC-Based – Allows multiple hosts to connect to this port, with each host needing to be authenticated.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication ◆ Re-authentication Period – Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re-authenticated. (Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 3600 seconds) ◆ Re-authentication Max Retries – The maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request/identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication WEB INTERFACE To configure port authenticator settings for 802.1X: 1. Click Security, Port Authentication. 2. Select Configure Interface from the Step list. 3. Click Authenticator. 4. Modify the authentication settings for each port as required. 5. Click Apply Figure 212: Configuring Interface Settings for 802.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication COMMAND USAGE ◆ When devices attached to a port must submit requests to another authenticator on the network, configure the Identity Profile parameters on the Configure Global page (see "Configuring 802.1X Global Settings" on page 385) which identify this switch as a supplicant, and configure the supplicant parameters for those ports which must authenticate clients through the remote authenticator on this configuration page.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication WEB INTERFACE To configure port authenticator settings for 802.1X: 1. Click Security, Port Authentication. 2. Select Configure Interface from the Step list. 3. Click Supplicant. 4. Modify the supplicant settings for each port as required. 5. Click Apply Figure 213: Configuring Interface Settings for 802.1X Port Supplicant DISPLAYING Use the Security > Port Authentication (Show Statistics) page to display 802.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication Table 23: 802.1X Statistics (Continued) Parameter Description Rx EAPOL Total The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this Authenticator. Rx Last EAPOLVer The protocol version number carried in the most recent EAPOL frame received by this Authenticator. Rx Last EAPOLSrc The source MAC address carried in the most recent EAPOL frame received by this Authenticator.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication WEB INTERFACE To display port authenticator statistics for 802.1X: 1. Click Security, Port Authentication. 2. Select Show Statistics from the Step list. 3. Click Authenticator. Figure 214: Showing Statistics for 802.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures DoS Protection To display port supplicant statistics for 802.1X: 1. Click Security, Port Authentication. 2. Select Show Statistics from the Step list. 3. Click Supplicant. Figure 215: Showing Statistics for 802.1X Port Supplicant DOS PROTECTION Use the Security > DoS Protection page to protect against denial-of-service (DoS) attacks. A DoS attack is an attempt to block the services provided by a computer or network resource.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures DoS Protection ◆ Echo/Chargen Attack Rate – Maximum allowed rate. (Range: 64-2000 kbits/second; Default: 1000 kbits/second) ◆ Smurf Attack – Attacks in which a perpetrator generates a large amount of spoofed ICMP Echo Request traffic to the broadcast destination IP address (255.255.255.255), all of which uses a spoofed source address of the intended victim. The victim should crash due to the many interrupts required to send ICMP Echo response packets.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures IPv4 Source Guard URG flag to the target computer on TCP port 139 (NetBIOS), casing it to lock up and display a “Blue Screen of Death.” This did not cause any damage to, or change data on, the computer’s hard disk, but any unsaved data would be lost. Microsoft made patches to prevent the WinNuke attack, but the OOB packets. (Default: Disabled) ◆ WinNuke Attack Rate – Maximum allowed rate.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures IPv4 Source Guard CONFIGURING Use the Security > IP Source Guard > Port Configuration page to set the PORTS FOR IPV4 filtering type based on source IP address, or source IP address and MAC SOURCE GUARD address pairs. IP Source Guard is used to filter traffic on an insecure port which receives messages from outside the network or fire wall, and therefore may be subject to traffic attacks caused by a host trying to use the IP address of a neighbor.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures IPv4 Source Guard PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ ◆ Filter Type – Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based source IP address, or source IP address and corresponding MAC address. (Default: None) ■ None – Disables IP source guard filtering on the port. ■ SIP – Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses stored in the binding table.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures IPv4 Source Guard CONFIGURING Use the Security > IP Source Guard > Static Configuration page to bind a STATIC BINDINGS FOR static address to a port. Table entries include a MAC address, IP address, IPV4 SOURCE GUARD lease time, entry type (Static, Dynamic), VLAN identifier, and port identifier. All static entries are configured with an infinite lease time, which is indicated with a value of zero in the table.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures IPv4 Source Guard ◆ IP Address – IP address corresponding to the client. ◆ Lease Time – The time for which this IP address is leased to the client. (This value is zero for all static addresses.) WEB INTERFACE To configure static bindings for IP Source Guard: 1. Click Security, IP Source Guard, Static Configuration. 2. Select Add from the Action list. 3. Enter the required bindings for each port. 4.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures IPv4 Source Guard DISPLAYING INFORMATION FOR DYNAMIC IPV4 SOURCE GUARD BINDINGS Use the Security > IP Source Guard > Dynamic Binding page to display the source-guard binding table for a selected interface. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "show ip source-guard binding" on page 918 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: Query by ◆ Port – A port on this switch. ◆ VLAN – ID of a configured VLAN (Range: 1-4094) ◆ MAC Address – A valid unicast MAC address.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures IPv6 Source Guard Figure 220: Showing the IPv4 Source Guard Binding Table IPV6 SOURCE GUARD IPv6 Source Guard is a security feature that filters IPv6 traffic on nonrouted, Layer 2 network interfaces based on manually configured entries in the IPv6 Source Guard table, or dynamic entries in the Neighbor Discovery Snooping table or DHCPv6 Snooping table when either snooping protocol is enabled (see the DHCPv6 Snooping commands).
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures IPv6 Source Guard snooping or DHCPv6 snooping, or static addresses configured in the source guard binding table. The port allows only IPv6 traffic with a matching entry in the binding table and denies all other IPv6 traffic. ◆ Table entries include a MAC address, IPv6 global unicast address, entry type (Static-IPv6-SG-Binding, Dynamic-ND-Binding, Dynamic-DHCPv6Binding), VLAN identifier, and port identifier.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures IPv6 Source Guard ■ This parameter sets the maximum number of IPv6 global unicast source IPv6 address entries that can be mapped to an interface in the binding table, including both dynamic entries discovered by ND snooping, DHCPv6 snooping (see the DHCPv6 Snooping commands), and static entries set by IPv6 Source Guard (see "Configuring Static Bindings for IPv6 Source Guard" on page 405).
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures IPv6 Source Guard COMMAND USAGE ◆ Traffic filtering is based only on the source IPv6 address, VLAN ID, and port number. ◆ Static addresses entered in the source guard binding table are automatically configured with an infinite lease time. ◆ When source guard is enabled, traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via ND snooping, DHCPv6 snooping, or static addresses configured in the source guard binding table.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures IPv6 Source Guard ◆ IPv6 Address – IPv6 address corresponding to the client. ◆ Type – Shows the entry type: ■ DHCP – Dynamic DHCPv6 binding, stateful address. ■ ND – Dynamic Neighbor Discovery binding, stateless address. ■ STA – Static IPv6 Source Guard binding. WEB INTERFACE To configure static bindings for IPv6 Source Guard: 1. Click Security, IPv6 Source Guard, Static Configuration. 2. Select Add from the Action list. 3.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures IPv6 Source Guard DISPLAYING INFORMATION FOR DYNAMIC IPV6 SOURCE GUARD BINDINGS Use the Security > IPv6 Source Guard > Dynamic Binding page to display the source-guard binding table for a selected interface. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "show ipv6 source-guard binding" on page 924 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: Query by ◆ Port – A port on this switch. ◆ VLAN – ID of a configured VLAN (Range: 1-4094) ◆ MAC Address – A valid unicast MAC address.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures DHCP Snooping DHCP SNOOPING The addresses assigned to DHCP clients on insecure ports can be carefully controlled using the dynamic bindings registered with DHCP Snooping (or using the static bindings configured with IP Source Guard). DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or other devices which send port-related information to a DHCP server. This information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures DHCP Snooping ■ If the DHCP packet is from a client, such as a DECLINE or RELEASE message, the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the binding table. ■ If the DHCP packet is from a client, such as a DISCOVER, REQUEST, INFORM, DECLINE or RELEASE message, the packet is forwarded if MAC address verification is disabled.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures DHCP Snooping the DHCP client request, including the port and VLAN ID. This allows DHCP client-server exchange messages to be forwarded between the server and client without having to flood them to the entire VLAN. ◆ If DHCP Snooping Information Option 82 is enabled on the switch, information may be inserted into a DHCP request packet received over any VLAN (depending on DHCP snooping filtering rules).
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures DHCP Snooping ◆ ■ IP Address – Inserts an IP address in the remote ID sub-option for the DHCP snooping agent (i.e., the IP address of the management interface). This attribute can be encoded in Hexadecimal or ASCII. ■ string - An arbitrary string inserted into the remote identifier field. (Range: 1-32 characters) DHCP Snooping Information Option Policy – Specifies how to handle DHCP client request packets which already contain Option 82 information.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures DHCP Snooping DHCP Use the IP Service > DHCP > Snooping (Configure VLAN) page to enable or SNOOPING VLAN disable DHCP snooping on specific VLANs. CONFIGURATION CLI REFERENCES ◆ "ip dhcp snooping vlan" on page 897 COMMAND USAGE ◆ When DHCP snooping is enabled globally on the switch, and enabled on the specified VLAN, DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures DHCP Snooping CONFIGURING PORTS Use the IP Service > DHCP > Snooping (Configure Interface) page to FOR DHCP SNOOPING configure switch ports as trusted or untrusted. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "ip dhcp snooping trust" on page 899 COMMAND USAGE ◆ A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network. An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or fire wall.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures DHCP Snooping Figure 227: Configuring the Port Mode for DHCP Snooping DISPLAYING DHCP Use the IP Service > DHCP > Snooping (Show Information) page to display SNOOPING BINDING entries in the binding table. INFORMATION CLI REFERENCES ◆ "show ip dhcp snooping binding" on page 902 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ MAC Address – Physical address associated with the entry. ◆ IP Address – IP address corresponding to the client.
CHAPTER 13 | Security Measures DHCP Snooping WEB INTERFACE To display the binding table for DHCP Snooping: 1. Click IP Service, DHCP, Snooping. 2. Select Show Information from the Step list. 3. Use the Store or Clear function if required.
14 BASIC ADMINISTRATION PROTOCOLS This chapter describes basic administration tasks including: ◆ Event Logging – Sets conditions for logging event messages to system memory or flash memory, configures conditions for sending trap messages to remote log servers, and configures trap reporting to remote hosts using Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Configuring Event Logging CONFIGURING EVENT LOGGING The switch allows you to control the logging of error messages, including the type of events that are recorded in switch memory, logging to a remote System Log (syslog) server, and displays a list of recent event messages. SYSTEM LOG Use the Administration > Log > System (Configure Global) page to enable CONFIGURATION or disable event logging, and specify which levels are logged to RAM or flash memory.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Configuring Event Logging Table 24: Logging Levels (Continued) Level Severity Name Description 1 Alert Immediate action needed 0 Emergency System unusable * There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release. ◆ RAM Level – Limits log messages saved to the switch’s temporary RAM memory for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 7 is specified, all messages from level 0 to level 7 will be logged to RAM.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Configuring Event Logging 3. Click RAM to display log messages stored in system memory, or Flash to display messages stored in flash memory. This page allows you to scroll through the logged system and event messages. The switch can store up to 2048 log entries in temporary random access memory (RAM; i.e., memory flushed on power reset) and up to 4096 entries in permanent flash memory.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Configuring Event Logging 3 is specified, all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be sent to the remote server. (Range: 0-7, Default: 7) ◆ Server IP Address – Specifies the IPv4 or IPv6 address of a remote server which will be sent syslog messages. ◆ UDP Port – Specifies the UDP port number used by the remote server. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 514) WEB INTERFACE To configure the logging of error messages to remote servers: 1.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Configuring Event Logging higher will be sent to the configured email recipients. For example, using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0. (Default: Level 7) ◆ Email Source Address – Sets the email address used for the “From” field in alert messages. You may use a symbolic email address that identifies the switch, or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol LINK LAYER DISCOVERY PROTOCOL Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain. LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device. Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value (TLV) format according to the IEEE 802.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol The transmit delay is used to prevent a series of successive LLDP transmissions during a short period of rapid changes in local LLDP MIB objects, and to increase the probability that multiple, rather than single changes, are reported in each transmission.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol Figure 233: Configuring LLDP Timing Attributes CONFIGURING Use the Administration > LLDP (Configure Interface - Configure General) LLDP INTERFACE page to specify the message attributes for individual interfaces, including ATTRIBUTES whether messages are transmitted, received, or both transmitted and received, whether SNMP notifications are sent, and the type of information advertised.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol ◆ MED Notification – Enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications about LLDP-MED changes. (Default: Disabled) ◆ Basic Optional TLVs – Configures basic information included in the TLV field of advertised messages. ■ Management Address – The management address protocol packet includes the IPv4 address of the switch.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol ◆ ◆ ◆ ■ VLAN ID – The port’s default VLAN identifier (PVID) indicates the VLAN with which untagged or priority-tagged frames are associated (see "IEEE 802.1Q VLANs" on page 195). ■ VLAN Name – The name of all VLANs to which this interface has been assigned (see "IEEE 802.1Q VLANs" on page 195. ■ Port and Protocol VLAN ID – The port-based protocol VLANs configured on this interface (see "Protocol VLANs" on page 216). 802.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol ■ Device entry refers to – The type of device to which the location applies: ■ Location of DHCP server. ■ Location of network element closest to client. ■ Location of client. (This is the default.) WEB INTERFACE To configure LLDP interface attributes: 1. Click Administration, LLDP. 2. Select Configure Interface from the Step list. 3. Select Configure General from the Action list. 4.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol CONFIGURING Use the Administration > LLDP (Configure Interface – Add CA-Type) page LLDP INTERFACE to specify the physical location of the device attached to an interface.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol 3. Select Add CA-Type from the Action list. 4. Select an interface from the Port or Trunk list. 5. Specify a CA-Type and CA-Value pair. 6. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol ◆ Chassis ID – An octet string indicating the specific identifier for the particular chassis in this system. ◆ System Name – A string that indicates the system’s administratively assigned name (see "Displaying System Information" on page 119). ◆ System Description – A textual description of the network entity. This field is also displayed by the show system command.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol ◆ Port/Trunk ID Type – There are several ways in which a port may be identified. A port ID subtype is used to indicate how the port is being referenced in the Port ID TLV.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol Figure 236: Displaying Local Device Information for LLDP (General) Figure 237: Displaying Local Device Information for LLDP (Port) Figure 238: Displaying Local Device Information for LLDP (Port Details) – 433 –
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol DISPLAYING LLDP Use the Administration > LLDP (Show Remote Device Information) page to REMOTE DEVICE display information about devices connected directly to the switch’s ports INFORMATION which are advertising information through LLDP, or to display detailed information about an LLDP-enabled device connected to a specific port on the local switch.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol ◆ Port ID – A string that contains the specific identifier for the port from which this LLDPDU was transmitted. ◆ System Capabilities Supported – The capabilities that define the primary function(s) of the system. (See Table 27, "System Capabilities," on page 431.) ◆ System Capabilities Enabled – The primary function(s) of the system which are currently enabled. (See Table 27, "System Capabilities," on page 431.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol Table 29: Remote Port Auto-Negotiation Advertised Capability Bit Capability 3 100BASE-T4 4 100BASE-TX half duplex mode 5 100BASE-TX full duplex mode 6 100BASE-T2 half duplex mode 7 100BASE-T2 full duplex mode 8 PAUSE for full-duplex links 9 Asymmetric PAUSE for full-duplex links 10 Symmetric PAUSE for full-duplex links 11 Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE for full-duplex links 12 1000BASE-X, -LX, -SX, -CX half duple
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol points and others, will be classified according to their power requirements. Port Details – 802.3 Extension Trunk Information ◆ Remote Link Aggregation Capable – Shows if the remote port is not in link aggregation state and/or it does not support link aggregation. ◆ Remote Link Aggregation Status – The current aggregation status of the link. ◆ Remote Link Port ID – This object contains the IEEE 802.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol ◆ Current Capabilities – The set of capabilities that define the primary function(s) of the port which are currently enabled.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol the other items and described under “Configuring LLDP Interface Civic-Address.” ■ ECS ELIN – Emergency Call Service Emergency Location Identification Number supports traditional PSAP-based Emergency Call Service in North America. ◆ Country Code – The two-letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol Figure 239: Displaying Remote Device Information for LLDP (Port) – 440 –
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol Figure 240: Displaying Remote Device Information for LLDP (Port Details) – 441 –
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol Additional information displayed by an end-point device which advertises LLDP-MED TLVs is shown in the following figure. Figure 241: Displaying Remote Device Information for LLDP (End Node) DISPLAYING Use the Administration > LLDP (Show Device Statistics) page to display DEVICE STATISTICS statistics for LLDP-capable devices attached to the switch, and for LLDP protocol messages transmitted or received on all local interfaces.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Link Layer Discovery Protocol ◆ Neighbor Entries Age-out Count – The number of times that a neighbor’s information has been deleted from the LLDP remote systems MIB because the remote TTL timer has expired. Port/Trunk ◆ Frames Discarded – Number of frames discarded because they did not conform to the general validation rules as well as any specific usage rules defined for the particular TLV.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol Figure 243: Displaying LLDP Device Statistics (Port) SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network. Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches, routers and host computers.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol group also has a defined security access to set of MIB objects for reading and writing, which are known as “views.” The switch has a default view (all MIB objects) and default groups defined for security models v1 and v2c. The following table shows the security models and levels available and the system default settings.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access 1. Use the Administration > SNMP (Configure Global) page to enable SNMP on the switch, and to enable trap messages. 2. Use the Administration > SNMP (Configure Trap) page to specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to your management station. 3. Use the Administration > SNMP (Configure Engine) page to change the local engine ID.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol 3. Enable SNMP and the required trap types. 4. Click Apply Figure 244: Configuring Global Settings for SNMP SETTING THE Use the Administration > SNMP (Configure Engine - Set Engine ID) page to LOCAL ENGINE ID change the local engine ID. An SNMPv3 engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides on the switch. This engine protects against message replay, delay, and redirection.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol 3. Select Set Engine ID from the Action list. 4. Enter an ID of a least 9 hexadecimal characters. 5. Click Apply Figure 245: Configuring the Local Engine ID for SNMP SPECIFYING A Use the Administration > SNMP (Configure Engine - Add Remote Engine) REMOTE ENGINE ID page to configure a engine ID for a remote management station.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol WEB INTERFACE To configure a remote SNMP engine ID: 1. Click Administration, SNMP. 2. Select Configure Engine from the Step list. 3. Select Add Remote Engine from the Action list. 4. Enter an ID of a least 9 hexadecimal characters, and the IP address of the remote host. 5. Click Apply Figure 246: Configuring a Remote Engine ID for SNMP To show the remote SNMP engine IDs: 1. Click Administration, SNMP. 2.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: Add View ◆ View Name – The name of the SNMP view. (Range: 1-64 characters) ◆ OID Subtree – Specifies the initial object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree. Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string. Use the Add OID Subtree page to configure additional object identifiers.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol To show the SNMP views of the switch’s MIB database: 1. Click Administration, SNMP. 2. Select Configure View from the Step list. 3. Select Show View from the Action list. Figure 249: Showing SNMP Views To add an object identifier to an existing SNMP view of the switch’s MIB database: 1. Click Administration, SNMP. 2. Select Configure View from the Step list. 3. Select Add OID Subtree from the Action list. 4.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol To show the OID branches configured for the SNMP views of the switch’s MIB database: 1. Click Administration, SNMP. 2. Select Configure View from the Step list. 3. Select Show OID Subtree from the Action list. 4. Select a view name from the list of existing views.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol ◆ Read View – The configured view for read access. (Range: 1-32 characters) ◆ Write View – The configured view for write access. (Range: 1-32 characters) ◆ Notify View – The configured view for notifications. (Range: 1-32 characters) Table 31: Supported Notification Messages Model Level Group newRoot 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol Table 31: Supported Notification Messages (Continued) Model Level Group swPowerStatus ChangeTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.10.1.27.2.1.0.1 This trap is sent when the power state changes. swPortSecurityTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.10.1.27.2.1.0.36 This trap is sent when the port is being intruded. This trap will only be sent when the portSecActionTrap is enabled. swIpFilterRejectTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.10.1.27.2.1.0.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol Table 31: Supported Notification Messages (Continued) Model Level Group swMemoryUtiRisingThreshold Notification 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.10.1.27.2.1.0.109 This notification indicates that the memory utilization has risen from memoryUtiFallingThreshold to memoryUtiRisingThreshold. swMemoryUtiFallingThreshold Notification 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.10.1.27.2.1.0.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol WEB INTERFACE To configure an SNMP group: 1. Click Administration, SNMP. 2. Select Configure Group from the Step list. 3. Select Add from the Action list. 4. Enter a group name, assign a security model and level, and then select read, write, and notify views. 5. Click Apply Figure 252: Creating an SNMP Group To show SNMP groups: 1. Click Administration, SNMP. 2. Select Configure Group from the Step list. 3.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol SETTING COMMUNITY Use the Administration > SNMP (Configure User - Add Community) page to ACCESS STRINGS configure up to five community strings authorized for management access by clients using SNMP v1 and v2c. For security reasons, you should consider removing the default strings.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol To show the community access strings: 1. Click Administration, SNMP. 2. Select Configure User from the Step list. 3. Select Show Community from the Action list.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol ■ AuthPriv – SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption. ◆ Authentication Protocol – The method used for user authentication. (Options: MD5, SHA; Default: MD5) ◆ Authentication Password – A minimum of eight plain text characters is required. ◆ Privacy Protocol – The encryption algorithm use for data privacy; only 56-bit DES is currently available.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol To show local SNMPv3 users: 1. Click Administration, SNMP. 2. Select Configure User from the Step list. 3. Select Show SNMPv3 Local User from the Action list. Figure 257: Showing Local SNMPv3 Users CONFIGURING REMOTE Use the Administration > SNMP (Configure User - Add SNMPv3 Remote SNMPV3 USERS User) page to identify the source of SNMPv3 inform messages sent from the local switch. Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol ◆ Security Level – The following security levels are only used for the groups assigned to the SNMP security model: ■ noAuthNoPriv – There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications. (This is the default security level.) ■ AuthNoPriv – SNMP communications use authentication, but the data is not encrypted. ■ AuthPriv – SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol Figure 258: Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users To show remote SNMPv3 users: 1. Click Administration, SNMP. 2. Select Configure User from the Step list. 3. Select Show SNMPv3 Remote User from the Action list.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol SPECIFYING Use the Administration > SNMP (Configure Trap) page to specify the host TRAP MANAGERS devices to be sent traps and the types of traps to send. Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to the specified trap managers. You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to your management station (using network management software).
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: SNMP Version 1 ◆ IP Address – IPv4 or IPv6 address of a new management station to receive notification message (i.e., the targeted recipient). ◆ Version – Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1, v2c, or v3 traps. (Default: v1) ◆ Community String – Specifies a valid community string for the new trap manager entry.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Version 3 ◆ IP Address – IPv4 or IPv6 address of a new management station to receive notification message (i.e., the targeted recipient). ◆ Version – Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1, v2c, or v3 traps. ◆ Notification Type ◆ ■ Traps – Notifications are sent as trap messages. ■ Inform – Notifications are sent as inform messages. Note that this option is only available for version 2c and 3 hosts.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol WEB INTERFACE To configure trap managers: 1. Click Administration, SNMP. 2. Select Configure Trap from the Step list. 3. Select Add from the Action list. 4. Fill in the required parameters based on the selected SNMP version. 5.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol Figure 262: Configuring Trap Managers (SNMPv3) To show configured trap managers: 1. Click Administration, SNMP. 2. Select Configure Trap from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 263: Showing Trap Managers CREATING SNMP Use the Administration > SNMP (Configure Notify Filter - Add) page to NOTIFICATION LOGS create an SNMP notification log.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol COMMAND USAGE ◆ Systems that support SNMP often need a mechanism for recording Notification information as a hedge against lost notifications, whether there are Traps or Informs that may be exceeding retransmission limits. The Notification Log MIB (NLM, RFC 3014) provides an infrastructure in which information from other MIBs may be logged.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol 4. Fill in the IP address of a configured trap manager and the filter profile name. 5. Click Apply Figure 264: Creating SNMP Notification Logs To show configured SNMP notification logs: 1. Click Administration, SNMP. 2. Select Configure Notify Filter from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Simple Network Management Protocol ◆ Unknown community name – The total number of SNMP messages delivered to the SNMP entity which used a SNMP community name not known to said entity. ◆ Illegal operation for community name supplied – The total number of SNMP messages delivered to the SNMP entity which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP community named in the message. ◆ Encoding errors – The total number of ASN.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Remote Monitoring ◆ Response PDUs – The total number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs which have been accepted and processed by, or generated by, the SNMP protocol entity. ◆ Trap PDUs – The total number of SNMP Trap PDUs which have been accepted and processed by, or generated by, the SNMP protocol entity. WEB INTERFACE To show SNMP statistics: 1. Click Administration, SNMP. 2. Select Show Statistics from the Step list.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Remote Monitoring However, if the switch encounters a critical event, it can automatically send a trap message to the management agent which can then respond to the event if so configured. CONFIGURING Use the Administration > RMON (Configure Global - Add - Alarm) page to RMON ALARMS define specific criteria that will generate response events.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Remote Monitoring ◆ Rising Event Index – The index of the event to use if an alarm is triggered by monitored variables reaching or crossing above the rising threshold. If there is no corresponding entry in the event control table, then no event will be generated. (Range: 0-65535) ◆ Falling Threshold – If the current value is less than or equal to the falling threshold, and the last sample value was greater than this threshold, then an alarm will be generated.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Remote Monitoring Figure 267: Configuring an RMON Alarm To show configured RMON alarms: 1. Click Administration, RMON. 2. Select Configure Global from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. 4. Click Alarm.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Remote Monitoring CONFIGURING Use the Administration > RMON (Configure Global - Add - Event) page to RMON EVENTS set the action to take when an alarm is triggered. The response can include logging the alarm or sending a message to a trap manager. Alarms and corresponding events provide a way of immediately responding to critical network problems.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Remote Monitoring WEB INTERFACE To configure an RMON event: 1. Click Administration, RMON. 2. Select Configure Global from the Step list. 3. Select Add from the Action list. 4. Click Event. 5. Enter an index number, the type of event to initiate, the community string to send with trap messages, the name of the person who created this event, and a brief description of the event. 6.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Remote Monitoring Figure 270: Showing Configured RMON Events CONFIGURING RMON Use the Administration > RMON (Configure Interface - Add - History) page HISTORY SAMPLES to collect statistics on a physical interface to monitor network utilization, packet types, and errors. A historical record of activity can be used to track down intermittent problems.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Remote Monitoring PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Port – The port number on the switch. ◆ Index - Index to this entry. (Range: 1-65535) ◆ Interval - The polling interval. (Range: 1-3600 seconds; Default: 1800 seconds) ◆ Buckets - The number of buckets requested for this entry. (Range: 1-65536; Default: 50) The number of buckets granted are displayed on the Show page. ◆ Owner - Name of the person who created this entry.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Remote Monitoring To show configured RMON history samples: 1. Click Administration, RMON. 2. Select Configure Interface from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. 4. Select a port from the list. 5. Click History. Figure 272: Showing Configured RMON History Samples To show collected RMON history samples: 1. Click Administration, RMON. 2. Select Configure Interface from the Step list. 3. Select Show Details from the Action list. 4.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Remote Monitoring CONFIGURING RMON Use the Administration > RMON (Configure Interface - Add - Statistics) STATISTICAL SAMPLES page to collect statistics on a port, which can subsequently be used to monitor the network for common errors and overall traffic rates. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "Remote Monitoring Commands" on page 793 COMMAND USAGE ◆ If statistics collection is already enabled on an interface, the entry must be deleted before any changes can be made.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Remote Monitoring Figure 274: Configuring an RMON Statistical Sample To show configured RMON statistical samples: 1. Click Administration, RMON. 2. Select Configure Interface from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. 4. Select a port from the list. 5. Click Statistics. Figure 275: Showing Configured RMON Statistical Samples To show collected RMON statistical samples: 1. Click Administration, RMON. 2.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Switch Clustering Figure 276: Showing Collected RMON Statistical Samples SWITCH CLUSTERING Switch clustering is a method of grouping switches together to enable centralized management through a single unit. Switches that support clustering can be grouped together regardless of physical location or switch type, as long as they are connected to the same local network.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Switch Clustering ◆ A switch can only be a member of one cluster. ◆ The cluster VLAN 4093 is not configured by default. Before using clustering, take the following actions to set up this VLAN: 1. Create VLAN 4093 (see "Configuring VLAN Groups" on page 198). 2. Add the participating ports to this VLAN (see "Adding Static Members to VLANs" on page 200), and set them to hybrid mode, tagged members, PVID = 1, and acceptable frame type = all.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Switch Clustering WEB INTERFACE To configure a switch cluster: 1. Click Administration, Cluster. 2. Select Configure Global from the Step list. 3. Set the required attributes for a Commander or a managed candidate. 4. Click Apply Figure 277: Configuring a Switch Cluster CLUSTER MEMBER Use the Administration > Cluster (Configure Member - Add) page to add CONFIGURATION Candidate switches to the cluster as Members.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Switch Clustering WEB INTERFACE To configure cluster members: 1. Click Administration, Cluster. 2. Select Configure Member from the Step list. 3. Select Add from the Action list. 4. Select one of the cluster candidates discovered by this switch, or enter the MAC address of a candidate. 5. Click Apply. Figure 278: Configuring a Cluster Members To show the cluster members: 1. Click Administration, Cluster. 2. Select Configure Member from the Step list. 3.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Switch Clustering Figure 280: Showing Cluster Candidates MANAGING Use the Administration > Cluster (Show Member) page to manage another CLUSTER MEMBERS switch in the cluster. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "Switch Clustering" on page 765 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Member ID – The ID number of the Member switch. (Range: 1-36) ◆ Role – Indicates the current status of the switch in the cluster.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching WEB INTERFACE To manage a cluster member: 1. Click Administration, Cluster. 2. Select Show Member from the Step list. 3. Select an entry from the Cluster Member List. 4. Click Operate. Figure 281: Managing a Cluster Member ETHERNET RING PROTECTION SWITCHING NOTE: Information in this section is based on ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. The ITU G.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching blocking traffic over the RPL. When a ring failure occurs, the RPL owner is responsible for unblocking the RPL, allowing this link to be used for traffic. Ring nodes may be in one of two states: Idle – normal operation, no link/node faults detected in ring Protection – Protection switching in effect after identifying a signal fault In Idle state, the physical topology has all nodes connected in a ring.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Multi-ring/Ladder Network – ERPSv2 also supports multipoint-to-multipoint connectivity within interconnected rings, called a “multi-ring/ladder network” topology. This arrangement consists of conjoined rings connected by one or more interconnection points, and is based on the following criteria: ◆ The R-APS channels are not shared across Ethernet Ring interconnections.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Figure 283: Ring Interconnection Architecture (Multi-ring/Ladder Network) Normal Condition ring node B ring node C RPL ring node A Signal Fail Condition RPL Owner Node for ERP1 ring node B RPL ERP1 ERP1 ring link (ERP1) ring link (ERP1) ring node D ring node C ERP2 ring node F FAILURE ring node A RPL Owner Node for ERP1 ring node D ERP2 ring node E RPL Owner Node for ERP2 RPL ring node F ring node E RPL
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching 6. Enable ERPS (Configure Global): Before enabling a ring as described in the next step, first globally enable ERPS on the switch. If ERPS has not yet been enabled or has been disabled, no ERPS rings will work. 7. Enable an ERPS ring (Configure Domain – Configure Details): Before an ERPS ring can work, it must be enabled.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching WEB INTERFACE To globally enable ERPS on the switch: 1. Click Administration, ERPS. 2. Select Configure Global from the Step list. 3. Mark the ERPS Status check box. 4. Click Apply. Figure 284: Setting ERPS Global Status ERPS RING Use the Administration > ERPS (Configure Domain) pages to configure CONFIGURATION ERPS rings.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Show ◆ Domain Name – Name of a configured ERPS ring. ◆ ID – ERPS ring identifier used in R-APS messages. ◆ Admin Status – Shows whether ERPS is enabled on the switch. ◆ Ver – Shows the ERPS version. ◆ MEG Level – The maintenance entity group (MEG) level providing a communication channel for ring automatic protection switching (R-APS) information. ◆ Control VLAN – Shows the Control VLAN ID.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching ◆ Local FS – Shows if a forced switch command was issued on this interface. ◆ Local MS – Shows if a manual switch command was issued on this interface. ◆ MEP – The CFM MEP used to monitor the status on this link. ◆ RPL – Shows if this node is connected to the RPL. Configure Details ◆ Domain Name – Name of a configured ERPS ring.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Version 2 is backward compatible with Version 1. If version 2 is specified, the inputs and commands are forwarded transparently. If set to version 1, MS and FS operator commands are filtered, and the switch set to revertive mode. The version number is automatically set to “1” when a ring node, supporting only the functionalities of G.8032v1, exists on the same ring with other nodes that support G.8032v2.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching ■ ■ ◆ RPL Owner – Specifies a ring node to be the RPL owner. ■ Only one RPL owner can be configured on a ring. The owner blocks traffic on the RPL during Idle state, and unblocks it during Protection state (that is, when a signal fault is detected on the ring or the protection state is enabled with the Forced Switch or Manual Switch commands on the Configure Operation page).
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching A ring node that has one ring port in an SF condition and detects the SF condition cleared, continuously transmits the R-APS (NR – no request) message with its own Node ID as the priority information over both ring ports, informing that no request is present at this ring node and initiates a guard timer.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching (NR, RB) message without a DNF indication, all ring nodes flush the FDB. ■ Recovery for Forced Switching – A Forced Switch command is removed by issuing the Clear command (Configure Operation page) to the same ring node where Forced Switch mode is in effect. The clear command removes any existing local operator commands, and triggers reversion if the ring is in revertive behavior mode.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching informing the ring that the RPL is blocked, and flushes its FDB. c. The acceptance of the R-APS (NR, RB) message triggers all ring nodes to unblock any blocked non-RPL which does not have an SF condition. If it is an R-APS (NR, RB) message without a DNF indication, all ring nodes flush their FDB. This action unblocks the ring port which was blocked as result of an operator command.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Nodes flush their FDB. This action unblocks the ring port which was blocked as a result of an operator command. ■ Recovery with non-revertive mode is handled as follows: a. The RPL Owner Node, upon reception of an R-APS (NR) message and in the absence of any other higher priority request does not perform any action. b.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching ◆ R-APS with VC – Configures an R-APS virtual channel to connect two interconnection points on a sub-ring, allowing ERPS protocol traffic to be tunneled across an arbitrary Ethernet network. (Default: Enabled) ■ A sub-ring may be attached to a primary ring with or without a virtual channel.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching ring link in the sub-ring will cause the R-APS channel of the sub-ring to be segmented, thus preventing R-APS message exchange between some of the sub-ring’s ring nodes. No R-APS messages are inserted or extracted by other rings or subrings at the interconnection nodes where a sub-ring is attached. Hence there is no need for either additional bandwidth or for different VIDs/Ring IDs for the ring interconnection.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching ◆ Non-ERPS Device Protection – Sends non-standard health-check packets when an owner node enters protection state without any link down event having been detected through Signal Fault messages. (Default: Disabled) ■ The RPL owner node detects a failed link when it receives R-APS (SF - signal fault) messages from nodes adjacent to the failed link. The owner then enters protection state by unblocking the RPL.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching When a new defect or more severe defect occurs (new Signal Failure), this event will not be reported immediately to the protection switching mechanism if the provisioned hold-off timer value is non-zero. Instead, the hold-off timer will be started. When the timer expires, whether a defect still exists or not, the timer will be checked. If one does exist, that defect will be reported to the protection switching mechanism.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching ◆ WTB Expire – The time before the wait-to-block timer expires. ◆ WTR Expire – The time before the wait-to-restore timer expires. ◆ West/East – Connects to next ring node to the west/east. Each node must be connected to two neighbors on the ring. For convenience, the ports connected are referred to as east and west ports.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching ◆ RPL – If node is connected to the RPL, this shows by which interface. WEB INTERFACE To create an ERPS ring: 1. Click Administration, ERPS. 2. Select Configure Domain from the Step list. 3. Select Add from the Action list. 4. Enter a name and optional identifier for the ring. 5. Click Apply. Figure 287: Creating an ERPS Ring To configure the ERPS parameters for a ring: 1. Click Administration, ERPS. 2.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Figure 288: Creating an ERPS Ring To show the configured ERPS rings: 1. Click Administration, ERPS. 2. Select Configure Domain from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching ERPS FORCED AND Use the Administration > ERPS (Configure Operation) page to block a ring MANUAL MODE port using Forced Switch or Manual Switch commands. OPERATIONS CLI REFERENCES ◆ "erps forced-switch" on page 1107 ◆ "erps manual-switch" on page 1109 ◆ "erps clear" on page 1107 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Domain Name – Name of a configured ERPS ring.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching nodes where further forced switch commands are issued block the traffic channel and R-APS channel on the ring port at which the forced switch was issued. The ring node where the forced switch command was issued transmits an R-APS message over both ring ports indicating FS. R-APS (FS) messages are continuously transmitted by this ring node while the local FS command is the ring node’s highest priority command.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching under maintenance in order to avoid falling into the above mentioned unrecoverable situation. ■ Manual Switch – Blocks specified ring port, in the absence of a failure or an FS command. (Options: West or East) ■ A ring with no request has a logical topology with the traffic channel blocked at the RPL and unblocked on all other ring links.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Ethernet Ring Protection Switching c. An ring node with a local manual switch command that receives an R-APS message or a local request of higher priority than R-APS (MS) clear its manual switch request. The ring node then processes the new higher priority request. ■ ■ Recovery for manual switching under revertive and nonrevertive mode is described under the Revertive parameter.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management Figure 290: Blocking an ERPS Ring Port CONNECTIVITY FAULT MANAGEMENT Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) is an OAM protocol that includes proactive connectivity monitoring using continuity check messages, fault verification through loop back messages, and fault isolation by examining end-to-end connections between provider edge devices or between customer edge devices.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management ◆ A Maintenance Level allows maintenance domains to be nested in a hierarchical fashion, providing access to the specific network portions required by each operator. Domains at lower levels may be either hidden or exposed to operators managing domains at a higher level, allowing either course or fine fault resolution. ◆ Maintenance End Points (MEPs) which provide full CFM access to a Service Instance (i.e.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management Figure 292: Multiple CFM Maintenance Domains C Customer MA Operator 1 MA P C Operator 2 MA P O1 O2 O1 O2 O1 O2 P P Provider MA C C Note that the Service Instances within each domain shown above are based on a unique maintenance association for the specific users, distinguished by the domain name, maintenance level, maintenance association’s name, and assigned VLAN.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management SNMP traps can also be configured to provide an automated method of fault notification. If the fault notification generator detects one or more defects within the configured time period, and fault alarms are enabled, a corresponding trap will be sent. No further fault alarms are sent until the fault notification generator has been reset by the passage of a configured time period without detecting any further faults.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management CLI REFERENCES ◆ "CFM Commands" on page 1311 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: Global Configuration ◆ CFM Status – Enables CFM processing globally on the switch. (Default: Enabled) To avoid generating an excessive number of traps, the complete CFM maintenance structure and process parameters should be configured prior to enabling CFM processing globally on the switch.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management ◆ Link Trace Cache Hold Time – The hold time for CFM link trace cache entries. (Range: 1-65535 minutes; Default: 100 minutes) Before setting the aging time for cache entries, the cache must first be enabled in the Linktrace Cache attribute field. ◆ Link Trace Cache Size – The maximum size for the link trace cache.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management ◆ Cross Check MEP Unknown – Sends a trap if an unconfigured MEP comes up. A MEP Unknown trap is sent if cross-checking is enabled10, and a CCM is received from a remote MEP that is not configured in the static list11. WEB INTERFACE To configure global settings for CFM: 1. Click Administration, CFM. 2. Select Configure Global from the Step list. 3.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management CONFIGURING CFM processes are enabled by default for all physical interfaces, both ports INTERFACES FOR CFM and trunks. You can use the Administration > CFM (Configure Interface) page to change these settings. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "ethernet cfm port-enable" on page 1323 COMMAND USAGE ◆ An interface must be enabled before a MEP can be created (see "Configuring Maintenance End Points").
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management CLI REFERENCES ◆ "CFM Commands" on page 1311 COMMAND USAGE Configuring General Settings ◆ Where domains are nested, an upper-level hierarchical domain must have a higher maintenance level than the ones it encompasses. The higher to lower level domain types commonly include entities such as customer, service provider, and operator.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management Configuring Fault Notification ◆ A fault alarm can generate an SNMP notification. It is issued when the MEP fault notification generator state machine detects that the configured time period (MEP Fault Notify Alarm Time) has passed with one or more defects indicated, and fault alarms are enabled at or above the specified priority level (MEP Fault Notify Lowest Priority).
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management ◆ MD Name – Maintenance domain name. (Range: 1-43 alphanumeric characters) ◆ MD Level – Authorized maintenance level for this domain. (Range: 0-7) ◆ MIP Creation Type – Specifies the CFM protocol’s creation method for maintenance intermediate points (MIPs) in this domain: ■ Default – MIPs can be created for any maintenance association (MA) configured in this domain on any bridge port through which the MA’s VID can pass.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management 6. Click Apply. Figure 295: Configuring Maintenance Domains To show the configured maintenance domains: 1. Click Administration, CFM. 2. Select Configure MD from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 296: Showing Maintenance Domains To configure detailed settings for maintenance domains: 1. Click Administration, CFM. 2. Select Configure MD from the Step list. 3. Select Configure Details from the Action list.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management Figure 297: Configuring Detailed Settings for Maintenance Domains CONFIGURING Use the Administration > CFM (Configure MA) pages to create and CFM MAINTENANCE configure the Maintenance Associations (MA) which define a unique CFM ASSOCIATIONS service instance. Each MA can be identified by its parent MD, the MD’s maintenance level, the VLAN assigned to the MA, and the set of maintenance end points (MEPs) assigned to it.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management ◆ Each CCM received is checked to verify that the MEP identifier field sent in the message does not match its own MEP ID, which would indicate a duplicate MEP or network loop. If these error types are not found, the CCM is stored in the MEP’s local database until aged out. ◆ If a maintenance point fails to receive three consecutive CCMs from any other MEP in the same MA, a connectivity failure is registered.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management ◆ MA Name Format – Specifies the name format for the maintenance association as IEEE 802.1ag character based, or ITU-T SG13/SG15 Y.1731 defined ICC-based format. ■ Character String – IEEE 802.1ag defined character string format. This is an IETF RFC 2579 DisplayString. ■ ICC Based – ITU-T SG13/SG15 Y.1731 defined ICC based format. ◆ Interval Level – The delay between sending CCMs.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management 5. Specify the MAs assigned to each domain, the VLAN through which CFM messages are passed, and the manner in which MIPs can be created within each MA. 6. Click Apply. Figure 298: Creating Maintenance Associations To show the configured maintenance associations: 1. Click Administration, CFM. 2. Select Configure MA from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. 4. Select an entry from the MD Index list.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management 5. Specify the CCM interval, enable the transmission of connectivity check and cross check messages, and configure the required AIS parameters. 6. Click Apply Figure 300: Configuring Detailed Settings for Maintenance Associations CONFIGURING Use the Administration > CFM (Configure MEP – Add) page to configure MAINTENANCE Maintenance End Points (MEPs).
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management ◆ MEP ID – Maintenance end point identifier. (Range: 1-8191) ◆ MEP Direction – Up indicates that the MEP faces inward toward the switch cross-connect matrix, and transmits CFM messages towards, and receives them from, the direction of the internal bridge relay mechanism.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management 4. Select an entry from MD Index and MA Index. Figure 302: Showing Maintenance End Points CONFIGURING REMOTE Use the Administration > CFM (Configure Remote MEP – Add) page to MAINTENANCE specify remote maintenance end points (MEPs) set on other CFM-enabled END POINTS devices within a common MA. Remote MEPs can be added to a static list in this manner to verify that each entry has been properly configured and is operational.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management ◆ MA Index – MA identifier. (Range: 1-2147483647) ◆ MEP ID – Identifier for a maintenance end point which exists on another CFM-enabled device within the same MA. (Range: 1-8191) WEB INTERFACE To configure a remote maintenance end point: 1. Click Administration, CFM. 2. Select Configure Remote MEP from the Step list. 3. Select Add from the Action list. 4. Select an entry from MD Index and MA Index. 5.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management Figure 304: Showing Remote Maintenance End Points TRANSMITTING LINK Use the Administration > CFM (Transmit Link Trace) page to transmit link TRACE MESSAGES trace messages (LTMs). These messages can isolate connectivity faults by tracing the path through a network to the designated target node (i.e., a remote maintenance end point).
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ MD Index – Domain index. (Range: 1-65535) ◆ MA Index – MA identifier. (Range: 1-2147483647) ◆ Source MEP ID – The identifier of a source MEP that will send the link trace message. (Range: 1-8191) ◆ Target ◆ ■ MEP ID – The identifier of a remote MEP that is the target of a link trace message.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management TRANSMITTING Use the Administration > CFM (Transmit Loopback) page to transmit LOOP BACK Loopback Messages (LBMs). These messages can be used to isolate or MESSAGES verify connectivity faults by submitting a request to a target node (i.e., a remote MEP or MIP) to echo the message back to the source.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management WEB INTERFACE To transmit loopback messages: 1. Click Administration, CFM. 2. Select Transmit Loopback from the Step list. 3. Select an entry from MD Index and MA Index. 4. Specify the source MEP, the target MEP using either its MEP identifier or MAC address, set the number of times the loopback message is to be sent. 5. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management ◆ Frame delay measurement can be made only for two-way measurements, where the MEP transmits a frame with DM request information with the TxTimeStampf (Timestamp at the time of sending a frame with DM request information), and the receiving MEP responds with a frame with DM reply information with TxTimeStampf copied from the DM request information, RxTimeStampf (Timestamp at the time of receiving a frame with DM request information)
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management WEB INTERFACE To transmit delay-measure messages: 1. Click Administration, CFM. 2. Select Transmit Delay Measure from the Step list. 3. Select an entry from MD Index and MA Index. 4. Specify the source MEP, the target MEP using either its MEP identifier or MAC address, set the number of times the delay-measure message is to be sent, the interval, and the timeout. 5. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management ◆ Level – Authorized maintenance level for this domain. ◆ Direction – Direction in which the MEP communicates CFM messages: ■ Down indicates that the MEP is facing away from the switch, and transmits CFM messages towards, and receives them from, the direction of the physical medium.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management ◆ MD Name – The maintenance domain for this entry. ◆ MA Name – Maintenance association to which this remote MEP belongs. ◆ MA Name Format – The format of the Maintenance Association name, including primary VID, character string, unsigned Integer 16, or RFC 2865 VPN ID. ◆ Level – Maintenance level of the local maintenance point. ◆ Direction – The direction in which the MEP faces on the Bridge port (up or down).
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management 5. Select a MEP ID. Figure 309: Showing Detailed Information on Local MEPs DISPLAYING Use the Administration > CFM > Show Information (Show Local MIP) page LOCAL MIPS to show the MIPs on this device discovered by the CFM protocol. (For a description of MIPs, refer to the Command Usage section under "Configuring CFM Maintenance Domains".
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management WEB INTERFACE To show information for the MIPs discovered by the CFM protocol: 1. Click Administration, CFM. 2. Select Show Information from the Step list. 3. Select Show Local MIP from the Action list.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management WEB INTERFACE To show information for remote MEPs: 1. Click Administration, CFM. 2. Select Show Information from the Step list. 3. Select Show Remote MEP from the Action list.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management ◆ Age of Last CC Message – Length of time the last CCM message about this MEP has been in the CCM database. ◆ Frame Loss – Percentage of transmitted frames lost. ◆ CC Packet Statistics – The number of CCM packets received successfully and those with errors. ◆ Port State – Port states include: ◆ ◆ ■ Up – The port is functioning normally. ■ Blocked – The port has been blocked by the Spanning Tree Protocol.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management Figure 312: Showing Detailed Information on Remote MEPs DISPLAYING THE Use the Administration > CFM > Show Information (Show Link Trace LINK TRACE CACHE Cache) page to show information about link trace operations launched from this device.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management ◆ ◆ ◆ Ingress Action – Action taken on the ingress port: ■ IngOk – The target data frame passed through to the MAC Relay Entity. ■ IngDown – The bridge port’s MAC_Operational parameter is false. This value could be returned, for example, by an operationally Down MEP that has another Down MEP at a higher MD level on the same bridge port that is causing the bridge port’s MAC_Operational parameter to be false.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management Figure 313: Showing the Link Trace Cache DISPLAYING FAULT Use the Administration > CFM > Show Information (Show Fault Notification NOTIFICATION Generator) page to display configuration settings for the fault notification SETTINGS generator. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "show ethernet cfm fault-notify-generator" on page 1349 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ MEP ID – Maintenance end point identifier.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols Connectivity Fault Management WEB INTERFACE To show configuration settings for the fault notification generator: 1. Click Administration, CFM. 2. Select Show Information from the Step list. 3. Select Show Fault Notification Generator from the Action list.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols OAM Configuration ◆ ■ VIDS – MA x is associated with a specific VID list13, an MEP is configured facing inward (up) on this MA on the bridge port, and some other MA y, associated with at least one of the VID(s) also in MA x, also has an Up MEP configured facing inward (up) on some bridge port. ■ EXCESS_LEV – The number of different MD levels at which MIPs are to be created on this port exceeds the bridge's capabilities.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols OAM Configuration CLI REFERENCES ◆ "OAM Commands" on page 1353 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Port – Port identifier. (Range: 1-28/52) ◆ Admin Status – Enables or disables OAM functions. (Default: Disabled) ◆ Operation State – Shows the operational state between the local and remote OAM devices. This value is always “disabled” if OAM is disabled on the local interface.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols OAM Configuration ◆ Critical Link Event – Controls reporting of critical link events to its OAM peer. ■ Dying Gasp – If an unrecoverable condition occurs, the local OAM entity (i.e., this switch) indicates this by immediately sending a trap message. (Default: Enabled) Dying gasp events are caused by an unrecoverable failure, such as a power failure or device reset.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols OAM Configuration reported by the switch. Specify whether errored frame link events will be reported, as well as the required window size and threshold. 3. Click Apply. Figure 316: Enabling OAM for Local Ports DISPLAYING Use the Administration > OAM > Counters page to display statistics for the STATISTICS FOR various types of OAM messages passed across each port.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols OAM Configuration WEB INTERFACE To display statistics for OAM messages: 1. Click Administration, OAM, Counters. Figure 317: Displaying Statistics for OAM Messages DISPLAYING THE Use the Administration > OAM > Event Log page to display link events for OAM EVENT LOG the selected port.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols OAM Configuration Figure 318: Displaying the OAM Event Log DISPLAYING Use the Administration > OAM > Remote Interface page to display THE STATUS OF information about attached OAM-enabled devices. REMOTE INTERFACES CLI REFERENCES ◆ "show efm oam status remote interface" on page 1364 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Port – Port identifier. (Range: 1-28/52) ◆ MAC Address – MAC address of the OAM peer.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols OAM Configuration WEB INTERFACE To display information about attached OAM-enabled devices: 1. Click Administration, OAM, Remote Interface. Figure 319: Displaying Status of Remote Interfaces CONFIGURING A Use the Administration > OAM > Remote Loopback (Remote Loopback REMOTE LOOP Test) page to initiate a loop back test to the peer device attached to the BACK TEST selected port.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols OAM Configuration ◆ Loopback Mode – Shows if loop back mode is enabled on the peer. This attribute must be enabled before starting the loopback test. ◆ Loopback Status – Shows if loopback testing is currently running. Loopback Test Parameters ◆ Packets Number – Number of packets to send. (Range: 1-99999999; Default: 10000) ◆ Packet Size – Size of packets to send. (Range: 64-1518 bytes; Default: 64 bytes) ◆ Test – Starts the loop back test.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols OAM Configuration 3. Select the port on which to initiate remote loop back testing, enable the Loop Back Mode attribute, and click Apply. 4. Set the number of packets to send and the packet size, and then click Test.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols OAM Configuration WEB INTERFACE To display the results of remote loop back testing for each port for which this information is available: 1. Click Administration, OAM, Remote Loop Back. 2. Select Show Test Result from the Action list.
CHAPTER 14 | Basic Administration Protocols OAM Configuration – 558 –
15 IP CONFIGURATION This chapter describes how to configure an IP interface for management access to the switch over the network. This switch supports both IP Version 4 and Version 6, and can be managed simultaneously through either of these address types. You can manually configure a specific IPv4 or IPv6 address or direct the switch to obtain an IPv4 address from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is powered on. An IPv6 address can either be manually configured or dynamically generated.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Using the Ping Function COMMAND USAGE ◆ Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached. ◆ The following are some results of the ping command: ■ Normal response - The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds, depending on network traffic. ■ Destination does not respond - If the host does not respond, a “timeout” appears in ten seconds.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Using the Trace Route Function USING THE TRACE ROUTE FUNCTION Use the IP > General > Trace Route page to show the route packets take to the specified destination. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "traceroute" on page 1392 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Destination IP Address – IPv4/IPv6 address of the host. ◆ IPv4 Max Failures – The maximum number of failures before which the trace route is terminated.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Address Resolution Protocol Figure 323: Tracing the Route to a Network Device ADDRESS RESOLUTION PROTOCOL The switch uses Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to forward traffic from one hop to the next. ARP is used to map an IP address to a physical layer (i.e., MAC) address. When an IP frame is received by this switch (or any standards-based switch/router), it first looks up the MAC address corresponding to the destination IP address in the ARP cache.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Address Resolution Protocol switch will be able forward traffic directly to the next hop for this destination without having to broadcast another ARP request. Also, if the switch receives a request for its own IP address, it will send back a response, and also cache the MAC of the source device's IP address. SETTING THE Use the IP > ARP (Configure General) page to specify the timeout for ARP ARP TIMEOUT cache entries.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 4) CLI REFERENCES ◆ ◆ "show arp" on page 1396 "clear arp-cache" on page 1396 WEB INTERFACE To display all entries in the ARP cache: 1. Click IP, ARP. 2. Select Show Information from the Step List. Figure 325: Displaying ARP Entries SETTING THE SWITCH’S IP ADDRESS (IP VERSION 4) This section describes how to configure an IPv4 interface for management access over the network.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 4) An IP default gateway can only be successfully set when a network interface that directly connects to the gateway has been configured on the switch. WEB INTERFACE To configure an IPv4 default gateway for the switch: 1. Click System, IP. 2. Select Configure Global from the Action list. 3. Enter the IPv4 default gateway. 4. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 4) IP will not function until a reply has been received from the server. Requests will be broadcast periodically by the switch for an IP address. DHCP/BOOTP responses can include the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. (Default: DHCP) ◆ IP Address Type – Specifies a primary or secondary IP address. An interface can have only one primary IP address, but can have many secondary IP addresses.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 4) Figure 327: Configuring a Static IPv4 Address To obtain an dynamic IPv4 address through DHCP/BOOTP for the switch: 1. Click System, IP. 2. Select Configure Interface from the Step list. 3. Select Add Address from the Action list. 4. Select the VLAN through which the management station is attached, set the IP Address Mode to “DHCP” or “BOOTP.” 5. Click Apply to save your changes. 6.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) Renewing DCHP – DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a specific period of time. If the address expires or the switch is moved to another network segment, you will lose management access to the switch. In this case, you can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) CONFIGURING THE Use the IP > IPv6 Configuration (Configure Global) page to configure an IPV6 DEFAULT IPv6 default gateway for the switch. GATEWAY CLI REFERENCES ◆ "ipv6 default-gateway" on page 1398 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Default Gateway – Sets the IPv6 address of the default next hop router. ■ An IPv6 default gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different IPv6 segment.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) COMMAND USAGE ◆ The switch must always be configured with a link-local address. The switch’s address auto-configuration function will automatically create a link-local address, as well as an IPv6 global address if router advertisements are detected on the local interface.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) ◆ ◆ MTU – Sets the size of the maximum transmission unit (MTU) for IPv6 packets sent on an interface. (Range: 1280-65535 bytes; Default: 1500 bytes) ■ The maximum value set in this field cannot exceed the MTU of the physical interface, which is currently fixed at 1500 bytes. ■ IPv6 routers do not fragment IPv6 packets forwarded from other routers.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) ◆ ND NS Interval – The interval between transmitting IPv6 neighbor solicitation messages on an interface. (Range: 1000-3600000 milliseconds; Default: 1000 milliseconds is used for neighbor discovery operations, 0 milliseconds is advertised in router advertisements. This attribute specifies the interval between transmitting neighbor solicitation messages when resolving an address, or when probing the reachability of a neighbor.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) the default router address taken from the observed source address of the RA message, as well as on-link prefix information. However, note that unintended misconfigurations, or possibly malicious attacks on the network, may lead to bogus RAs being sent, which in turn can cause operational problems for hosts on the network. RA Guard can be used to block RAs and Router Redirect (RR) messages on the specified interface.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) 3. Select RA Guard mode. 4. Enable RA Guard for untrusted interfaces. 5. Click Apply. Figure 332: Configuring RA Guard for an IPv6 Interface CONFIGURING AN Use the IP > IPv6 Configuration (Add IPv6 Address) page to configure an IPV6 ADDRESS IPv6 interface for management access over the network.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) address (see "Configuring IPv6 Interface Settings" on page 569). ■ It can be manually configured by specifying the entire network prefix and prefix length, and using the EUI-64 form of the interface identifier to automatically create the low-order 64 bits in the host portion of the address. ■ You can also manually configure the global unicast address by entering the full address and prefix length.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) ■ IPv6 addresses are 16 bytes long, of which the bottom 8 bytes typically form a unique host identifier based on the device’s MAC address. The EUI-64 specification is designed for devices that use an extended 8-byte MAC address.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) Figure 333: Configuring an IPv6 Address SHOWING Use the IP > IPv6 Configuration (Show IPv6 Address) page to display the IPV6 ADDRESSES IPv6 addresses assigned to an interface. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "show ipv6 interface" on page 1407 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ VLAN – ID of a configured VLAN which is to be used for management access. By default, all ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) Note that the solicited-node multicast address (link-local scope FF02) is used to resolve the MAC addresses for neighbor nodes since IPv6 does not support the broadcast method used by the Address Resolution Protocol in IPv4. These additional addresses are displayed by the CLI (see "show ip interface" on page 1391). ◆ Configuration Mode – Indicates if this address was automatically generated for manually configured.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) Table 38: Show IPv6 Neighbors - display description (Continued) Field State Description The following states are used for dynamic entries: ◆ Incomplete - Address resolution is being carried out on the entry. A neighbor solicitation message has been sent to the multicast address of the target, but it has not yet returned a neighbor advertisement message. ◆ Invalid - An invalidated mapping.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) SHOWING Use the IP > IPv6 Configuration (Show Statistics) page to display statistics IPV6 STATISTICS about IPv6 traffic passing through this switch.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) Table 39: Show IPv6 Statistics - display description (Continued) Field Description Address Errors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IPv6 address in their IPv6 header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity. This count includes invalid addresses (e.g., ::0) and unsupported addresses (e.g., addresses with unallocated prefixes).
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) Table 39: Show IPv6 Statistics - display description (Continued) Field Description Generated Fragments The number of output datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this output interface. Fragment Succeeded The number of IPv6 datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this output interface.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) Table 39: Show IPv6 Statistics - display description (Continued) Field Description Destination Unreachable Messages The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent by the interface. Packet Too Big Messages The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages sent by the interface. Time Exceeded Messages The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent by the interface.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) WEB INTERFACE To show the IPv6 statistics: 1. Click IP, IPv6 Configuration. 2. Select Show Statistics from the Action list. 3. Click IPv6, ICMPv6 or UDP.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) Figure 338: Showing IPv6 Statistics (UDP) SHOWING THE MTU Use the IP > IPv6 Configuration (Show MTU) page to display the maximum FOR RESPONDING transmission unit (MTU) cache for destinations that have returned an ICMP DESTINATIONS packet-too-big message along with an acceptable MTU to this switch.
CHAPTER 15 | IP Configuration Setting the Switch’s IP Address (IP Version 6) – 586 –
16 IP SERVICES This chapter describes how to configure Domain Name Service (DNS) on this switch. For information on DHCP snooping which is included in this folder, see "DHCP Snooping" on page 409. This chapter provides information on the following IP services, including: ◆ DNS – Configures default domain names, identifies servers to use for dynamic lookup, and shows how to configure static entries. ◆ DHCP Client – Specifies the DHCP client identifier for an interface.
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Domain Name Service PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Domain Lookup – Enables DNS host name-to-address translation. (Default: Disabled) ◆ Default Domain Name – Defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host names. Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name. (Range: 1-127 alphanumeric characters) WEB INTERFACE To configure general settings for DNS: 1. Click IP Service, DNS. 2.
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Domain Name Service through the domain list, appending each domain name in the list to the host name, and checking with the specified name servers for a match (see "Configuring a List of Name Servers" on page 590). PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: Domain Name – Name of the host. Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name. (Range: 1-68 characters) WEB INTERFACE To create a list domain names: 1. Click IP Service, DNS. 2.
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Domain Name Service CONFIGURING A LIST Use the IP Service > DNS - General (Add Name Server) page to configure a OF NAME SERVERS list of name servers to be tried in sequential order. CLI REFERENCES ◆ ◆ "ip name-server" on page 1369 "show dns" on page 1371 COMMAND USAGE ◆ To enable DNS service on this switch, configure one or more name servers, and enable domain lookup status (see "Configuring General DNS Service Parameters" on page 587).
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Domain Name Service Figure 344: Showing the List of Name Servers for DNS CONFIGURING STATIC Use the IP Service > DNS - Static Host Table (Add) page to manually DNS HOST TO configure static entries in the DNS table that are used to map domain ADDRESS ENTRIES names to IP addresses.
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Domain Name Service Figure 345: Configuring Static Entries in the DNS Table To show static entries in the DNS table: 1. Click IP Service, DNS, Static Host Table. 2. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 346: Showing Static Entries in the DNS Table DISPLAYING THE Use the IP Service > DNS - Cache page to display entries in the DNS cache DNS CACHE that have been learned via the designated name servers.
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol ◆ Type – This field includes CNAME which specifies the host address for the owner, and ALIAS which specifies an alias. ◆ IP – The IP address associated with this record. ◆ TTL – The time to live reported by the name server. ◆ Host – The host name associated with this record. WEB INTERFACE To display entries in the DNS cache: 1. Click IP Service, DNS, Cache.
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed in the web interface: ◆ VLAN – ID of configured VLAN. ◆ Vendor Class ID – The following options are supported when the check box is marked to enable this feature: ◆ Default – The default string is ECS3510-28T. ◆ Text – A text string. (Range: 1-32 characters) ◆ Hex – A hexadecimal value. (Range: 1-64 characters) WEB INTERFACE To configure a DHCP client identifier: 1.
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol These fields identify the requesting device by indicating the interface through which the relay agent received the request. If DHCP relay is enabled, and this switch sees a DHCP client request, it inserts its own IP address into the request so that the DHCP server will know the subnet where the client is located.
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol the management VLAN or a non-management VLAN, it will add option 82 relay information and the relay agent’s address to the DHCP request packet, and then unicast it to the DHCP server.
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol ■ A DHCP relay server has been set on the switch, when the switch receives a DHCP request packet with a non-zero relay agent address field (that is not the address of this switch). ■ A DHCP relay server has been set on the switch, when the switch receives DHCP reply packet without option 82 information from the management VLAN.
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Configuring the PPPoE Intermediate Agent ◆ Server IP Address – Addresses of DHCP servers or relay servers to be used by the switch’s DHCP relay agent in order of preference. WEB INTERFACE To configure DHCP relay service: 1. Click IP Service, DHCP, Relay. 2. Enable or disable Option 82. 3. Set the Option 82 policy to specify how to handle Option 82 information already contained in DHCP client request packets. 4. Specify whether or not include “type” and “length” sub-options.
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Configuring the PPPoE Intermediate Agent ◆ "show pppoe intermediate-agent info" on page 863 COMMAND USAGE When PPPoE IA is enabled, the switch inserts a tag identifying itself as a PPPoE IA residing between the attached client requesting network access and the ports connected to broadband remote access servers (BRAS).
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Configuring the PPPoE Intermediate Agent Figure 351: Configuring Global Settings for PPPoE Intermediate Agent CONFIGURING Use the IP Service > PPPoE Intermediate Agent (Configure Interface) page PPPOE IA INTERFACE to enable PPPoE IA on an interface, set trust status, enable vendor tag SETTINGS stripping, and set the circuit ID and remote ID.
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Configuring the PPPoE Intermediate Agent ◆ Circuit ID – String identifying the circuit identifier (or interface) on this switch to which the user is connected. (Range: 1-10 ASCII characters; Default: Unit/Port:VLAN-ID, or 0/Trunk-ID:VLAN-ID) ■ The PPPoE server extracts the Line-ID tag from PPPoE discovery stage messages, and uses the Circuit-ID field of that tag as a NASPort-ID attribute in AAA access and accounting requests.
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Configuring the PPPoE Intermediate Agent Figure 352: Configuring Interface Settings for PPPoE Intermediate Agent g SHOWING PPPOE IA Use the IP Service > PPPoE Intermediate Agent (Show Statistics) page to STATISTICS show statistics on PPPoE IA protocol messages. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "clear pppoe intermediate-agent statistics" on page 862 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Interface – Port or trunk selection. ◆ Received – Received PPPoE active discovery messages.
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Configuring the PPPoE Intermediate Agent WEB INTERFACE To show statistics for PPPoE IA protocol messages: 1. Click IP Service, PPPoE Intermediate Agent. 2. Select Show Statistics from the Step list. 3. Select Port or Trunk interface type.
CHAPTER 16 | IP Services Configuring the PPPoE Intermediate Agent – 604 –
17 MULTICAST FILTERING This chapter describes how to configure the following multicast services: ◆ IGMP Snooping – Configures snooping and query parameters. ◆ Filtering and Throttling – Filters specified multicast service, or throttling the maximum of multicast groups allowed on an interface. ◆ MLD Snooping – Configures snooping and query parameters for IPv6.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) Figure 354: Multicast Filtering Concept Unicast Flow Multicast Flow This switch can use Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) to filter multicast traffic. IGMP Snooping can be used to passively monitor or “snoop” on exchanges between attached hosts and an IGMP-enabled device, most commonly a multicast router. In this way, the switch can discover the ports that want to join a multicast group, and set its filters accordingly.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) network segments where no node has expressed interest in receiving a specific multicast service. For switches that do not support multicast routing, or where multicast routing is already enabled on other switches in the local network segment, IGMP Snooping is the only service required to support multicast filtering.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) Static IGMP Host Interface – For multicast applications that you need to control more carefully, you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on the switch (page 614).
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) NOTE: Multicast routers use this information from IGMP snooping and query reports, along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ IGMP Snooping Status – When enabled, the switch will monitor network traffic to determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic. This is referred to as IGMP Snooping.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) subscribed to different multicast groups, flooding may cause excessive packet loss on the link between the switch and the end host. Flooding may be disabled to avoid this, causing multicast traffic to be delivered only to those ports on which multicast group members have been learned. Otherwise, the time spent in flooding mode can be manually configured to reduce excessive loading.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) This parameter can be used to set a high priority for low-latency multicast traffic such as a video-conference, or to set a low priority for normal multicast traffic not sensitive to latency. ◆ Version Exclusive – Discards any received IGMP messages which use a version different to that currently configured by the IGMP Version attribute.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) Figure 355: Configuring General Settings for IGMP Snooping SPECIFYING STATIC Use the Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router (Add) page to INTERFACES FOR A statically attach an interface to a multicast router/switch. MULTICAST ROUTER Depending on network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) ◆ Type14 – Shows if this entry is static or dynamic. ◆ Expire14 – Time until this dynamic entry expires. WEB INTERFACE To specify a static interface attached to a multicast router: 1. Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping, Multicast Router. 2. Select Add Static Multicast Router from the Action list. 3.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) To show the all interfaces attached to a multicast router: 1. Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping, Multicast Router. 2. Select Current Multicast Router from the Action list. 3. Select the VLAN for which to display this information. Ports in the selected VLAN which are attached to a neighboring multicast router/ switch are displayed.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) ◆ Multicast IP – The IP address for a specific multicast service. WEB INTERFACE To statically assign an interface to a multicast service: 1. Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping, IGMP Member. 2. Select Add Static Member from the Action list. 3.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) SETTING IGMP Use the Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Interface (Configure VLAN) page to SNOOPING STATUS configure IGMP snooping attributes for a VLAN. To configure snooping PER INTERFACE globally, refer to "Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters" on page 608. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "IGMP Snooping" on page 1192 COMMAND USAGE Multicast Router Discovery There have been many mechanisms used in the past to identify multicast routers.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) ◆ Multicast Router Termination – These messages are sent when a router stops IP multicast routing functions on an interface. Termination messages are sent by multicast routers when: ■ Multicast forwarding is disabled on an interface. ■ An interface is administratively disabled. ■ The router is gracefully shut down. Advertisement and Termination messages are sent to the All-Snoopers multicast address.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) If immediate leave is not used, a multicast router (or querier) will send a group-specific query message when an IGMPv2 group leave message is received. The router/querier stops forwarding traffic for that group only if no host replies to the query within the specified time out period. Note that this time out is set to Last Member Query Interval * Robustness Variable (fixed at 2) as defined in RFC 2236.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) ◆ Interface Version – Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on the network. This is the IGMP Version the switch uses to send snooping reports. (Range: 1-3; Default: 2) This attribute configures the IGMP report/query version used by IGMP snooping.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) ◆ Proxy Query Address – A static source address for locally generated query and report messages used by IGMP Proxy Reporting. (Range: Any valid IP unicast address; Default: 0.0.0.0) IGMP Snooping uses a null IP address of 0.0.0.0 for the source of IGMP query messages which are proxied to downstream hosts to indicate that it is not the elected querier, but is only proxying these messages as defined in RFC 4541.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) To show the interface settings for IGMP snooping: 1. Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping, Interface. 2. Select Show VLAN Information from the Action list. Figure 362: Showing Interface Settings for IGMP Snooping FILTERING IGMP Use the Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Interface (Configure Interface) page QUERY PACKETS AND to configure an interface to drop IGMP query packets or multicast data MULTICAST DATA packets.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) Figure 363: Dropping IGMP Query or Multicast Data Packets DISPLAYING Use the Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Forwarding Entry page to display the MULTICAST GROUPS forwarding entries learned through IGMP Snooping.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) WEB INTERFACE To show multicast groups learned through IGMP snooping: 1. Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping, Forwarding Entry. 2. Select the VLAN for which to display this information. Figure 364: Showing Multicast Groups Learned by IGMP Snooping DISPLAYING Use the Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Statistics pages to display IGMP IGMP SNOOPING snooping protocol-related statistics for the specified interface.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) ◆ General Query Sent – The number of general queries sent from this interface. ◆ Specific Query Received – The number of specific queries received on this interface. ◆ Specific Query Sent – The number of specific queries sent from this interface. ◆ Number of Reports Sent – The number of reports sent from this interface. ◆ Number of Leaves Sent – The number of leaves sent from this interface.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) WEB INTERFACE To display statistics for IGMP snooping query-related messages: 1. Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping, Statistics. 2. Select Show Query Statistics from the Action list. 3. Select a VLAN. Figure 365: Displaying IGMP Snooping Statistics – Query To display IGMP snooping protocol-related statistics for a VLAN: 1. Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping, Statistics. 2. Select Show VLAN Statistics from the Action list. 3.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query for IPv4) Figure 366: Displaying IGMP Snooping Statistics – VLAN To display IGMP snooping protocol-related statistics for a port: 1. Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping, Statistics. 2. Select Show Port Statistics from the Action list. 3. Select a Port.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Filtering and Throttling IGMP Groups FILTERING AND THROTTLING IGMP GROUPS In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users. For example, an IP/TV service based on a specific subscription plan.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Filtering and Throttling IGMP Groups Figure 368: Enabling IGMP Filtering and Throttling CONFIGURING IGMP Use the Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Filter (Configure Profile – Add) page FILTER PROFILES to create an IGMP profile and set its access mode. Then use the (Add Multicast Group Range) page to configure the multicast groups to filter.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Filtering and Throttling IGMP Groups WEB INTERFACE To create an IGMP filter profile and set its access mode: 1. Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping, Filter. 2. Select Configure Profile from the Step list. 3. Select Add from the Action list. 4. Enter the number for a profile, and set its access mode. 5. Click Apply. Figure 369: Creating an IGMP Filtering Profile To show the IGMP filter profiles: 1. Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping, Filter. 2.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Filtering and Throttling IGMP Groups 5. Click Apply. Figure 371: Adding Multicast Groups to an IGMP Filtering Profile To show the multicast groups configured for an IGMP filter profile: 1. Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping, Filter. 2. Select Configure Profile from the Step list. 3. Select Show Multicast Group Range from the Action list. 4. Select the profile for which to display this information.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Filtering and Throttling IGMP Groups removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Interface – Port or trunk identifier. An IGMP profile or throttling setting can be applied to a port or trunk. When ports are configured as trunk members, the trunk uses the settings applied to the first port member in the trunk. ◆ Profile ID – Selects an existing profile to assign to an interface.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering MLD Snooping (Snooping and Query for IPv6) Figure 373: Configuring IGMP Filtering and Throttling Interface Settings MLD SNOOPING (SNOOPING AND QUERY FOR IPV6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping operates on IPv6 traffic and performs a similar function to IGMP snooping for IPv4. That is, MLD snooping dynamically configures switch ports to limit IPv6 multicast traffic so that it is forwarded only to ports with users that want to receive it.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering MLD Snooping (Snooping and Query for IPv6) An IPv6 address must be configured on the VLAN interface from which the querier will act if elected. When serving as the querier, the switch uses this IPv6 address as the query source address. The querier will not start or will disable itself after having started if it detects an IPv6 multicast router on the network. ◆ Robustness – MLD Snooping robustness variable.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering MLD Snooping (Snooping and Query for IPv6) 3. Click Apply. Figure 374: Configuring General Settings for MLD Snooping SETTING IMMEDIATE Use the Multicast > MLD Snooping > Interface page to configure LEAVE STATUS FOR Immediate Leave status for a VLAN. MLD SNOOPING PER INTERFACE CLI REFERENCES ◆ "ipv6 mld snooping vlan immediate-leave" on page 1232 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ VLAN – A VLAN identification number.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering MLD Snooping (Snooping and Query for IPv6) Figure 375: Configuring Immediate Leave for MLD Snooping SPECIFYING STATIC INTERFACES FOR AN IPV6 MULTICAST ROUTER Use the Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router (Add Static Multicast Router) page to statically attach an interface to an IPv6 multicast router/ switch. Depending on your network connections, MLD snooping may not always be able to locate the MLD querier.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering MLD Snooping (Snooping and Query for IPv6) Figure 376: Configuring a Static Interface for an IPv6 Multicast Router To show the static interfaces attached to a multicast router: 1. Click Multicast, MLD Snooping, Multicast Router. 2. Select Show Static Multicast Router from the Action list. 3. Select the VLAN for which to display this information.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering MLD Snooping (Snooping and Query for IPv6) ASSIGNING Use the Multicast > MLD Snooping > MLD Member (Add Static Member) INTERFACES TO IPV6 page to statically assign an IPv6 multicast service to an interface. MULTICAST SERVICES Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using MLD snooping and query messages (see "Configuring MLD Snooping and Query Parameters" on page 632).
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering MLD Snooping (Snooping and Query for IPv6) Figure 379: Assigning an Interface to an IPv6 Multicast Service To show the static interfaces assigned to an IPv6 multicast service: 1. Click Multicast, MLD Snooping, MLD Member. 2. Select Show Static Member from the Action list. 3. Select the VLAN for which to display this information.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering MLD Snooping (Snooping and Query for IPv6) Figure 381: Showing Current Interfaces Assigned to an IPv6 Multicast Service SHOWING MLD Use the Multicast > MLD Snooping > Group Information page to display SNOOPING GROUPS known multicast groups, member ports, the means by which each group AND SOURCE LIST was learned, and the corresponding source list.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 ◆ Request List – Sources included on the router’s request list. ◆ Exclude List – Sources included on the router’s exclude list. WEB INTERFACE To display known MLD multicast groups: 1. Click Multicast, MLD Snooping, Group Information. 2. Select the port or trunk, and then select a multicast service assigned to that interface.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 Figure 383: MVR Concept Multicast Router Satellite Services Multicast Server Layer 2 Switch Source Port Service Network Receiver Ports Set-top Box PC Set-top Box TV TV COMMAND USAGE ◆ General Configuration Guidelines for MVR: 1. Enable MVR for a domain on the switch, and select the MVR VLAN (see "Configuring MVR Domain Settings" on page 644). 2.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ ◆ Proxy Switching – Configures MVR proxy switching, where the source port acts as a host, and the receiver port acts as an MVR router with querier service enabled. (Default: Enabled) ■ When MVR proxy-switching is enabled, an MVR source port serves as the upstream or host interface, and the MVR receiver port serves as the querier.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 ◆ ◆ Proxy Query Interval – Configures the interval at which the receiver port sends out general queries. (Range: 2-31744 seconds; Default: 125 seconds) ■ This parameter sets the general query interval at which active receiver ports send out general queries. ■ This interval is only effective when proxy switching is enabled.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 CONFIGURING Use the Multicast > MVR (Configure Domain) page to enable MVR globally MVR DOMAIN on the switch, and select the VLAN that will serve as the sole channel for SETTINGS common multicast streams supported by the service provider. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "MVR for IPv4" on page 1246 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Domain ID – An independent multicast domain.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 WEB INTERFACE To configure settings for an MVR domain: 1. Click Multicast, MVR. 2. Select Configure Domain from the Step list. 3. Select a domain from the scroll-down list. 4. Enable MVR for the selected domain, select the MVR VLAN, set the forwarding priority to be assigned to all ingress multicast traffic, and set the source IP address for all control packets sent upstream as required. 5. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 ◆ IGMP snooping and MVR share a maximum number of 1024 groups. Any multicast streams received in excess of this limitation will be flooded to all ports in the associated domain. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: Configure Profile ◆ Profile Name – The name of a profile containing one or more MVR group addresses. (Range: 1-21 characters) ◆ Start IP Address – Starting IP address for an MVR multicast group. (Range: 224.0.1.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 To show the configured MVR group address profiles: 1. Click Multicast, MVR. 2. Select Configure Profile from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 387: Displaying MVR Group Address Profiles To assign an MVR group address profile to a domain: 1. Click Multicast, MVR. 2. Select Associate Profile from the Step list. 3. Select Add from the Action list. 4.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 Figure 389: Showing the MVR Group Address Profiles Assigned to a Domain CONFIGURING MVR Use the Multicast > MVR (Configure Interface) page to configure each INTERFACE STATUS interface that participates in the MVR protocol as a source port or receiver port. If you are sure that only one subscriber attached to an interface is receiving multicast services, you can enable the immediate leave function.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 remaining subscribers for that multicast group before removing the port from the group list. ■ Using immediate leave can speed up leave latency, but should only be enabled on a port attached to one multicast subscriber to avoid disrupting services to other group members attached to the same interface. ■ Immediate leave does not apply to multicast groups which have been statically assigned to a port.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 WEB INTERFACE To configure interface settings for MVR: 1. Click Multicast, MVR. 2. Select Configure Interface from the Step list. 3. Select Port or Trunk interface. 4. Select an MVR domain. 5. Set each port that will participate in the MVR protocol as a source port or receiver port, and optionally enable Immediate Leave on any receiver port to which only one subscriber is attached. 6. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 ◆ The MVR VLAN cannot be specified as the receiver VLAN for static bindings. PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Domain ID – An independent multicast domain. (Range: 1-5) ◆ Interface – Port or trunk identifier. ◆ VLAN – VLAN identifier. (Range: 1-4094) ◆ Group IP Address – Defines a multicast service sent to the selected port.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 4. Select an MVR domain. 5. Select the port or trunk for which to display this information. Figure 392: Showing the Static MVR Groups Assigned to a Port DISPLAYING MVR Use the Multicast > MVR (Show Member) page to show the multicast RECEIVER GROUPS groups either statically or dynamically assigned to the MVR receiver groups on each interface.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 WEB INTERFACE To display the interfaces assigned to the MVR receiver groups: 1. Click Multicast, MVR. 2. Select Show Member from the Step list. 3. Select an MVR domain. Figure 393: Displaying MVR Receiver Groups DISPLAYING Use the Multicast > MVR > Show Statistics pages to display MVR protocolMVR STATISTICS related statistics for the specified interface.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 ◆ General Query Sent – The number of general queries sent from this interface. ◆ Specific Query Received – The number of specific queries received on this interface. ◆ Specific Query Sent – The number of specific queries sent from this interface. ◆ Number of Reports Sent – The number of reports sent from this interface. ◆ Number of Leaves Sent – The number of leaves sent from this interface.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 WEB INTERFACE To display statistics for MVR query-related messages: 1. Click Multicast, MVR. 2. Select Show Statistics from the Step list. 3. Select Show Query Statistics from the Action list. 4. Select an MVR domain.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 To display MVR protocol-related statistics for a VLAN: 1. Click Multicast, MVR. 2. Select Show Statistics from the Step list. 3. Select Show VLAN Statistics from the Action list. 4. Select an MVR domain. 5. Select a VLAN. Figure 395: Displaying MVR Statistics – VLAN To display MVR protocol-related statistics for a port: 1. Click Multicast, MVR. 2. Select Show Statistics from the Step list. 3.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 Figure 396: Displaying MVR Statistics – Port MULTICAST VLAN REGISTRATION FOR IPV6 MVR6 functions in a manner similar to that described for MRV (see "Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4" on page 640). COMMAND USAGE ◆ General Configuration Guidelines for MVR6: 1. Enable MVR6 for a domain on the switch, and select the MVR VLAN (see "Configuring MVR6 Domain Settings" on page 660). 2.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 CONFIGURING MVR6 Use the Multicast > MVR6 (Configure Global) page to configure proxy GLOBAL SETTINGS switching and the robustness variable. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "MVR for IPv6" on page 1268 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ ◆ Proxy Switching – Configures MVR proxy switching, where the source port acts as a host, and the receiver port acts as an MVR router with querier service enabled.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 ◆ ◆ Proxy Query Interval – Configures the interval at which the receiver port sends out general queries. (Range: 2-31744 seconds; Default: 125 seconds) ■ This parameter sets the general query interval at which active receiver ports send out general queries. ■ This interval is only effective when proxy switching is enabled.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 CONFIGURING MVR6 Use the Multicast > MVR6 (Configure Domain) page to enable MVR6 DOMAIN SETTINGS globally on the switch, and select the VLAN that will serve as the sole channel for common multicast streams supported by the service provider. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "MVR for IPv6" on page 1268 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Domain ID– An independent multicast domain.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 WEB INTERFACE To configure settings for an MVR6 domain: 1. Click Multicast, MVR6. 2. Select Configure Domain from the Step list. 3. Select a domain from the scroll-down list. 4. Enable MVR6 for the selected domain, select the MVR6 VLAN, set the forwarding priority to be assigned to all ingress multicast traffic, and set the source IP address for all control packets sent upstream as required. 5. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 ◆ The MVR6 group address range assigned to a profile cannot overlap with the group address range of any other profile. ◆ MRV6 domains can be associated with more than one MVR6 profile. But since MVR6 domains cannot share the group range, an MRV6 profile can only be associated with one MVR6 domain.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 Figure 399: Configuring an MVR6 Group Address Profile To show the configured MVR6 group address profiles: 1. Click Multicast, MVR6. 2. Select Configure Profile from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 400: Displaying MVR6 Group Address Profiles To assign an MVR6 group address profile to a domain: 1. Click Multicast, MVR6. 2. Select Associate Profile from the Step list. 3. Select Add from the Action list. 4.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 To show the MVR6 group address profiles assigned to a domain: 1. Click Multicast, MVR6. 2. Select Associate Profile from the Step list. 3. Select Show from the Action list. Figure 402: Showing MVR6 Group Address Profiles Assigned to a Domain CONFIGURING MVR6 Use the Multicast > MVR6 (Configure Interface) page to configure each INTERFACE STATUS interface that participates in the MVR6 protocol as a source port or receiver port.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 ◆ Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports. When enabled, the receiver port is immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave message. When immediate leave is disabled, the switch follows the standard rules by sending a group-specific query to the receiver port and waiting for a response to determine if there are any remaining subscribers for that multicast group before removing the port from the group list.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 WEB INTERFACE To configure interface settings for MVR6: 1. Click Multicast, MVR6. 2. Select Configure Interface from the Step list. 3. Select Port or Trunk interface. 4. Select an MVR6 domain. 5. Set each port that will participate in the MVR6 protocol as a source port or receiver port, and optionally enable Immediate Leave on any receiver port to which only one subscriber is attached. 6. Click Apply.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Domain ID – An independent multicast domain. (Range: 1-5) ◆ Interface – Port or trunk identifier. ◆ VLAN – VLAN identifier. (Range: 1-4094) ◆ Group IPv6 Address – Defines a multicast service sent to the selected port. Multicast groups must be assigned from the MVR6 group range configured on the Configure General page. WEB INTERFACE To assign a static MVR6 group to an interface: 1.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 Figure 405: Showing the Static MVR6 Groups Assigned to a Port DISPLAYING MVR6 Use the Multicast > MVR6 (Show Member) page to show the multicast RECEIVER GROUPS groups either statically or dynamically assigned to the MVR6 receiver groups on each interface. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "show mvr6 members" on page 1282 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Domain ID – An independent multicast domain.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 3. Select an MVR6 domain. Figure 406: Displaying MVR6 Receiver Groups DISPLAYING Use the Multicast > MVR6 > Show Statistics pages to display MVR6 MVR6 STATISTICS protocol-related statistics for the specified interface. CLI REFERENCES ◆ "show mvr6 statistics" on page 1284 PARAMETERS These parameters are displayed: ◆ Domain ID – An independent multicast domain. (Range: 1-5) ◆ VLAN – VLAN identifier.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 ◆ Number of Leaves Sent – The number of leaves sent from this interface. VLAN, Port, and Trunk Statistics Input Statistics ◆ Report – The number of MLD membership reports received on this interface. ◆ Leave – The number of leave messages received on this interface. ◆ G Query – The number of general query messages received on this interface.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 WEB INTERFACE To display statistics for MVR6 query-related messages: 1. Click Multicast, MVR6. 2. Select Show Statistics from the Step list. 3. Select Show Query Statistics from the Action list. 4. Select an MVR6 domain.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 To display MVR6 protocol-related statistics for a VLAN: 1. Click Multicast, MVR6. 2. Select Show Statistics from the Step list. 3. Select Show VLAN Statistics from the Action list. 4. Select an MVR6 domain. 5. Select a VLAN.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 To display MVR6 protocol-related statistics for a port: 1. Click Multicast, MVR6. 2. Select Show Statistics from the Step list. 3. Select Show Port Statistics from the Action list. 4. Select an MVR6 domain. 5. Select a Port.
CHAPTER 17 | Multicast Filtering Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 – 674 –
SECTION III COMMAND LINE INTERFACE This section provides a detailed description of the Command Line Interface, along with examples for all of the commands.
SECTION III | Command Line Interface ◆ "Class of Service Commands" on page 1159 ◆ "Quality of Service Commands" on page 1173 ◆ "Multicast Filtering Commands" on page 1191 ◆ "LLDP Commands" on page 1287 ◆ "CFM Commands" on page 1311 ◆ "OAM Commands" on page 1353 ◆ "Domain Name Service Commands" on page 1365 ◆ "DHCP Commands" on page 1375 ◆ "IP Interface Commands" on page 1387 – 676 –
18 USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI). ACCESSING THE CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server’s console port, or via a Telnet or Secure Shell connection (SSH), the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt. Using the switch's command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system.
CHAPTER 18 | Using the Command Line Interface Accessing the CLI TELNET CONNECTION Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol. In this environment, your management station and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Each address consists of a network portion and host portion. For example, the IP address assigned to this switch, 10.1.0.1, consists of a network portion (10.1.
CHAPTER 18 | Using the Command Line Interface Entering Commands NOTE: You can open up to eight sessions to the device via Telnet or SSH. ENTERING COMMANDS This section describes how to enter CLI commands. KEYWORDS AND A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments. Keywords identify ARGUMENTS a command, and arguments specify configuration parameters.
CHAPTER 18 | Using the Command Line Interface Entering Commands GETTING HELP ON You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help COMMANDS command. You can also display command syntax by using the “?” character to list keywords or parameters. SHOWING COMMANDS If you enter a “?” at the command prompt, the system will display the first level of keywords or command groups. You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command.
CHAPTER 18 | Using the Command Line Interface Entering Commands port-channel power-save pppoe privilege process protocol-vlan public-key qos queue radius-server reload rmon rspan running-config snmp snmp-server sntp spanning-tree ssh startup-config subnet-vlan system tacacs-server tech-support time-range traffic-segmentation udld upgrade users version vlan voice watchdog web-auth Console#show Port channel information Shows the power saving information Displays PPPoE configuration Shows current privilege l
CHAPTER 18 | Using the Command Line Interface Entering Commands PARTIAL KEYWORD If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark, alternatives that LOOKUP match the initial letters are provided. (Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark.) For example “s?” shows all the keywords starting with “s.
CHAPTER 18 | Using the Command Line Interface Entering Commands Table 41: General Command Modes (Continued) Class Mode Configuration (continued) Time Range VLAN Database * You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode. You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes.
CHAPTER 18 | Using the Command Line Interface Entering Commands The configuration commands are organized into different modes: ◆ Global Configuration - These commands modify the system level configuration, and include commands such as hostname and snmpserver community. ◆ Access Control List Configuration - These commands are used for packet filtering.
CHAPTER 18 | Using the Command Line Interface Entering Commands To enter the other modes, at the configuration prompt type one of the following commands. Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode.
CHAPTER 18 | Using the Command Line Interface CLI Command Groups Table 43: Keystroke Commands (Continued) Keystroke Function Ctrl-K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line. Ctrl-L Repeats current command line on a new line. Ctrl-N Enters the next command line in the history buffer. Ctrl-P Enters the last command. Ctrl-R Repeats current command line on a new line. Ctrl-U Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line. Ctrl-W Deletes the last word typed.
CHAPTER 18 | Using the Command Line Interface CLI Command Groups Table 44: Command Group Index (Continued) Command Group Description Page Interface Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet ports, aggregated links, and VLANs 967 Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk; 995 configures Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks Mirror Port Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data passing through or the performance o
CHAPTER 18 | Using the Command Line Interface CLI Command Groups The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations: ACL (Access Control List Configuration) CFM (Connectivity Fault Management Configuration) CM (Class Map Configuration) ERPS (Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Configuration) GC (Global Configuration) IC (Interface Configuration) IPC (IGMP Profile Configuration) LC (Line Configuration) MST (Multiple Spanning Tree) NE (Normal Exec) PE (Privileged Exec) PM (Polic
19 GENERAL COMMANDS The general commands are used to control the command access mode, configuration mode, and other basic functions.
CHAPTER 19 | General Commands EXAMPLE Console(config)#prompt RD2 RD2(config)# reload This command restarts the system at a specified time, after a specified (Global Configuration) delay, or at a periodic interval. You can reboot the system immediately, or you can configure the switch to reset after a specified amount of time. Use the cancel option to remove a configured setting.
CHAPTER 19 | General Commands COMMAND USAGE ◆ This command resets the entire system. ◆ Any combination of reload options may be specified. If the same option is re-specified, the previous setting will be overwritten. ◆ When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test. It will also retain all configuration information stored in non-volatile memory by the copy running-config startup-config command (See "copy" on page 718).
CHAPTER 19 | General Commands EXAMPLE Console>enable Password: [privileged level password] Console# RELATED COMMANDS disable (694) enable password (802) quit This command exits the configuration program. DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Normal Exec, Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program.
CHAPTER 19 | General Commands EXAMPLE In this example, the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer: Console#show history Execution command history: 2 config 1 show history Configuration command history: 4 interface vlan 1 3 exit 2 interface vlan 1 1 end Console# The ! command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode, and commands from the Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the conf
CHAPTER 19 | General Commands disable This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode. In normal access mode, you can only display basic information on the switch's configuration or Ethernet statistics. To gain access to all commands, you must use the privileged mode. See "Understanding Command Modes" on page 682. DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE The “>” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in normal access mode.
CHAPTER 19 | General Commands show reload This command displays the current reload settings, and the time at which next scheduled reload will take place. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show reload Reloading switch in time: 0 hours 29 minutes. The switch will be rebooted at January 1 02:11:50 2001. Remaining Time: 0 days, 0 hours, 29 minutes, 52 seconds. Console# end This command returns to Privileged Exec mode.
CHAPTER 19 | General Commands EXAMPLE This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global Configuration mode, and then quit the CLI session: Console(config)#exit Console#exit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username: – 696 –
20 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS The system management commands are used to control system logs, passwords, user names, management options, and display or configure a variety of other system information.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Banner Information hostname This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device. Use the no form to restore the default host name. SYNTAX hostname name no hostname name - The name of this host.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Banner Information Table 48: Banner Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode banner configure manager-info Configures the Manager contact information that is displayed by banner GC banner configure mux Configures the MUX information that is displayed by banner GC banner configure note Configures miscellaneous information that is displayed GC by banner under the Notes heading show banner Displays all banner information NE, PE banner configure This comm
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Banner Information Row: 7 Rack: 29 Shelf in this rack: 8 Information about DC power supply. Floor: 2 Row: 7 Rack: 25 Electrical circuit: : ec-177743209-xb Number of LP:12 Position of the equipment in the MUX:1/23 IP LAN:192.168.1.1 Note: This is a random note about this managed switch and can contain miscellaneous information. Console(config)# banner configure This command is used to configure company information displayed in the company banner.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Banner Information banner configure This command is use to configure DC power information displayed in the dc-power-info banner. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX banner configure dc-power-info floor floor-id row row-id rack rack-id electrical-circuit ec-id no banner configure dc-power-info [floor | row | rack | electrical-circuit] floor-id - The floor number. row-id - The row number. rack-id - The rack number. ec-id - The electrical circuit ID.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Banner Information COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE Input strings cannot contain spaces. The banner configure department command interprets spaces as data input boundaries. The use of underscores ( _ ) or other unobtrusive non-letter characters is suggested for situations where white space is necessary for clarity.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Banner Information EXAMPLE Console(config)#banner configure equipment-info manufacturer-id ECS3510-28T floor 3 row 10 rack 15 shelf-rack 12 manufacturer EdgeCore Console(config)# banner configure This command is used to configure the equipment location information equipment-location displayed in the banner. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Banner Information COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE Input strings cannot contain spaces. The banner configure ip-lan command interprets spaces as data input boundaries. The use of underscores ( _ ) or other unobtrusive non-letter characters is suggested for situations where white space is necessary for clarity. EXAMPLE Console(config)#banner configure ip-lan 192.168.1.1/255.255.255.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Banner Information banner configure This command is used to configure the manager contact information manager-info displayed in the banner. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX banner configure manager-info name mgr1-name phone-number mgr1-number [name2 mgr2-name phone-number mgr2-number | name3 mgr3-name phone-number mgr3-number] no banner configure manager-info [name1 | name2 | name3] mgr1-name - The name of the first manager.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Banner Information DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE Input strings cannot contain spaces. The banner configure mux command interprets spaces as data input boundaries. The use of underscores ( _ ) or other unobtrusive non-letter characters is suggested for situations where white space is necessary for clarity.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands System Status show banner This command displays all banner information. COMMAND MODE Normal Exec, Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show banner EdgeCore WARNING - MONITORED ACTIONS AND ACCESSES R&D Albert_Einstein - 123-555-1212 Lamar - 123-555-1219 Station's information: 710_Network_Path,_Indianapolis ECS3510-28T Floor / Row / Rack / Sub-Rack 3/ 10 / 15 / 12 DC power supply: Power Source A: Floor / Row / Rack / Electrical circuit 3/ 15 / 24 / 48v-id_3.15.24.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands System Status Table 49: System Status Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode show watchdog Shows if watchdog debugging is enabled PE watchdog software Monitors key processes, and automatically reboots the system if any of these processes are not responding correctly PE show access-list This command shows utilization parameters for TCAM (Ternary Content tcam-utilization Addressable Memory), including the number policy control entries in use, the number of
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands System Status Alarm Configuration Rising Threshold Falling Threshold : 90% : 70% Console# RELATED COMMANDS memory (791) show process cpu This command shows the CPU utilization parameters, alarm status, and alarm configuration.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands System Status COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE ◆ Use the interface keyword to display configuration data for the specified interface. ◆ Use this command in conjunction with the show startup-config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non-volatile memory. ◆ This command displays settings for key command modes.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands System Status line console ! line vty ! end ! Console# RELATED COMMANDS show startup-config (711) show startup-config This command displays the configuration file stored in non-volatile memory that is used to start up the system. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE ◆ Use this command in conjunction with the show running-config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non-volatile memory.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands System Status COMMAND USAGE For a description of the items shown by this command, refer to "Displaying System Information" on page 119. Note that the System Temperature field only applies to the ECS3510-52T. The ECS3510-28T does not have a thermal detector. EXAMPLE Console#show system System Description : ECS3510-52T System OID String : 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.10.1.27.102 System Information System Up Time : 0 days, 0 hours, 10 minutes, and 28.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands System Status Web Server Port Web Secure Server Web Secure Server Port Telnet Server Telnet Server Port Jumbo Frame: . . . : : : : : 80 Enabled 443 Enabled 23 Disabled show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user name, idle time, and IP address of Telnet client. DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Normal Exec, Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE The session used to execute this command is indicated by a “*” symbol next to the Line (i.e.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands System Status COMMAND USAGE See "Displaying Hardware/Software Versions" on page 120 for detailed information on the items displayed by this command. EXAMPLE Console#show version Unit 1 Serial Number Hardware Version EPLD Version Number of Ports Main Power Status Role Loader Version Linux Kernel Version Boot ROM Version Operation Code Version : : : : : : : : : : A35018426 R0A 0.00 28 Up Master 1.0.2.2 2.6.22.18 0.0.0.1 1.2.2.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Frame Size FRAME SIZE This section describes commands used to configure the Ethernet frame size on the switch. Table 50: Frame Size Commands Command Function Mode jumbo frame Enables support for jumbo frames GC jumbo frame This command enables support for Layer 2 jumbo frames for Gigabit Ethernet ports. Use the no form to disable it.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands File Management FILE MANAGEMENT Managing Firmware Firmware can be uploaded and downloaded to or from an FTP/TFTP server. By saving runtime code to a file on an FTP/TFTP server, that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation. The switch can also be set to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands File Management Table 51: Flash/File Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode ip tftp timeout Specifies the time the switch can wait for a response from a TFTP server before retransmitting a request or timing out for the last retry GC show ip tftp Displays information about TFTP settings PE General Commands boot system This command specifies the file or image used to start up the system.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands File Management copy This command moves (upload/download) a code image or configuration file between the switch’s flash memory and an FTP/TFTP server. When you save the system code or configuration settings to a file on an FTP/TFTP server, that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore system operation. The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the FTP/TFTP server and the quality of the network connection.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands File Management ◆ To replace the startup configuration, you must use startup-config as the destination. ◆ The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the FTP/TFTP server. You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new firmware, or contact your distributor for help. ◆ For information on specifying an https-certificate, see "Replacing the Default Secure-site Certificate" on page 339.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands File Management The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file. Console#copy running-config file destination file name: startup Write to FLASH Programming. \Write to FLASH finish. Success. Console# The following example shows how to download a configuration file: Console#copy tftp startup-config TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.99 Source configuration file name: startup.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands File Management This example shows how to copy a file to an FTP server. Console#copy ftp file FTP server IP address: 169.254.1.11 User[anonymous]: admin Password[]: ***** Choose file type: 1. config: 2. opcode: 2 Source file name: BLANC.BIX Destination file name: BLANC.BIX Console# delete This command deletes a file or image. SYNTAX delete filename filename - Name of configuration file or code image.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands File Management config - Switch configuration file. opcode - Run-time operation code image file. filename - Name of configuration file or code image. If this file exists but contains errors, information on this file cannot be shown. DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE If you enter the command dir without any parameters, the system displays all files.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands File Management COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command. See the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by this command. Console#whichboot File Name Type Startup Modify Time Size(bytes) -------------------------------- ------- ------- ------------------- ---------Unit 1: ecs3510_28t_v1.4.0.0.bix OpCode Y 2012-11-26 10:39:57 14112484 startup1.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands File Management 3. It sets the new version as the startup image. 4. It then restarts the system to start using the new image. ◆ Any changes made to the default setting can be displayed with the show running-config or show startup-config commands. EXAMPLE Console(config)#upgrade opcode auto Console(config)#upgrade opcode path tftp://192.168.0.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands File Management ◆ The name for the new image stored on the TFTP server must be ecs3510-series.bix. However, note that file name is not to be included in this command. ◆ When specifying a TFTP server, the following syntax must be used, where filedir indicates the path to the directory containing the new image: tftp://192.168.0.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands File Management show upgrade This command shows the opcode upgrade configuration settings. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show upgrade Auto Image Upgrade Global Settings: Status : Disabled Reload Status : Disabled Path : File Name : ecs3510-28t.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands File Management ip tftp timeout This command specifies the time the switch can wait for a response from a TFTP server before retransmitting a request or timing out for the last retry. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX ip tftp timeout seconds no ip tftp timeout seconds - The the time the switch can wait for a response from a TFTP server before retransmitting a request or timing out.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Line LINE You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the server’s serial port. These commands are used to set communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet (i.e., a virtual terminal).
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Line DEFAULT SETTING There is no default line. COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as “VTY” in screen displays such as show users. However, the serial communication parameters (e.g., databits) do not affect Telnet connections.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Line EXAMPLE To specify 7 data bits, enter this command: Console(config-line)#databits 7 Console(config-line)# RELATED COMMANDS parity (732) exec-timeout This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected. Use the no form to restore the default. SYNTAX exec-timeout [seconds] no exec-timeout seconds - Integer that specifies the timeout interval.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Line login This command enables password checking at login. Use the no form to disable password checking and allow connections without a password. SYNTAX login [local] no login local - Selects local password checking. Authentication is based on the user name specified with the username command.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Line parity This command defines the generation of a parity bit. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX parity {none | even | odd} no parity none - No parity even - Even parity odd - Odd parity DEFAULT SETTING No parity COMMAND MODE Line Configuration COMMAND USAGE Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems often require a specific parity bit setting.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Line COMMAND USAGE ◆ When a connection is started on a line with password protection, the system prompts for the password. If you enter the correct password, the system shows a prompt. You can use the password-thresh command to set the number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Line EXAMPLE To set the password threshold to five attempts, enter this command: Console(config-line)#password-thresh 5 Console(config-line)# RELATED COMMANDS silent-time (734) silent-time This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password-thresh command. Use the no form to remove the silent time value.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Line DEFAULT SETTING 115200 bps COMMAND MODE Line Configuration COMMAND USAGE Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port. Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be supported. The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Line timeout login This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into response the CLI. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX timeout login response [seconds] no timeout login response seconds - Integer that specifies the timeout interval.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Line EXAMPLE Console#disconnect 1 Console# RELATED COMMANDS show ssh (840) show users (713) terminal This command configures terminal settings, including escape-character, lines displayed, terminal type, width, and command history. Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to restore the default setting.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Line EXAMPLE This example sets the number of lines displayed by commands with lengthy output such as show running-config to 48 lines. Console#terminal length 48 Console# show line This command displays the terminal line’s parameters. SYNTAX show line [console | vty] console - Console terminal line. vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Event Logging EVENT LOGGING This section describes commands used to configure event logging on the switch.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Event Logging logging history This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity. The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level. SYNTAX logging history {flash | ram} level no logging history {flash | ram} flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory). ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on power reset). level - One of the levels listed below.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Event Logging logging host This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages. Use the no form to remove a syslog server host. SYNTAX logging host host-ip-address [port udp-port] no logging host host-ip-address host-ip-address - The IPv4 or IPv6 address of a syslog server. udp-port - The UDP port number used by the remote server.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Event Logging EXAMPLE Console(config)#logging on Console(config)# RELATED COMMANDS logging history (740) logging trap (742) clear log (743) logging trap This command enables the logging of system messages to a remote server, or limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity. Use this command without a specified level to enable remote logging. Use the no form to disable remote logging.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Event Logging clear log This command clears messages from the log buffer. SYNTAX clear log [flash | ram] flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory). ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on power reset). DEFAULT SETTING Flash and RAM COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#clear log Console# RELATED COMMANDS show log (743) show log This command displays the log messages stored in local memory.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Event Logging EXAMPLE The following example shows the event message stored in RAM. Console#show log ram [1] 00:01:30 2001-01-01 "VLAN 1 link-up notification." level: 6, module: 5, function: 1, and event no.: 1 [0] 00:01:30 2001-01-01 "Unit 1, Port 1 link-up notification." level: 6, module: 5, function: 1, and event no.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands SMTP Alerts Table 56: show logging flash/ram - display description Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command. History logging in FLASH The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command. History logging in RAM The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command. The following example displays settings for the trap function.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands SMTP Alerts Table 58: Event Logging Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode logging sendmail level Severity threshold used to trigger alert messages GC logging sendmail destination-email Email recipients of alert messages GC logging sendmail source-email Email address used for “From” field of alert messages GC show logging sendmail Displays SMTP event handler settings NE, PE logging sendmail This command enables SMTP event handling.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands SMTP Alerts ◆ To send email alerts, the switch first opens a connection, sends all the email alerts waiting in the queue one by one, and finally closes the connection. ◆ To open a connection, the switch first selects the server that successfully sent mail during the last connection, or the first server configured by this command. If it fails to send mail, the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to send mail again.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands SMTP Alerts logging sendmail This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages. Use the no destination-email form to remove a recipient. SYNTAX [no] logging sendmail destination-email email-address email-address - The source email address used in alert messages. (Range: 1-41 characters) DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time show logging This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler. sendmail COMMAND MODE Normal Exec, Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show logging sendmail SMTP servers ----------------------------------------------192.168.1.19 SMTP Minimum Severity Level: 7 SMTP destination email addresses ----------------------------------------------ted@this-company.com SMTP Source Email Address: bill@this-company.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time Table 59: Time Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode clock summer-time (predefined) Configures summer time* for the switch’s internal clock GC clock summer-time (recurring) Configures summer time* for the switch’s internal clock GC clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock GC calendar set Sets the system date and time PE show calendar Displays the current date and time setting NE, PE * Daylight savings time.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time RELATED COMMANDS sntp server (751) sntp poll (751) show sntp (752) sntp poll This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode. Use the no form to restore to the default. SYNTAX sntp poll seconds no sntp poll seconds - Interval between time requests.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time COMMAND USAGE This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time updates when set to SNTP client mode. The client will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received. It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command. EXAMPLE Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE You can enable NTP authentication to ensure that reliable updates are received from only authorized NTP servers. The authentication keys and their associated key number must be centrally managed and manually distributed to NTP servers and clients. The key numbers and key values must match on both the server and client.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time ◆ Use the no form of this command without an argument to clear all authentication keys in the list. EXAMPLE Console(config)#ntp authentication-key 45 md5 thisiskey45 Console(config)# RELATED COMMANDS ntp authenticate (752) ntp client This command enables NTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP time servers specified with the ntp servers command. Use the no form to disable NTP client requests.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time ntp server This command sets the IP addresses of the servers to which NTP time requests are issued. Use the no form of the command to clear a specific time server or all servers from the current list. SYNTAX ntp server ip-address [key key-number] no ntp server [ip-address] ip-address - IP address of an NTP time server. key-number - The number of an authentication key to use in communications with the server.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time show ntp This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the NTP client, and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated. COMMAND MODE Normal Exec, Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE This command displays the current time, the poll interval used for sending time synchronization requests, and the current NTP mode (i.e., unicast).
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time e-date - Day of the month when summer time will end. (Range: 1-31) e-month - The month when summer time will end. (Options: january | february | march | april | may | june | july | august | september | october | november | december) e-year - The year summer time will end. e-hour - The hour summer time will end. (Range: 0-23 hours) e-minute - The minute summer time will end. (Range: 0-59 minutes) offset - Summer time offset from the regular time zone, in minutes.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time clock summer-time This command configures the summer time (daylight savings time) status (predefined) and settings for the switch using predefined configurations for several major regions in the world. Use the no form to disable summer time. SYNTAX clock summer-time name predefined [australia | europe | newzealand | usa] no clock summer-time name - Name of the timezone while summer time is in effect, usually an acronym.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time clock summer-time This command allows the user to manually configure the start, end, and (recurring) offset times of summer time (daylight savings time) for the switch on a recurring basis. Use the no form to disable summer-time. SYNTAX clock summer-time name recurring b-week b-day b-month b-hour b-minute e-week e-day e-month e-hour e-minute [offset] no clock summer-time name - Name of the timezone while summer time is in effect, usually an acronym.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time Typically, clocks are adjusted forward one hour at the start of spring and then adjusted backward in autumn. ◆ This command sets the summer-time time zone relative to the currently configured time zone. To display a time corresponding to your local time when summer time is in effect, you must indicate the number of minutes your summer-time time zone deviates from your regular time zone.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time EXAMPLE Console(config)#clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after-UTC Console(config)# RELATED COMMANDS show sntp (752) calendar set This command sets the system clock. It may be used if there is no time server on your network, or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a time server. SYNTAX calendar set hour min sec {day month year | month day year} hour - Hour in 24-hour format. (Range: 0 - 23) min - Minute.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time Range COMMAND MODE Normal Exec, Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show calendar Current Time Time Zone Summer Time Summer Time in Effect Console# : : : : Aug 23 11:51:23 2012 UTC, 00:00 MESZ, Australia region No TIME RANGE This section describes the commands used to sets a time range for use by other functions, such as Access Control Lists.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time Range EXAMPLE Console(config)#time-range r&d Console(config-time-range)# RELATED COMMANDS Access Control Lists (943) absolute This command sets the time range for the execution of a command. Use the no form to remove a previously specified time. SYNTAX absolute start hour minute day month year [end hour minutes day month year] absolute end hour minutes day month year no absolute hour - Hour in 24-hour format. (Range: 0-23) minute - Minute.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Time Range periodic This command sets the time range for the periodic execution of a command. Use the no form to remove a previously specified time range.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Switch Clustering show time-range This command shows configured time ranges. SYNTAX show time-range [name] name - Name of the time range.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Switch Clustering then use the Commander to manage the Member switches through the cluster’s “internal” IP addresses. ◆ Clustered switches must be in the same Ethernet broadcast domain. In other words, clustering only functions for switches which can pass information between the Commander and potential Candidates or active Members through VLAN 4093.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Switch Clustering ◆ There can be up to 100 candidates and 36 member switches in one cluster. ◆ A switch can only be a Member of one cluster. ◆ Configured switch clusters are maintained across power resets and network changes. EXAMPLE Console(config)#cluster Console(config)# cluster commander This command enables the switch as a cluster Commander. Use the no form to disable the switch as cluster Commander.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Switch Clustering cluster ip-pool This command sets the cluster IP address pool. Use the no form to reset to the default address. SYNTAX cluster ip-pool ip-address no cluster ip-pool ip-address - The base IP address for IP addresses assigned to cluster Members. The IP address must start 10.x.x.x. DEFAULT SETTING 10.254.254.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Switch Clustering COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ The maximum number of cluster Members is 36. ◆ The maximum number of cluster Candidates is 100. EXAMPLE Console(config)#cluster member mac-address 00-12-34-56-78-9a id 5 Console(config)# rcommand This command provides access to a cluster Member CLI for configuration. SYNTAX rcommand id member-id member-id - The ID number of the Member switch.
CHAPTER 20 | System Management Commands Switch Clustering Heartbeat Loss Count : 3 seconds Number of Members : 1 Number of Candidates : 2 Console# show cluster This command shows the current switch cluster members. members COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show cluster members Cluster Members: ID : 1 Role : Active member IP Address : 10.254.254.2 MAC Address : 00-E0-0C-00-00-FE Description : ECS3510-28T Console# show cluster This command shows the discovered Candidate switches in the network.
21 SNMP COMMANDS SNMP commands control access to this switch from management stations using the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), as well as the error types sent to trap managers. SNMP Version 3 also provides security features that cover message integrity, authentication, and encryption; as well as controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands Table 63: SNMP Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode show snmp view Shows the SNMP views PE Notification Log Commands nlm Enables the specified notification log GC snmp-server notify-filter Creates a notification log and specifies the target host GC show nlm oper-status Shows operation status of configured notification logs PE show snmp notify-filter Displays the configured notification logs PE ATC Trap Commands snmp-server enable port- Sends a trap when broa
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands General SNMP Commands Table 63: SNMP Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode memory Sets the rising and falling threshold for the memory utilization alarm GC process cpu Sets the rising and falling threshold for the CPU utilization alarm GC show memory Shows memory utilization parameters PE show process cpu Shows CPU utilization parameters PE Additional Trap Commands General SNMP Commands snmp-server This command enables the SNMPv3 engine and services for all
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands General SNMP Commands DEFAULT SETTING ◆ ◆ public - Read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects. private - Read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects. COMMAND MODE Global Configuration EXAMPLE Console(config)#snmp-server community alpha rw Console(config)# snmp-server This command sets the system contact string. Use the no form to remove contact the system contact information.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands General SNMP Commands DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Global Configuration EXAMPLE Console(config)#snmp-server location WC-19 Console(config)# RELATED COMMANDS snmp-server contact (774) show snmp This command can be used to check the status of SNMP communications.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands SNMP Target Host Commands 0 SNMP packets output 0 Too big errors 0 No such name errors 0 Bad values errors 0 General errors 0 Response PDUs 0 Trap PDUs SNMP Logging: Disabled Console# SNMP Target Host Commands snmp-server This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management enable traps Protocol traps or informs (i.e., SNMP notifications). Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands SNMP Target Host Commands send notifications, you must configure at least one snmp-server host command. ◆ The authentication, link-up, and link-down traps are legacy notifications, and therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts, they must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notify View assigned by the snmp-server group command.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands SNMP Target Host Commands privacy. See "Simple Network Management Protocol" on page 444 for further information about these authentication and encryption options. port - Host UDP port to use. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 162) DEFAULT SETTING Host Address: None Notification Type: Traps SNMP Version: 1 UDP Port: 162 COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ If you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands SNMP Target Host Commands To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host, complete these steps: 1. Enable the SNMP agent (page 773). 2. Create a local SNMPv3 user to use in the message exchange 3. 4. 5. 6. process (page 783). Create a view with the required notification messages (page 784). Create a group that includes the required notify view (page 782). Allow the switch to send SNMP traps; i.e., notifications (page 776).
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands SNMPv3 Commands EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#snmp-server enable port-traps mac-notification Console(config)# show snmp-server This command shows if SNMP traps are enabled or disabled for the enable port-traps specified interfaces. SYNTAX show snmp-server enable port-traps interface [interface] interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands SNMPv3 Commands DEFAULT SETTING A unique engine ID is automatically generated by the switch based on its MAC address. COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ An SNMP engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides either on this switch or on a remote device. This engine protects against message replay, delay, and redirection.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands SNMPv3 Commands snmp-server group This command adds an SNMP group, mapping SNMP users to SNMP views. Use the no form to remove an SNMP group. SYNTAX snmp-server group groupname {v1 | v2c | v3 {auth | noauth | priv}} [read readview] [write writeview] [notify notifyview] no snmp-server group groupname groupname - Name of an SNMP group. (Range: 1-32 characters) v1 | v2c | v3 - Use SNMP version 1, 2c or 3.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands SNMPv3 Commands EXAMPLE Console(config)#snmp-server group r&d v3 auth write daily Console(config)# snmp-server user This command adds a user to an SNMP group, restricting the user to a specific SNMP Read, Write, or Notify View. Use the no form to remove a user from an SNMP group.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands SNMPv3 Commands ◆ Remote users (i.e., the command specifies a remote engine identifier) must be configured to identify the source of SNMPv3 inform messages sent from the local switch. ◆ The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication/privacy digests from the password. You should therefore configure the engine ID with the snmp-server engine-id command before using this configuration command.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands SNMPv3 Commands COMMAND USAGE ◆ Views are used in the snmp-server group command to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree. ◆ The predefined view “defaultview” includes access to the entire MIB tree. EXAMPLES This view includes MIB-2. Console(config)#snmp-server view mib-2 1.3.6.1.2.1 included Console(config)# This view includes the MIB-2 interfaces table, ifDescr. The wild card is used to select all the index values in this table.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands SNMPv3 Commands Table 64: show snmp engine-id - display description (Continued) Field Description Remote SNMP engineID String identifying an engine ID on a remote device. IP address IP address of the device containing the corresponding remote SNMP engine. show snmp group Four default groups are provided – SNMPv1 read-only access and read/ write access, and SNMPv2c read-only access and read/write access.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands SNMPv3 Commands Table 65: show snmp group - display description Field Description Group Name Name of an SNMP group. Security Model The SNMP version. Read View The associated read view. Write View The associated write view. Notify View The associated notify view. Storage Type The storage type for this entry. Row Status The row status of this entry. show snmp user This command shows information on SNMP users.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands Notification Log Commands show snmp view This command shows information on the SNMP views. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show snmp view View Name: mib-2 Subtree OID: 1.2.2.3.6.2.1 View Type: included Storage Type: permanent Row Status: active View Name: defaultview Subtree OID: 1 View Type: included Storage Type: volatile Row Status: active Console# Table 67: show snmp view - display description Field Description View Name Name of an SNMP view.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands Notification Log Commands ◆ Disabling logging with this command does not delete the entries stored in the notification log. EXAMPLE This example enables the notification log A1. Console(config)#nlm A1 Console(config)# snmp-server This command creates an SNMP notification log. Use the no form to notify-filter remove this log. SYNTAX [no] snmp-server notify-filter profile-name remote ip-address profile-name - Notification log profile name.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands Notification Log Commands ◆ To avoid this problem, notification logging should be configured and enabled using the snmp-server notify-filter command and nlm command, and these commands stored in the startup configuration file. Then when the switch reboots, SNMP traps (such as warm start) can now be logged. ◆ When this command is executed, a notification log is created (with the default parameters defined in RFC 3014).
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands Additional Trap Commands show snmp This command displays the configured notification logs. notify-filter COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE This example displays the configured notification logs and associated target hosts. Console#show snmp notify-filter Filter profile name IP address ---------------------------- ---------------A1 10.1.19.23 Console# Additional Trap Commands memory This command sets an SNMP trap based on configured thresholds for memory utilization.
CHAPTER 21 | SNMP Commands Additional Trap Commands process cpu This command sets an SNMP trap based on configured thresholds for CPU utilization. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX process cpu {rising rising-threshold | falling falling-threshold} no process cpu {rising | falling} rising-threshold - Rising threshold for CPU utilization alarm expressed in percentage. (Range: 1-100) falling-threshold - Falling threshold for CPU utilization alarm expressed in percentage.
22 REMOTE MONITORING COMMANDS Remote Monitoring allows a remote device to collect information or respond to specified events on an independent basis. This switch is an RMONcapable device which can independently perform a wide range of tasks, significantly reducing network management traffic. It can continuously run diagnostics and log information on network performance.
CHAPTER 22 | Remote Monitoring Commands rmon alarm This command sets threshold bounds for a monitored variable. Use the no form to remove an alarm. SYNTAX rmon alarm index variable interval {absolute | delta} rising-threshold threshold [event-index] falling-threshold threshold [event-index] [owner name] no rmon alarm index index – Index to this entry. (Range: 1-65535) variable – The object identifier of the MIB variable to be sampled. Only variables of the type etherStatsEntry.n.n may be sampled.
CHAPTER 22 | Remote Monitoring Commands ◆ If the current value is less than or equal to the falling threshold, and the last sample value was greater than this threshold, then an alarm will be generated. After a falling event has been generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value has risen above the falling threshold, reaches the rising threshold, and again moves back down to the failing threshold. EXAMPLE Console(config)#rmon alarm 1 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.6.
CHAPTER 22 | Remote Monitoring Commands ◆ The specified events determine the action to take when an alarm triggers this event. The response to an alarm can include logging the alarm or sending a message to a trap manager. EXAMPLE Console(config)#rmon event 2 log description urgent owner mike Console(config)# rmon collection This command periodically samples statistics on a physical interface. Use history the no form to disable periodic sampling.
CHAPTER 22 | Remote Monitoring Commands this index is not available for the port to which is normally assigned. For example, if control entry 15 is assigned to port 5 as shown below, the show running-config command will indicate that this entry is not available for port 8.
CHAPTER 22 | Remote Monitoring Commands EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#rmon collection rmon1 controlEntry 1 owner mike Console(config-if)# show rmon alarms This command shows the settings for all configured alarms. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show rmon alarms Alarm 1 is valid, owned by Monitors 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.6.
CHAPTER 22 | Remote Monitoring Commands 0 undersized and 0 oversized packets, 0 fragments and 0 jabbers packets, 0 CRC alignment errors and 0 collisions. # of dropped packet events is 0 Network utilization is estimated at 0 . . . show rmon This command shows the information collected for all configured entries in statistics the statistics group. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show rmon statistics Interface 1 is valid, and owned by Monitors 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.
CHAPTER 22 | Remote Monitoring Commands – 800 –
23 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods. Port-based authentication using IEEE 802.1X can also be configured to control either management access to the uplink ports or client access17 to the data ports.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands User Accounts and Privilege Levels USER ACCOUNTS AND PRIVILEGE LEVELS The basic commands required for management access and assigning command privilege levels are listed in this section. This switch also includes other options for password checking via the console or a Telnet connection (page 728), user authentication via a remote authentication server (page 801), and host access authentication for specific ports (page 840).
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands User Accounts and Privilege Levels DEFAULT SETTING The default is level 15. The default password is “super” COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ You cannot set a null password. You will have to enter a password to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable command. ◆ The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings (i.e.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands User Accounts and Privilege Levels Level 0-7 provide the same default access prvileges, all within Normal Exec mode under the “Console>” command prompt. Level 8-14 provide the same default access privileges, including additional commands in Normal Exec mode, and a subset of commands in Privileged Exec mode under the “Console#” command prompt. Level 15 provides full access to all commands.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands User Accounts and Privilege Levels privilege This command assigns a privilege level to specified command groups or individual commands. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX privilege mode [all] level level command no privilege mode [all] command mode - The configuration mode containing the specified command. (See "Understanding Command Modes" on page 682 and "Configuration Commands" on page 683.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Authentication Sequence EXAMPLE This example shows the privilege level for any command modified by the privilege command. Console#show privilege command privilege line all level 0 accounting privilege exec level 15 ping Console(config)# AUTHENTICATION SEQUENCE Three authentication methods can be specified to authenticate users logging into the system for management access. The commands in this section can be used to define the authentication method and sequence.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Authentication Sequence ◆ RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair. The user name, password, and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server. ◆ You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands RADIUS Client “authentication login radius tacacs local,” the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is attempted on the TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server is not available, the local user name and password is checked.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands RADIUS Client COMMAND MODE Global Configuration EXAMPLE Console(config)#radius-server acct-port 181 Console(config)# radius-server This command sets the RADIUS server network port. Use the no form to auth-port restore the default. SYNTAX radius-server auth-port port-number no radius-server auth-port port-number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands RADIUS Client key - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 48 characters) retransmit - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1-30) timeout - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands RADIUS Client radius-server This command sets the number of retries. Use the no form to restore the retransmit default. SYNTAX radius-server retransmit number-of-retries no radius-server retransmit number-of-retries - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands TACACS+ Client show radius-server This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands TACACS+ Client tacacs-server host This command specifies the TACACS+ server and other optional parameters. Use the no form to remove the server, or to restore the default values. SYNTAX tacacs-server index host host-ip-address [key key] [port port-number] [retransmit retransmit] [timeout timeout] no tacacs-server index index - The index for this server. (Range: 1) host-ip-address - IP address of a TACACS+ server.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands TACACS+ Client COMMAND MODE Global Configuration EXAMPLE Console(config)#tacacs-server key green Console(config)# tacacs-server port This command specifies the TACACS+ server network port. Use the no form to restore the default. SYNTAX tacacs-server port port-number no tacacs-server port port-number - TACACS+ server TCP port used for authentication messages.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands TACACS+ Client EXAMPLE Console(config)#tacacs-server retransmit 5 Console(config)# tacacs-server This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication timeout requests to the TACACS+ server. Use the no form to restore the default. SYNTAX tacacs-server timeout number-of-seconds no tacacs-server timeout number-of-seconds - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands AAA TACACS+ Server Group: Group Name Member Index ------------------------- ------------tacacs+ 1 Console# AAA The Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) feature provides the main framework for configuring access control on the switch. The AAA functions require the use of configured RADIUS or TACACS+ servers in the network.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands AAA method-name - Specifies an accounting method for service requests. (Range: 1-64 characters) start-stop - Records accounting from starting point and stopping point. group - Specifies the server group to use. tacacs+ - Specifies all TACACS+ hosts configure with the tacacs-server host command. server-group - Specifies the name of a server group configured with the aaa group server command.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands AAA group - Specifies the server group to use. radius - Specifies all RADIUS hosts configure with the radiusserver host command. tacacs+ - Specifies all TACACS+ hosts configure with the tacacs-server host command. server-group - Specifies the name of a server group configured with the aaa group server command.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands AAA group - Specifies the server group to use. radius - Specifies all RADIUS hosts configure with the radiusserver host command. tacacs+ - Specifies all TACACS+ hosts configure with the tacacs-server host command. server-group - Specifies the name of a server group configured with the aaa group server command.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands AAA ◆ Using the command without specifying an interim interval enables updates, but does not change the current interval setting. EXAMPLE Console(config)#aaa accounting update periodic 30 Console(config)# aaa authorization This command enables the authorization for Exec access. Use the no form exec to disable the authorization service.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands AAA aaa group server Use this command to name a group of security server hosts. To remove a server group from the configuration list, enter the no form of this command. SYNTAX [no] aaa group server {radius | tacacs+} group-name radius - Defines a RADIUS server group. tacacs+ - Defines a TACACS+ server group. group-name - A text string that names a security server group.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands AAA EXAMPLE Console(config)#aaa group server radius tps Console(config-sg-radius)#server 10.2.68.120 Console(config-sg-radius)# accounting dot1x This command applies an accounting method for 802.1X service requests on an interface. Use the no form to disable accounting on the interface. SYNTAX accounting dot1x {default | list-name} no accounting dot1x default - Specifies the default method list created with the aaa accounting dot1x command.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands AAA COMMAND MODE Line Configuration EXAMPLE Console(config)#line console Console(config-line)#accounting commands 15 default Console(config-line)# accounting exec This command applies an accounting method to local console, Telnet or SSH connections. Use the no form to disable accounting on the line. SYNTAX accounting exec {default | list-name} no accounting exec default - Specifies the default method list created with the aaa accounting exec command.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands AAA DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Line Configuration EXAMPLE Console(config)#line console Console(config-line)#authorization exec tps Console(config-line)#exit Console(config)#line vty Console(config-line)#authorization exec default Console(config-line)# show accounting This command displays the current accounting settings per function and per port.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Web Server Interface : Eth 1/1 Method List Group List Interface : tps : radius : Eth 1/2 Accounting Type Method List Group List Interface : : : : EXEC default tacacs+ vty Console# WEB SERVER This section describes commands used to configure web browser management access to the switch.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Web Server EXAMPLE Console(config)#ip http port 769 Console(config)# RELATED COMMANDS ip http server (826) show system (711) ip http server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser. Use the no form to disable this function.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Web Server COMMAND USAGE ◆ You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Telnet Server ◆ The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection. A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 6, Mozilla Firefox 4, or Google Chrome 29, or more recent versions. The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS: Table 77: HTTPS System Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 6.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Telnet Server NOTE: This switch also supports a Telnet client function. A Telnet connection can be made from this switch to another device by entering the telnet command at the Privileged Exec configuration level. ip telnet This command specifies the maximum number of Telnet sessions that can max-sessions simultaneously connect to this system. Use the no from to restore the default setting.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Telnet Server COMMAND MODE Global Configuration EXAMPLE Console(config)#ip telnet port 123 Console(config)# ip telnet server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from Telnet. Use the no form to disable this function.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Secure Shell SECURE SHELL This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server. Note that you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when using this protocol to configure the switch. NOTE: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0 clients.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Secure Shell To use the SSH server, complete these steps: 1. Generate a Host Key Pair – Use the ip ssh crypto host-key generate command to create a host public/private key pair. 2. Provide Host Public Key to Clients – Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch. Otherwise, you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Secure Shell entered into the known host file. However, you do not need to configure the client's keys. Public Key Authentication – When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch, the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method. Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can access it. The following exchanges take place during this process: Authenticating SSH v1.5 Clients a.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Secure Shell ip ssh This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to authentication- reauthenticate a user. Use the no form to restore the default setting. retries SYNTAX ip ssh authentication-retries count no ip ssh authentication-retries count – The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the interface is reset.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Secure Shell EXAMPLE Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa Console#configure Console(config)#ip ssh server Console(config)# RELATED COMMANDS ip ssh crypto host-key generate (836) show ssh (840) ip ssh server-key This command sets the SSH server key size. Use the no form to restore the size default setting. SYNTAX ip ssh server-key size key-size no ip ssh server-key size key-size – The size of server key.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Secure Shell COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the client during the SSH negotiation phase. Once an SSH session has been established, the timeout for user input is controlled by the exec-timeout command for vty sessions.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Secure Shell DEFAULT SETTING Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE ◆ The switch uses only RSA Version 1 for SSHv1.5 clients and DSA Version 2 for SSHv2 clients. ◆ This command stores the host key pair in memory (i.e., RAM). Use the ip ssh save host-key command to save the host key pair to flash memory.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Secure Shell ◆ The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this command. EXAMPLE Console#ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa Console# RELATED COMMANDS ip ssh crypto host-key generate (836) ip ssh save host-key (838) no ip ssh server (834) ip ssh save host-key This command saves the host key from RAM to flash memory. SYNTAX ip ssh save host-key DEFAULT SETTING Saves both the DSA and RSA key.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Secure Shell show public-key This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host. SYNTAX show public-key [user [username]| host] username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters) DEFAULT SETTING Shows all public keys. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE ◆ If no parameters are entered, all keys are displayed. If the user keyword is entered, but no user name is specified, then the public keys for all users are displayed.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands 802.1X Port Authentication show ssh This command displays the current SSH server connections. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show ssh Connection Version State 0 2.0 Session-Started Username Encryption admin ctos aes128-cbc-hmac-md5 stoc aes128-cbc-hmac-md5 Console# Table 80: show ssh - display description Field Description Connection The session number. (Range: 0-3) Version The Secure Shell version number.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands 802.1X Port Authentication Table 81: 802.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands 802.1X Port Authentication dot1x eapol-pass- This command passes EAPOL frames through to all ports in STP forwarding through state when dot1x is globally disabled. Use the no form to restore the default.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands 802.1X Port Authentication Authenticator Commands dot1x This command sets the port’s response to a failed authentication, either to intrusion-action block all traffic, or to assign all traffic for the port to a guest VLAN. Use the no form to reset the default. SYNTAX dot1x intrusion-action {block-traffic | guest-vlan} no dot1x intrusion-action block-traffic - Blocks traffic on this port. guest-vlan - Assigns the user to the Guest VLAN.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands 802.1X Port Authentication EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface eth 1/2 Console(config-if)#dot1x max-reauth-req 2 Console(config-if)# dot1x max-req This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request/identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session. Use the no form to restore the default.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands 802.1X Port Authentication DEFAULT Single-host COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ The “max-count” parameter specified by this command is only effective if the dot1x mode is set to “auto” by the dot1x port-control command. ◆ In “multi-host” mode, only one host connected to a port needs to pass authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands 802.1X Port Authentication EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface eth 1/2 Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto Console(config-if)# dot1x This command enables periodic re-authentication for a specified port. Use re-authentication the no form to disable re-authentication. SYNTAX [no] dot1x re-authentication COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ The re-authentication process verifies the connected client’s user ID and password on the RADIUS server.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands 802.1X Port Authentication COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface eth 1/2 Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 350 Console(config-if)# dot1x timeout This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re-authperiod re-authenticated. Use the no form of this command to reset the default. SYNTAX dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds no dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds - The number of seconds.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands 802.1X Port Authentication COMMAND USAGE This command sets the timeout for EAP-request frames other than EAPrequest/identity frames. If dot1x authentication is enabled on a port, the switch will initiate authentication when the port link state comes up. It will send an EAP-request/identity frame to the client to request its identity, followed by one or more requests for authentication information.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands 802.1X Port Authentication COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE The re-authentication process verifies the connected client’s user ID and password on the RADIUS server. During re-authentication, the client remains connected the network and the process is handled transparently by the dot1x client software. Only if re-authentication fails is the port blocked.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands 802.1X Port Authentication dot1x max-start This command sets the maximum number of times that a port supplicant will send an EAP start frame to the client before assuming that the client is 802.1X unaware. Use the no form to restore the default value. SYNTAX dot1x max-start count no dot1x max-start count - Specifies the maximum number of EAP start frames.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands 802.1X Port Authentication ◆ A port cannot be configured as a dot1x supplicant if it is a member of a trunk or LACP is enabled on the port. EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2 Console(config-if)#dot1x pae supplicant Console(config-if)# dot1x timeout This command sets the time that a supplicant port waits for a response auth-period from the authenticator. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands 802.1X Port Authentication COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface eth 1/2 Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout held-period 120 Console(config-if)# dot1x timeout This command sets the time that a supplicant port waits before resending start-period an EAPOL start frame to the authenticator. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX dot1x timeout start-period seconds no dot1x timeout start-period seconds - The number of seconds.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands 802.1X Port Authentication COMMAND USAGE This command displays the following information: ◆ Global 802.1X Parameters – Shows whether or not 802.1X port authentication is globally enabled on the switch (page 842). ◆ Authenticator Parameters – Shows whether or not EAPOL pass-through is enabled (page 842). ◆ Supplicant Parameters – Shows the supplicant user name used when the switch responds to an MD5 challenge from an authenticator (page 849). ◆ 802.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands 802.1X Port Authentication ■ ■ ◆ Backend State Machine ■ ■ ■ ◆ Reauth Count– Number of times connecting state is re-entered. Current Identifier– The integer (0-255) used by the Authenticator to identify the current authentication session. State – Current state (including request, response, success, fail, timeout, idle, initialize). Request Count– Number of EAP Request packets sent to the Supplicant without receiving a response.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Management IP Filter Authenticator PAE State Machine State : Authenticated Reauth Count : 0 Current Identifier : 3 Backend State Machine State : Idle Request Count : 0 Identifier(Server) : 2 Reauthentication State Machine State : Initialize Console# MANAGEMENT IP FILTER This section describes commands used to configure IP management access to the switch.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Management IP Filter COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default. Once you add an entry to a filter list, access to that interface is restricted to the specified addresses. ◆ If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address, the switch will reject the connection, enter an event message in the system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands Management IP Filter EXAMPLE Console#show management all-client Management Ip Filter HTTP-Client: Start IP address End IP address ----------------------------------------------1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19 2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30 SNMP-Client: Start IP address End IP address ----------------------------------------------1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19 2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands PPPoE Intermediate Agent PPPOE INTERMEDIATE AGENT This section describes commands used to configure the PPPoE Intermediate Agent (PPPoE IA) relay parameters required for passing authentication messages between a client and broadband remote access servers.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands PPPoE Intermediate Agent designated by the pppoe intermediate-agent trust command. The BRAS detects the presence of the subscriber’s circuit-ID tag inserted by the switch during the PPPoE discovery phase, and sends this tag as a NASport-ID attribute in PPP authentication and AAA accounting requests to a RADIUS server.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands PPPoE Intermediate Agent EXAMPLE Console(config)#pppoe intermediate-agent format-type access-node-identifier billibong Console(config)# pppoe This command enables the PPPoE IA on an interface. Use the no form to intermediate-agent disable this feature.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands PPPoE Intermediate Agent COMMAND USAGE ◆ The PPPoE server extracts the Line-ID tag from PPPoE discovery stage messages, and uses the Circuit-ID field of that tag as a NAS-Port-ID attribute in AAA access and accounting requests. ◆ The switch intercepts PPPoE discovery frames from the client and inserts a unique line identifier using the PPPoE Vendor-Specific tag (0x0105) to PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation (PADI) and Request (PADR) packets.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands PPPoE Intermediate Agent EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5 Console(config-if)#pppoe intermediate-agent trust Console(config-if)# pppoe This command enables the stripping of vendor tags from PPPoE Discovery intermediate-agent packets sent from a PPPoE server. Use the no form to disable this feature.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands PPPoE Intermediate Agent EXAMPLE Console#clear pppoe intermediate-agent statistics Console# show pppoe This command displays configuration settings for the PPPoE Intermediate intermediate-agent Agent. info SYNTAX show pppoe intermediate-agent info [interface [interface]] interface ethernet unit/port unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 23 | Authentication Commands PPPoE Intermediate Agent show pppoe This command displays statistics for the PPPoE Intermediate Agent. intermediate-agent statistics SYNTAX show pppoe intermediate-agent statistics interface [interface] interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
24 GENERAL SECURITY MEASURES This switch supports many methods of segregating traffic for clients attached to each of the data ports, and for ensuring that only authorized clients gain access to the network. Port-based authentication using IEEE 802.1X is commonly used for these purposes. In addition to these method, several other options of providing client security are described in this chapter.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Port Security PORT SECURITY These commands can be used to enable port security on a port. When MAC address learning is disabled on an interface, only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table for this port will be authorized to access the network. When using port security, the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Port Security traffic with source addresses stored in the static address table will be accepted, all other packets are dropped. Note that the dynamic addresses stored in the address table when MAC address learning is disabled are flushed from the system, and no dynamic addresses are subsequently learned until MAC address learning has been re-enabled. ◆ The mac-learning commands cannot be used if 802.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Port Security COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet) COMMAND USAGE ◆ The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is zero (that is, port security is disabled). To use port security, you must configure the maximum number of addresses allowed on a port using the port security max-mac-count command.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Port Security EXAMPLE The following example enables port security for port 5, and sets the response to a security violation to issue a trap message: Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5 Console(config-if)#port security action trap RELATED COMMANDS show interfaces status (979) shutdown (974) mac-address-table static (1052) port security Use this command to save the MAC addresses that port security has mac-address-as- learned as static entries.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Port Security COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE This example shows the port security settings and number of secure addresses for all ports.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) Port Status Intrusion Action Max MAC Count Current MAC Count MAC Filter Last Intrusion MAC Last Time Detected Intrusion MAC Console# : : : : : : : Secure/Up None 0 0 Disabled NA NA This example shows information about a detected intrusion.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) Table 88: Network Access Commands Command Function Mode network-access link-detection Configures the link detection feature to detect and link-down act upon link-down events IC network-access link-detection Configures the link detection feature to detect and link-up act upon link-up events IC network-access link-detection Configures the link detection feature to detect and link-up-down act upon both link-up and link-
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) well as to any secure MAC addresses authenticated by 802.1X, regardless of the 802.1X Operation Mode (Single-Host, Multi-Host, or MAC-Based authentication as described on page 844). ◆ The maximum number of secure MAC addresses supported for the switch system is 1024. EXAMPLE Console(config-if)#network-access aging Console(config-if)# network-access Use this command to add a MAC address into a filter table.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) mac-authentication Use this command to set the time period after which a connected MAC reauth-time address must be re-authenticated. Use the no form of this command to restore the default value. SYNTAX mac-authentication reauth-time seconds no mac-authentication reauth-time seconds - The reauthentication time period.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) attribute (attribute 11) can be configured on the RADIUS server to pass the following QoS information: Table 89: Dynamic QoS Profiles Profile Attribute Syntax Example DiffServ service-policy-in=policy-map-name service-policy-in=p1 Rate Limit rate-limit-input=rate (Kbps) rate-limit-input=100 (Kbps) rate-limit-output=rate (Kbps) rate-limit-output=200 (Kbps) 802.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ When enabled, the VLAN identifiers returned by the RADIUS server through the 802.1X authentication process will be applied to the port, providing the VLANs have already been created on the switch. GVRP is not used to create the VLANs. ◆ The VLAN settings specified by the first authenticated MAC address are implemented for a port.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) ◆ When used with 802.1X authentication, the intrusion-action must be set for “guest-vlan” to be effective (see the dot1x intrusion-action command). EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#network-access guest-vlan 25 Console(config-if)# network-access Use this command to enable link detection for the selected port. Use the link-detection no form of this command to restore the default.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#network-access link-detection link-down action trap Console(config-if)# network-access Use this command to detect link-up events. When detected, the switch can link-detection shut down the port, send an SNMP trap, or both. Use the no form of this link-up command to disable this feature.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) trap - Issue SNMP trap message only. trap-and-shutdown - Issue SNMP trap message and disable the port.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) network-access Use this command to enable network access authentication on a port. Use mode the no form of this command to disable network access authentication.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) network-access Use this command to enable the specified MAC address filter. Use the no port-mac-filter form of this command to disable the specified MAC address filter. SYNTAX network-access port-mac-filter filter-id no network-access port-mac-filter filter-id - Specifies a MAC address filter table.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) mac-authentication Use this command to set the maximum number of MAC addresses that can max-mac-count be authenticated on a port via MAC authentication. Use the no form of this command to restore the default. SYNTAX mac-authentication max-mac-count count no mac-authentication max-mac-count count - The maximum number of MAC-authenticated MAC addresses allowed.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) show Use this command to display the MAC authentication settings for port network-access interfaces. SYNTAX show network-access [interface interface] interface - Specifies a port interface. ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number. (Range: 1-28/52) DEFAULT SETTING Displays the settings for all interfaces.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) show Use this command to display secure MAC address table entries. network-access mac-address-table SYNTAX show network-access mac-address-table [static | dynamic] [address mac-address [mask]] [interface interface] [sort {address | interface}] static - Specifies static address entries. dynamic - Specifies dynamic address entries. mac-address - Specifies a MAC address entry.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Web Authentication show Use this command to display information for entries in the MAC filter network-access tables. mac-filter SYNTAX show network-access mac-filter [filter-id] filter-id - Specifies a MAC address filter table. (Range: 1-64) DEFAULT SETTING Displays all filters.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Web Authentication Table 90: Web Authentication (Continued) Command Function Mode web-auth system-authcontrol Enables web authentication globally for the switch GC web-auth Enables web authentication for an interface IC web-auth re-authenticate (Port) Ends all web authentication sessions on the port and forces the users to re-authenticate PE web-auth re-authenticate (IP) Ends the web authentication session associated with PE the designated IP address and f
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Web Authentication web-auth This command defines the amount of time a host must wait after exceeding quiet-period the limit for failed login attempts, before it may attempt web authentication again. Use the no form to restore the default. SYNTAX web-auth quiet-period time no web-auth quiet period time - The amount of time the host must wait before attempting authentication again.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Web Authentication web-auth This command globally enables web authentication for the switch. Use the system-auth-control no form to restore the default. SYNTAX [no] web-auth system-auth-control DEFAULT SETTING Disabled COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE Both web-auth system-auth-control for the switch and web-auth for an interface must be enabled for the web authentication feature to be active.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Web Authentication web-auth This command ends all web authentication sessions connected to the port re-authenticate (Port) and forces the users to re-authenticate. SYNTAX web-auth re-authenticate interface interface interface - Specifies a port interface. ethernet unit/port unit - This is unit 1. port - Port number.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Web Authentication show web-auth This command displays global web authentication parameters. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show web-auth Global Web-Auth Parameters System Auth Control Session Timeout Quiet Period Max Login Attempts Console# : : : : Enabled 3600 60 3 show web-auth This command displays interface-specific web authentication parameters interface and statistics.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv4 Snooping show web-auth This command displays a summary of web authentication port parameters summary and statistics. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show web-auth summary Global Web-Auth Parameters System Auth Control : Enabled Port Status Authenticated Host Count -------------------------------1/ 1 Disabled 0 1/ 2 Enabled 8 1/ 3 Disabled 0 1/ 4 Disabled 0 1/ 5 Disabled 0 . . .
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv4 Snooping Table 91: DHCP Snooping Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode ip dhcp snooping database flash Writes all dynamically learned snooping entries to flash memory PE show ip dhcp snooping Shows the DHCP snooping configuration settings PE show ip dhcp snooping binding Shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries PE ip dhcp snooping This command enables DHCP snooping globally. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv4 Snooping ■ If DHCP snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received, but the port is not trusted, it is processed as follows: ■ If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server (including OFFER, ACK or NAK messages), the packet is dropped.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv4 Snooping ip dhcp snooping This command enables the use of DHCP Option 82 information for the information option switch, and specifies the frame format to use for the remote-id when Option 82 information is generated by the switch.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv4 Snooping ◆ When the DHCP Snooping Information Option is enabled, clients can be identified by the switch port to which they are connected rather than just their MAC address. DHCP client-server exchange messages are then forwarded directly between the server and client without having to flood them to the entire VLAN. ◆ DHCP snooping must be enabled for the DHCP Option 82 information to be inserted into packets.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv4 Snooping COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE When the switch receives DHCP packets from clients that already include DHCP Option 82 information, the switch can be configured to set the action policy for these packets. The switch can either drop the DHCP packets, keep the existing information, or replace it with the switch’s relay information.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv4 Snooping COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE If MAC address verification is enabled, and the source MAC address in the Ethernet header of the packet is not same as the client’s hardware address in the DHCP packet, the packet is dropped. EXAMPLE This example enables MAC address verification.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv4 Snooping EXAMPLE This example enables DHCP snooping for VLAN 1. Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping vlan 1 Console(config)# RELATED COMMANDS ip dhcp snooping (892) ip dhcp snooping trust (899) ip dhcp snooping This command enables the use of DHCP Option 82 information circuit-id information option suboption. Use the no form to disable this feature.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv4 Snooping ■ access node identifier - ASCII string. Default is the MAC address of the switch’s CPU. This field is set by the ip dhcp snooping information option command, ■ eth - The second field is the fixed string “eth” ■ slot - The slot represents the stack unit for this system. ■ port - The port which received the DHCP request. If the packet arrives over a trunk, the value is the ifIndex of the trunk.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv4 Snooping ports within the VLAN according to the default status, or as specifically configured for an interface with the no ip dhcp snooping trust command. ◆ When an untrusted port is changed to a trusted port, all the dynamic DHCP snooping bindings associated with this port are removed. ◆ Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client – The port(s) through which it submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv4 Snooping EXAMPLE Console(config)#clear ip dhcp snooping database flash Console(config)# ip dhcp snooping This command writes all dynamically learned snooping entries to flash database flash memory. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE This command can be used to store the currently learned dynamic DHCP snooping entries to flash memory. These entries will be restored to the snooping table when the switch is reset.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv6 Snooping show ip dhcp This command shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries. snooping binding COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show ip dhcp snooping binding MAC Address IP Address Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface ----------------- --------------- ---------- -------------------- ---- -----11-22-33-44-55-66 192.168.0.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv6 Snooping ipv6 dhcp snooping This command enables DHCPv6 snooping globally. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX [no] ipv6 dhcp snooping DEFAULT SETTING Disabled COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCPv6 messages are received from an outside source. DHCPv6 snooping is used to filter DHCPv6 messages received on an unsecure interface from outside the network or fire wall.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv6 Snooping ■ Solicit: Add new entry in binding cache, recording client’s DUID, IA type, IA ID (2 message exchanges to get IPv6 address with rapid commit option, otherwise 4 message exchanges), and forward to trusted port. ■ Decline: If no matching entry is found in binding cache, drop this packet. ■ Renew, Rebind, Release, Confirm: If no matching entry is found in binding cache, drop this packet.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv6 Snooping EXAMPLE This example enables DHCPv6 snooping globally for the switch. Console(config)#ipv6 dhcp snooping Console(config)# RELATED COMMANDS ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan (907) ipv6 dhcp snooping trust (908) ipv6 dhcp snooping This command enables the insertion of remote-id option 37 information option remote-id into DHCPv6 client messages.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv6 Snooping either drop, keep or remove option 37 information in incoming DCHPv6 packets. Packets are processed as follows: ◆ ■ If an incoming packet is a DHCPv6 request packet with option 37 information, it will modify the option 37 information according to settings specified with ipv6 dhcp snooping option remote-id policy command.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv6 Snooping COMMAND USAGE When the switch receives DHCPv6 packets from clients that already include DHCP Option 37 information, the switch can be configured to set the action policy for these packets. The switch can either drop the DHCPv6 packets, keep the existing information, or replace it with the switch’s relay agent information.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv6 Snooping EXAMPLE This example enables DHCP6 snooping for VLAN 1. Console(config)#ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan 1 Console(config)# RELATED COMMANDS ipv6 dhcp snooping (903) ipv6 dhcp snooping trust (908) ipv6 dhcp snooping This command sets the maximum number of entries which can be stored in max-binding the binding database for an interface. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv6 Snooping COMMAND USAGE ◆ A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network. An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or fire wall. ◆ Set all ports connected to DHCv6 servers within the local network or fire wall to trusted, and all other ports outside the local network or fire wall to untrusted.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv6 Snooping COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console(config)#clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding 00-12-cf-01-02-03 2001::1 Console(config)# clear ipv6 dhcp This command removes all dynamically learned snooping entries from flash snooping database memory. flash COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console(config)#clear ipv6 dhcp snooping database flash Console(config)# show ipv6 dhcp This command shows the DHCPv6 snooping configuration settings.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures DHCPv6 Snooping show ipv6 dhcp This command shows the DHCPv6 snooping binding table entries.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures IPv4 Source Guard IPV4 SOURCE GUARD IP Source Guard is a security feature that filters IPv4 traffic on network interfaces based on manually configured entries in the IPv4 Source Guard table, or dynamic entries in the DHCPv4 Snooping table when enabled (see "DHCPv4 Snooping" on page 891). IPv4 source guard can be used to prevent traffic attacks caused when a host tries to use the IPv4 address of a neighbor to access the network.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures IPv4 Source Guard DEFAULT SETTING No configured entries COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ If the binding mode is not specified in this command, the entry is bound to the ACL table by default. ◆ Table entries include a MAC address, IP address, lease time, entry type (Static-IP-SG-Binding, Dynamic-DHCP-Binding), VLAN identifier, and port identifier.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures IPv4 Source Guard ip source-guard This command configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based on source IP address, or source IP address and corresponding MAC address. Use the no form to disable this function. SYNTAX ip source-guard {sip | sip-mac} no ip source-guard sip - Filters traffic based on IP addresses stored in the binding table. sip-mac - Filters traffic based on IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses stored in the binding table.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures IPv4 Source Guard ◆ Filtering rules are implemented as follows: ■ If DHCPv4 snooping is disabled (see page 892), IP source guard will check the VLAN ID, source IP address, port number, and source MAC address (for the sip-mac option). If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type is static IP source guard binding, the packet will be forwarded.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures IPv4 Source Guard COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet) COMMAND USAGE ◆ This command sets the maximum number of address entries that can be mapped to an interface in the binding table, including both dynamic entries discovered by DHCP snooping and static entries set by the ip source-guard command. EXAMPLE This example sets the maximum number of allowed entries in the binding table for port 5 to one entry.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures IPv4 Source Guard clear ip This command remove all blocked records. source-guard binding blocked SYNTAX clear ip source-guard binding blocked COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE When IP Source-Guard detects an invalid packet it creates a blocked record. These records can be viewed using the show ip source-guard binding blocked command. A maximum of 512 blocked records can be stored before the switch overwrites the oldest record with new blocked records.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures IPv4 Source Guard show ip This command shows the source guard binding table. source-guard binding SYNTAX show ip source-guard binding [dhcp-snooping | static [acl | mac] | blocked [vlan vlan-id | interface interface] dhcp-snooping - Shows dynamic entries configured with DHCP Snooping commands (see page 891) static - Shows static entries configured with the ip source-guard binding command (see page 912). acl - Shows static entries in the ACL binding table.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures IPv6 Source Guard IPV6 SOURCE GUARD IPv6 Source Guard is a security feature that filters IPv6 traffic on nonrouted, Layer 2 network interfaces based on manually configured entries in the IPv6 Source Guard table, or dynamic entries in the Neighbor Discovery Snooping table or DHCPv6 Snooping table when either snooping protocol is enabled (see "DHCPv6 Snooping" on page 902).
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures IPv6 Source Guard COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ Table entries include an associated MAC address, IPv6 global unicast address, entry type (Static-IPv6-SG-Binding, Dynamic-ND-Snooping, Dynamic-DHCPv6-Snooping), VLAN identifier, and port identifier. ◆ Traffic filtering is based only on the source IPv6 address, VLAN ID, and port number.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures IPv6 Source Guard ipv6 source-guard This command configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based on the source IP address stored in the binding table. Use the no form to disable this function.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures IPv6 Source Guard entry type is static IPv6 source guard binding, the packet will be forwarded. ■ If ND snooping or DHCPv6 snooping is enabled, IPv6 source guard will check the VLAN ID, source IP address, and port number. If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type is static IPv6 source guard binding, dynamic ND snooping binding, or dynamic DHCPv6 snooping binding, the packet will be forwarded.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures IPv6 Source Guard ◆ IPv6 source guard maximum bindings must be set to a value higher than DHCPv6 snooping maximum bindings and ND snooping maximum bindings. ◆ If IPv6 source guard, ND snooping, and DHCPv6 snooping are enabled on a port, the dynamic bindings used by ND snooping, DHCPv6 snooping, and IPv6 source guard static bindings cannot exceed the maximum allowed bindings set by the ipv6 source-guard maxbinding command.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures ARP Inspection show ipv6 This command shows the IPv6 source guard binding table. source-guard binding SYNTAX show ipv6 source-guard binding [dynamic | static] dynamic - Shows dynamic entries configured with ND Snooping or DHCPv6 Snooping commands (see page 902) static - Shows static entries configured with the ipv6 source-guard binding command.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures ARP Inspection Table 96: ARP Inspection Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode ip arp inspection limit Sets a rate limit for the ARP packets received on a port IC ip arp inspection trust Sets a port as trusted, and thus exempted from ARP Inspection IC show ip arp inspection configuration Displays the global configuration settings for ARP Inspection PE show ip arp inspection interface Shows the trust status and inspection rate limit for ports PE show
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures ARP Inspection ◆ When ARP Inspection is disabled globally, it is still possible to configure ARP Inspection for individual VLANs. These configuration changes will only become active after ARP Inspection is globally enabled again. EXAMPLE Console(config)#ip arp inspection Console(config)# ip arp inspection This command specifies an ARP ACL to apply to one or more VLANs. Use filter the no form to remove an ACL binding.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures ARP Inspection EXAMPLE Console(config)#ip arp inspection filter sales vlan 1 Console(config)# ip arp inspection This command sets the maximum number of entries saved in a log log-buffer logs message, and the rate at which these messages are sent. Use the no form to restore the default settings.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures ARP Inspection EXAMPLE Console(config)#ip arp inspection log-buffer logs 1 interval 10 Console(config)# ip arp inspection This command specifies additional validation of address components in an validate ARP packet. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures ARP Inspection ip arp inspection This command enables ARP Inspection for a specified VLAN or range of vlan VLANs. Use the no form to disable this function. SYNTAX [no] ip arp inspection vlan {vlan-id | vlan-range} vlan-id - VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094) vlan-range - A consecutive range of VLANs indicated by the use a hyphen, or a random group of VLANs with each entry separated by a comma.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures ARP Inspection ip arp inspection This command sets a rate limit for the ARP packets received on a port. Use limit the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX ip arp inspection limit {rate pps | none} no ip arp inspection limit pps - The maximum number of ARP packets that can be processed by the CPU per second.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures ARP Inspection EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#ip arp inspection trust Console(config-if)# show ip arp This command displays the global configuration settings for ARP inspection Inspection.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures ARP Inspection show ip arp This command shows information about entries stored in the log, including inspection log the associated VLAN, port, and address components. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show ip arp inspection log Total log entries number is 1 Num VLAN Port Src IP Address --- ---- ---- -------------1 1 11 192.168.2.2 Console# Dst IP Address -------------192.168.2.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Denial of Service Protection EXAMPLE Console#show ip arp inspection vlan 1 VLAN ID -------1 Console# DAI Status --------------disabled ACL Name -------------------sales ACL Status -------------------static DENIAL OF SERVICE PROTECTION A denial-of-service attack (DoS attack) is an attempt to block the services provided by a computer or network resource. This kind of attack tries to prevent an Internet site or service from functioning efficiently or at all.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Denial of Service Protection DEFAULT SETTING Disabled, 1000 kbits/second COMMAND MODE Global Configuration EXAMPLE Console(config)#dos-protection echo-chargen 65 Console(config)# dos-protection This command protects against DoS smurf attacks in which a perpetrator smurf generates a large amount of spoofed ICMP Echo Request traffic to the broadcast destination IP address (255.255.255.255), all of which uses a spoofed source address of the intended victim.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Denial of Service Protection COMMAND MODE Global Configuration EXAMPLE Console(config)#dos-protection tcp-flooding 65 Console(config)# dos-protection This command protects against DoS TCP-null-scan attacks in which a TCP tcp-null-scan NULL scan message is used to identify listening TCP ports. The scan uses a series of strangely configured TCP packets which contain a sequence number of 0 and no flags.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Denial of Service Protection EXAMPLE Console(config)#dos-protection syn-fin-scan Console(config)# dos-protection This command protects against DoS TCP-xmas-scan in which a so-called tcp-xmas-scan TCP XMAS scan message is used to identify listening TCP ports. This scan uses a series of strangely configured TCP packets which contain a sequence number of 0 and the URG, PSH and FIN flags. If the target's TCP port is closed, the target replies with a TCP RST packet.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Denial of Service Protection EXAMPLE Console(config)#dos-protection udp-flooding 65 Console(config)# dos-protection This command protects against DoS WinNuke attacks in which affected the win-nuke Microsoft Windows 3.1x/95/NT operating systems. In this type of attack, the perpetrator sends the string of OOB out-of-band (OOB) packets contained a TCP URG flag to the target computer on TCP port 139 (NetBIOS), casing it to lock up and display a “Blue Screen of Death.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Port-based Traffic Segmentation WinNuke Attack Console# : Disabled, 1000 kilobits per second PORT-BASED TRAFFIC SEGMENTATION If tighter security is required for passing traffic from different clients through downlink ports on the local network and over uplink ports to the service provider, port-based traffic segmentation can be used to isolate traffic for individual clients. Traffic belonging to each client is isolated to the allocated downlink ports.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Port-based Traffic Segmentation ◆ Traffic segmentation and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch. Traffic may pass freely between uplink ports in segmented groups and ports in normal VLANs. ◆ When traffic segmentation is enabled, the forwarding state for the uplink and downlink ports assigned to different client sessions is shown below.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Port-based Traffic Segmentation DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Global Configuration Command Usage ◆ Use this command to create a new traffic-segmentation client session. ◆ Using the no form of this command will remove any assigned uplink or downlink ports, restoring these interfaces to normal operating mode.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Port-based Traffic Segmentation ◆ When specifying an uplink or downlink, a list of ports may be entered by using a hyphen or comma in the port field. Note that lists are not supported for the channel-id field. ◆ A downlink port can only communicate with an uplink port in the same session. Therefore, if an uplink port is not configured for a session, the assigned downlink ports will not be able to communicate with any other ports.
CHAPTER 24 | General Security Measures Port-based Traffic Segmentation show This command displays the configured traffic segments.
25 ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IPv4 frames (based on address, protocol, Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code), IPv6 frames (based on address, DSCP traffic class, or next header type), or any frames (based on MAC address or Ethernet type). To filter packets, first create an access list, add the required rules, and then bind the list to a specific port. This section describes the Access Control List commands.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists IPv4 ACLs access-list ip This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or extended IPv4 ACLs. Use the no form to remove the specified ACL. SYNTAX [no] access-list ip {standard | extended} acl-name standard – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP address. extended – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or destination IP address, and other more specific criteria. acl-name – Name of the ACL.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists IPv4 ACLs permit, deny This command adds a rule to a Standard IPv4 ACL. The rule sets a filter (Standard IP ACL) condition for packets emanating from the specified source. Use the no form to remove a rule. SYNTAX {permit | deny} {any | source bitmask | host source} [time-range time-range-name] no {permit | deny} {any | source bitmask | host source} any – Any source IP address. source – Source IP address.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists IPv4 ACLs permit, deny This command adds a rule to an Extended IPv4 ACL. The rule sets a filter (Extended IPv4 ACL) condition for packets with specific source or destination IP addresses, protocol types, source or destination protocol ports, or TCP control codes. Use the no form to remove a rule.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists IPv4 ACLs control-flags – Decimal number (representing a bit string) that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header. (Range: 0-63) flag-bitmask – Decimal number representing the code bits to match. time-range-name - Name of the time range. (Range: 1-16 characters) DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Extended IPv4 ACL COMMAND USAGE ◆ All new rules are appended to the end of the list.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists IPv4 ACLs EXAMPLE This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet 10.7.1.x. For example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0 & 255.255.255.0) equals the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0), the packet passes through. Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any Console(config-ext-acl)# This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists IPv4 ACLs COMMAND USAGE ◆ Only one ACL can be bound to a port. ◆ If an ACL is already bound to a port and you bind a different ACL to it, the switch will replace the old binding with the new one. EXAMPLE Console(config)#int eth 1/2 Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in Console(config-if)# RELATED COMMANDS show ip access-list (949) Time Range (762) show ip This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists IPv6 ACLs EXAMPLE Console#show ip access-list standard IP standard access-list david: permit host 10.1.1.21 permit 168.92.0.0 255.255.15.0 Console# RELATED COMMANDS permit, deny (945) ip access-group (948) IPV6 ACLS The commands in this section configure ACLs based on IPv6 addresses, DSCP traffic class, or next header type.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists IPv6 ACLs COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL, use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list. To create an ACL, you must add at least one rule to the list. ◆ To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule. ◆ An ACL can contain up to 64 rules.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists IPv6 ACLs DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Standard IPv6 ACL COMMAND USAGE New rules are appended to the end of the list. EXAMPLE This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 2009:DB9:2229::79 and another rule for the addresses with the network prefix 2009:DB9:2229:5::/64.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists IPv6 ACLs to indicate the appropriate number of zeros required to fill the undefined fields. prefix-length - A decimal value indicating how many contiguous bits (from the left) of the address comprise the prefix; i.e., the network portion of the address. (Range: 0-128 for source prefix, 0-8 for destination prefix) dscp – DSCP traffic class. (Range: 0-63) next-header – Identifies the type of header immediately following the IPv6 header.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists IPv6 ACLs This allows any packets sent to the destination 2009:DB9:2229::79/48 when the next header is 43.” Console(config-ext-ipv6-acl)#permit 2009:DB9:2229::79/48 next-header 43 Console(config-ext-ipv6-acl)# RELATED COMMANDS access-list ipv6 (950) Time Range (762) ipv6 access-group This command binds a port to an IPv6 ACL. Use the no form to remove the port.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists IPv6 ACLs show ipv6 This command shows the ports assigned to IPv6 ACLs. access-group COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show ipv6 access-group Interface ethernet 1/2 IPv6 standard access-list david in Console# RELATED COMMANDS ipv6 access-group (954) show ipv6 This command displays the rules for configured IPv6 ACLs. access-list SYNTAX show ipv6 access-list {standard | extended} [acl-name] standard – Specifies a standard IPv6 ACL.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists MAC ACLs MAC ACLS The commands in this section configure ACLs based on hardware addresses, packet format, and Ethernet type. The ACLs can further specify optional IP and IPv6 addresses including protocol type and upper layer ports. To configure MAC ACLs, first create an access list containing the required permit or deny rules, and then bind the access list to one or more ports.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists MAC ACLs EXAMPLE Console(config)#access-list mac jerry Console(config-mac-acl)# RELATED COMMANDS permit, deny (957) mac access-group (960) show mac access-list (961) permit, deny This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL. The rule filters packets matching (MAC ACL) a specified MAC source or destination address (i.e., physical layer address), or Ethernet protocol type. Use the no form to remove a rule.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists MAC ACLs {permit | deny} tagged-eth2 {any | host source | source address-bitmask} {any | host destination | destination address-bitmask} [vid vid vid-bitmask] [ethertype ethertype [ethertype-bitmask]] {{ip {any | host source-ip | source-ip network-mask} {any | host destination-ip | destination-ip network-mask} {ipv6 {any | host source-ipv6 | source-ipv6/prefix-length} {any | host destination-ipv6 | destination-ipv6/prefix-length}} [protocol protocol] [l4-source-port sport
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists MAC ACLs no {permit | deny} tagged-802.3 {any | host source | source address-bitmask} {any | host destination | destination address-bitmask} [vid vid vid-bitmask] {permit | deny} untagged-802.3 {any | host source | source address-bitmask} {any | host destination | destination address-bitmask} [time-range time-range-name] no {permit | deny} untagged-802.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists MAC ACLs DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE MAC ACL COMMAND USAGE ◆ New rules are added to the end of the list. ◆ The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets. ◆ A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists MAC ACLs COMMAND USAGE ◆ Only one ACL can be bound to a port. ◆ If an ACL is already bound to a port and you bind a different ACL to it, the switch will replace the old binding with the new one. EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2 Console(config-if)#mac access-group jerry in Console(config-if)# RELATED COMMANDS show mac access-list (961) Time Range (762) show mac This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists ARP ACLs RELATED COMMANDS permit, deny (957) mac access-group (960) ARP ACLS The commands in this section configure ACLs based on the IP or MAC address contained in ARP request and reply messages. To configure ARP ACLs, first create an access list containing the required permit or deny rules, and then bind the access list to one or more VLANs using the ip arp inspection vlan command (page 929).
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists ARP ACLs RELATED COMMANDS permit, deny (963) show access-list arp (964) permit, deny This command adds a rule to an ARP ACL. The rule filters packets matching (ARP ACL) a specified source or destination address in ARP messages. Use the no form to remove a rule. SYNTAX [no] {permit | deny} ip {any | host source-ip | source-ip ip-address-bitmask} mac {any | host source-mac | source-mac mac-address-bitmask} [log] This form indicates either request or response packets.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists ARP ACLs EXAMPLE This rule permits packets from any source IP and MAC address to the destination subnet address 192.168.0.0. Console(config-arp-acl)#$permit response ip any 192.168.0.0 255.255.0.0 mac any any Console(config-mac-acl)# RELATED COMMANDS access-list arp (962) show access-list arp This command displays the rules for configured ARP ACLs. SYNTAX show access-list arp [acl-name] acl-name – Name of the ACL.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists ACL Information ACL INFORMATION This section describes commands used to display ACL information. Table 105: ACL Information Commands Command Function Mode clear access-list hardware counters Clears hit counter for rules in all ACLs, or in a specified ACL.
CHAPTER 25 | Access Control Lists ACL Information MAC access-list jerry Console# show access-list This command shows all ACLs and associated rules. SYNTAX show access-list [[arp [acl-name]] | [ip [extended [acl-name] | standard [acl-name]] | [ipv6 [extended [acl-name] | standard [acl-name]] | [mac [acl-name]] | [tcam-utilization] | [hardware counters]] arp – Shows ingress or egress rules for ARP ACLs. hardware counters – Shows statistics for all ACLs.
26 INTERFACE COMMANDS These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an Ethernet port, aggregated link, or VLAN; or perform cable diagnostics on the specified interface.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Interface Configuration Table 106: Interface Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode transceiver-threshold temperature Sets thresholds for the transceiver temperature which can be used to trigger an alarm or warning message IC transceiver-threshold tx-power Sets thresholds for the transceiver power level of the transmitted signal which can be used to trigger an alarm or warning message IC transceiver-threshold voltage Sets thresholds for the transceiver voltage
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Interface Configuration EXAMPLE To specify port 4, enter the following command: Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4 Console(config-if)# alias This command configures an alias name for the interface. Use the no form to remove the alias name. SYNTAX alias string no alias string - A mnemonic name to help you remember what is attached to this interface.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Interface Configuration 10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation 10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation flowcontrol - Supports flow control DEFAULT SETTING 100BASE-FX: 100full (SFP) 100BASE-TX: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full 1000BASE-T: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full 1000BASE-SX/LX/LH (SFP): 1000full COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE ◆ The 1000BASE-T standard does not support forced mode.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Interface Configuration DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE The description is displayed by the show interfaces status command and in the running-configuration file. An example of the value which a network manager might store in this object is the name of the manufacturer, and the product name. EXAMPLE The following example adds a description to port 4.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Interface Configuration flowcontrol This command enables flow control. Use the no form to disable flow control. SYNTAX [no] flowcontrol DEFAULT SETTING Disabled COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE ◆ 1000BASE-T does not support forced mode. Auto-negotiation should always be used to establish a connection over any 1000BASE-T port or trunk.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Interface Configuration media-type This command forces the port type selected for combination ports. Use the no form to restore the default mode. SYNTAX media-type mode no media-type mode copper-forced - Always uses the built-in RJ-45 port. sfp-forced - Always uses the SFP port (even if module not installed). sfp-preferred-auto - Uses SFP port if both combination types are functioning and the SFP port has a valid link.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Interface Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ 1000BASE-T does not support forced mode. Auto-negotiation should always be used to establish a connection over any 1000BASE-T port or trunk. ◆ When auto-negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command. When autonegotiation is disabled, you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed-duplex and flowcontrol commands.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Interface Configuration speed-duplex This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when auto-negotiation is disabled. Use the no form to restore the default.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Interface Configuration RELATED COMMANDS negotiation (973) capabilities (969) clear counters This command clears statistics on an interface. SYNTAX clear counters interface interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number. (Range: 1-28/52) port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-16) DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE Statistics are only initialized for a power reset.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Interface Configuration show discard This command displays whether or not CDP and PVST packets are being discarded. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE In this example, “Default” means that the packets are not discarded. Console#show discard Port CDP PVST -------- ------- ------Eth 1/ 1 Default Default Eth 1/ 2 Default Default Eth 1/ 3 Default Default Eth 1/ 4 Default Default Eth 1/ 5 Default Default Eth 1/ 6 Default Default . . .
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Interface Configuration show interfaces This command displays interface statistics. counters SYNTAX show interfaces counters [interface] interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number. (Range: 1-28/52) port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-16) DEFAULT SETTING Shows the counters for all interfaces. COMMAND MODE Normal Exec, Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Interface Configuration 0 Pause Frames Input 0 Pause Frames Output ===== RMON Stats ===== 0 Drop Events 16900558 Octets 40243 Packets 170 Broadcast PKTS 23 Multi-cast PKTS 0 Undersize PKTS 0 Oversize PKTS 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC Align Errors 0 Collisions 21065 Packet Size <= 64 Octets 3805 Packet Size 65 to 127 Octets 2448 Packet Size 128 to 255 Octets 797 Packet Size 256 to 511 Octets 2941 Packet Size 512 to 1023 Octets 9187 Packet Size 1024 to 1518 Octets ===== Port Ut
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Interface Configuration EXAMPLE Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/1 Information of Eth 1/1 Basic Information: Port Type : 100BASE-TX MAC Address : 00-E0-0C-00-00-FE Configuration: Name : Port Admin : Up Speed-duplex : Auto Capabilities : 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full Broadcast Storm : Enabled Broadcast Storm Limit : 64 kbits/second Multicast Storm : Disabled Multicast Storm Limit : 64 kbits/second Unknown Unicast Storm : Disabled Unknown Unicast Storm Limit : 64 k
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Interface Configuration EXAMPLE This example shows the configuration setting for port 1.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Transceiver Threshold Configuration Table 107: show interfaces switchport - display description (Continued) Field Description 802.1Q-tunnel Mode Shows the tunnel mode as Normal, 802.1Q Tunnel or 802.1Q Tunnel Uplink (page 1134). 802.1Q-tunnel TPID Shows the Tag Protocol Identifier used for learning and switching packets (page 1137). Layer 2 Protocol Tunnel Shows if L2 Protocol Tunnel is enabled for spanning tree protocol (page 1141).
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Transceiver Threshold Configuration EXAMPLE Console(config)interface ethernet 1/25 Console(config-if)#transceiver-threshold-auto Console# transceiver- This command sets thresholds for transceiver current which can be used to threshold current trigger an alarm or warning message. SYNTAX transceiver-threshold current {high-alarm | high-warning | low-alarm | low-warning} threshold-value high-alarm – Sets the high current threshold for an alarm message.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Transceiver Threshold Configuration level were to fluctuate just above and below either the high threshold or the low threshold. ◆ Trap messages enabled by the transceiver-monitor command are sent to any management station configured by the snmp-server host command. EXAMPLE The following example sets alarm thresholds for the transceiver current at port 1.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Transceiver Threshold Configuration ◆ Trap messages enabled by the transceiver-monitor command are sent to any management station configured by the snmp-server host command. EXAMPLE The following example sets alarm thresholds for the signal power received at port 1.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Transceiver Threshold Configuration EXAMPLE The following example sets alarm thresholds for the transceiver temperature at port 1.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Transceiver Threshold Configuration EXAMPLE The following example sets alarm thresholds for the signal power transmitted at port 1. Console(config)interface ethernet 1/25 Console(config-if)#transceiver-threshold tx-power low-alarm 8 Console(config-if)#transceiver-threshold tx-power high-alarm -3 Console# transceiver- This command sets thresholds for the transceiver voltage which can be threshold voltage used to trigger an alarm or warning message.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Transceiver Threshold Configuration EXAMPLE The following example sets alarm thresholds for the transceiver voltage at port 1.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Transceiver Threshold Configuration DDM Info Temperature Vcc Bias Current TX Power RX Power Console# : : : : : 35.64 degree C 3.25 V 12.13 mA 2.36 dBm -24.20 dBm show interfaces This command Displays the alarm/warning thresholds for temperature, transceiver- voltage, bias current, transmit power, and receive power. SYNTAX threshold SYNTAX show interfaces transceiver-threshold [interface] interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Cable Diagnostics Cable Diagnostics test cable- This command performs cable diagnostics on the specified port to diagnose diagnostics any cable faults (short, open, etc.) and report the cable length. SYNTAX test cable-diagnostics interface interface interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Cable Diagnostics EXAMPLE Console#test cable-diagnostics interface ethernet 1/24 Console#show cable-diagnostics interface ethernet 1/24 Port Type Link Status Pair A (meters) Pair B (meters) Last Update -------- ---- ----------- ---------------- ---------------- ----------------Eth 1/25 GE Up OK (21) OK (21) 2009-11-13 09:44:19 Console# show cable- This command shows the results of a cable diagnostics test.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Power Savings Power Savings power-save This command enables power savings mode on the specified port. SYNTAX [no] power-save COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet) COMMAND USAGE ◆ IEEE 802.3 defines the Ethernet standard and subsequent power requirements based on cable connections operating at 100 meters.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Power Savings NOTE: Power savings can only be implemented on Gigabit Ethernet ports using twisted-pair cabling. Power-savings mode on a active link only works when connection speed is 1 Gbps, and line length is less than 60 meters. EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/28 Console(config-if)#power-save Console(config-if)# show power-save This command shows the configuration settings for power savings.
CHAPTER 26 | Interface Commands Power Savings – 994 –
27 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link (i.e., trunk) to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery. Or you can use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) to automatically negotiate a trunk link between this switch and another network device. For static trunks, the switches have to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard. For dynamic trunks, the switches have to comply with LACP. This switch supports up to 16 trunks.
CHAPTER 27 | Link Aggregation Commands Manual Configuration Commands ◆ All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner, including communication mode (i.e., speed and duplex mode), VLAN assignments, and CoS settings. ◆ Any of the Gigabit ports on the front panel can be trunked together, including ports of different media types. ◆ All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port-channel.
CHAPTER 27 | Link Aggregation Commands Manual Configuration Commands DEFAULT SETTING src-dst-mac COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ This command applies to all static and dynamic trunks on the switch.
CHAPTER 27 | Link Aggregation Commands Dynamic Configuration Commands channel-group This command adds a port to a trunk. Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk. SYNTAX channel-group channel-id no channel-group channel-id - Trunk index (Range: 1-16) DEFAULT SETTING The current port will be added to this trunk. COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet) COMMAND USAGE ◆ When configuring static trunks, the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard.
CHAPTER 27 | Link Aggregation Commands Dynamic Configuration Commands ◆ A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available port-channel ID. ◆ If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports, the trunk will be activated automatically. ◆ If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled, the additional ports will be placed in standby mode, and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails.
CHAPTER 27 | Link Aggregation Commands Dynamic Configuration Commands lacp admin-key This command configures a port's LACP administration key. Use the no (Ethernet Interface) form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX lacp {actor | partner} admin-key key no lacp {actor | partner} admin-key actor - The local side an aggregate link. partner - The remote side of an aggregate link. key - The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same link aggregation group (LAG).
CHAPTER 27 | Link Aggregation Commands Dynamic Configuration Commands lacp port-priority This command configures LACP port priority. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX lacp {actor | partner} port-priority priority no lacp {actor | partner} port-priority actor - The local side an aggregate link. partner - The remote side of an aggregate link. priority - LACP port priority is used to select a backup link.
CHAPTER 27 | Link Aggregation Commands Dynamic Configuration Commands lacp system-priority This command configures a port's LACP system priority. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX lacp {actor | partner} system-priority priority no lacp {actor | partner} system-priority actor - The local side an aggregate link. partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.
CHAPTER 27 | Link Aggregation Commands Dynamic Configuration Commands DEFAULT SETTING 0 COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE ◆ Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if (1) the LACP system priority matches, (2) the LACP port admin key matches, and (3) the LACP port channel key matches (if configured). ◆ If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not set when a channel group is formed (i.e.
CHAPTER 27 | Link Aggregation Commands Trunk Status Display Commands ◆ If the actor does not receive an LACPDU from its partner before the configured timeout expires, the partner port information will be deleted from the LACP group. ◆ When a dynamic port-channel member leaves a port-channel, the default timeout value will be restored on that port. ◆ When a dynamic port-channel is torn down, the configured timeout value will be retained.
CHAPTER 27 | Link Aggregation Commands Trunk Status Display Commands LACPDUs Unknown Pkts : 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts : 0 . . . Table 109: show lacp counters - display description Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group. LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group. Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group. Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group.
CHAPTER 27 | Link Aggregation Commands Trunk Status Display Commands Table 110: show lacp internal - display description (Continued) Field Description Admin State, Oper State ◆ Expired – The actor’s receive machine is in the expired state; ◆ Defaulted – The actor’s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information, administratively configured for the partner. ◆ Distributing – If false, distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled; i.e.
CHAPTER 27 | Link Aggregation Commands Trunk Status Display Commands Table 111: show lacp neighbors - display description (Continued) Field Description Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner. Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner. Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner. Admin State Administrative values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.
CHAPTER 27 | Link Aggregation Commands Trunk Status Display Commands – 1008 –
28 PORT MIRRORING COMMANDS Data can be mirrored from a local port on the same switch or from a remote port on another switch for analysis at the target port using software monitoring tools or a hardware probe. This switch supports the following mirroring modes.
CHAPTER 28 | Port Mirroring Commands Local Port Mirroring Commands vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094) mac-address - MAC address in the form of xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx or xxxxxxxxxxxx. acl-name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters, no spaces or other special characters) DEFAULT SETTING ◆ No mirror session is defined. ◆ When enabled for an interface, default mirroring is for both received and transmitted packets.
CHAPTER 28 | Port Mirroring Commands Local Port Mirroring Commands ◆ ACL-based mirroring is only used for ingress traffic. To mirror an ACL, follow these steps: 1. Use the access-list command (page 943) to add an ACL. 2. Use the access-group command to add a mirrored port to access control list. 3. Use the port monitor access-list command to specify the destination port to which traffic matching the ACL will be mirrored.
CHAPTER 28 | Port Mirroring Commands RSPAN Mirroring Commands COMMAND USAGE This command displays the currently configured source port, destination port, and mirror mode (i.e., RX, TX, RX/TX).
CHAPTER 28 | Port Mirroring Commands RSPAN Mirroring Commands 4. Use the rspan remote vlan command to specify the VLAN to be used for an RSPAN session, to specify the switch’s role as a source, intermediate relay, or destination of the mirrored traffic, and to configure the uplink ports designated to carry this traffic.
CHAPTER 28 | Port Mirroring Commands RSPAN Mirroring Commands rspan source Use this command to specify the source port and traffic type to be mirrored remotely. Use the no form to disable RSPAN on the specified port, or with a traffic type keyword to disable mirroring for the specified type. SYNTAX [no] rspan session session-id source interface interface-list [rx | tx | both] session-id – A number identifying this RSPAN session.
CHAPTER 28 | Port Mirroring Commands RSPAN Mirroring Commands rspan destination Use this command to specify the destination port to monitor the mirrored traffic. Use the no form to disable RSPAN on the specified port. SYNTAX rspan session session-id destination interface interface [tagged | untagged] no rspan session session-id destination interface interface session-id – A number identifying this RSPAN session. (Range: 1) Only one mirror session is allowed, including both local and remote mirroring.
CHAPTER 28 | Port Mirroring Commands RSPAN Mirroring Commands rspan remote vlan Use this command to specify the RSPAN VLAN, switch role (source, intermediate or destination), and the uplink ports. Use the no form to disable the RSPAN on the specified VLAN. SYNTAX [no] rspan session session-id remote vlan vlan-id {source | intermediate | destination} uplink interface session-id – A number identifying this RSPAN session.
CHAPTER 28 | Port Mirroring Commands RSPAN Mirroring Commands show vlan command will not display any members for an RSPAN VLAN, but will only show configured RSPAN VLAN identifiers. EXAMPLE The following example enables RSPAN on VLAN 2, specifies this device as an RSPAN destination switch, and the uplink interface as port 3: Console(config)#rspan session 1 remote vlan 2 destination uplink ethernet 1/3 Console(config)# no rspan session Use this command to delete a configured RSPAN session.
CHAPTER 28 | Port Mirroring Commands RSPAN Mirroring Commands EXAMPLE Console#show rspan session RSPAN Session ID Source Ports (mirrored ports) RX Only TX Only BOTH Destination Port (monitor port) Destination Tagged Mode Switch Role RSPAN VLAN RSPAN Uplink Ports Operation Status Console# – 1018 – : : : : : : : : : : : 1 None None None None Eth 1/2 Untagged Destination 2 Eth 1/3 Up
29 CONGESTION CONTROL COMMANDS The switch can set the maximum upload or download data transfer rate for any port. It can control traffic storms by setting a maximum threshold for broadcast traffic or multicast traffic. It can also set bounding thresholds for broadcast and multicast storms which can be used to automatically trigger rate limits or to shut down a port. Table 116: Congestion Control Commands Command Group Function Rate Limiting Sets the input and output rate limits for a port.
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Rate Limit Commands rate-limit This command defines the rate limit for a specific interface. Use this command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate. Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled. SYNTAX rate-limit {input | output} [rate] no rate-limit {input | output} input – Input rate for specified interface output – Output rate for specified interface rate – Maximum value in Kbps.
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Storm Control Commands STORM CONTROL COMMANDS Storm control commands can be used to configure broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast storm control thresholds. Traffic storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning, or if application programs are not well designed or properly configured. If there is too much traffic on your network, performance can be severely degraded or everything can come to complete halt.
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Storm Control Commands switchport This command configures broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast storm packet-rate control. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX switchport {broadcast | multicast | unicast} packet-rate rate no switchport {broadcast | multicast | unicast} broadcast - Specifies storm control for broadcast traffic. multicast - Specifies storm control for multicast traffic.
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands EXAMPLE The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per second: Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5 Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast packet-rate 600 Console(config-if)# RELATED COMMANDS storm-sample-type (1021) show interfaces switchport (980) AUTOMATIC TRAFFIC CONTROL COMMANDS Automatic Traffic Control (ATC) configures bounding thresholds for broadcast and multicast storms which can b
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands Table 119: ATC Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-controlapply Sends a trap when broadcast traffic exceeds the upper threshold for automatic storm control and the apply timer expires IC (Port) snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-controlrelease Sends a trap when broadcast traffic falls beneath the lower threshold after a storm control response has been triggered and
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands The key elements of this diagram are described below: ◆ Alarm Fire Threshold – The highest acceptable traffic rate. When ingress traffic exceeds the threshold, ATC sends a Storm Alarm Fire Trap and logs it. ◆ When traffic exceeds the alarm fire threshold and the apply timer expires, a traffic control response is applied, and a Traffic Control Apply Trap is sent and logged.
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands Threshold Commands auto-traffic-control This command sets the time at which to apply the control response after apply-timer ingress traffic has exceeded the upper threshold. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast} apply-timer seconds no auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast} apply-timer broadcast - Specifies automatic storm control for broadcast traffic.
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands seconds - The time at which to release the control response after ingress traffic has fallen beneath the lower threshold. (Range: 1-900 seconds) DEFAULT SETTING 900 seconds COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE This command sets the delay after which the control response can be terminated.
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands EXAMPLE This example enables automatic storm control for broadcast traffic on port 1. Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#auto-traffic-control broadcast Console(config-if)# auto-traffic-control This command sets the control action to limit ingress traffic or shut down action the offending port. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands EXAMPLE This example sets the control response for broadcast traffic on port 1.
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands EXAMPLE This example sets the clear threshold for automatic storm control for broadcast traffic on port 1. Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#auto-traffic-control broadcast alarm-clear-threshold 155 Console(config-if)# auto-traffic-control This command sets the upper threshold for ingress traffic beyond which a alarm-fire-threshold storm control response is triggered after the apply timer expires.
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands auto-traffic-control This command automatically releases a control response of rate-limiting auto-control-release after the time specified in the auto-traffic-control release-timer command has expired. SYNTAX auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast} auto-control-release broadcast - Specifies automatic storm control for broadcast traffic. multicast - Specifies automatic storm control for multicast traffic.
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#auto-traffic-control broadcast control-release Console#(config-if) SNMP Trap Commands snmp-server enable This command sends a trap when broadcast traffic falls beneath the lower port-traps atc threshold after a storm control response has been triggered. Use the no broadcast-alarm- form to disable this trap.
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands Console(config-if)# RELATED COMMANDS auto-traffic-control alarm-fire-threshold (1030) snmp-server enable This command sends a trap when broadcast traffic exceeds the upper port-traps atc threshold for automatic storm control and the apply timer expires. Use the broadcast-control- no form to disable this trap.
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-controlrelease Console(config-if)# RELATED COMMANDS auto-traffic-control alarm-clear-threshold (1029) auto-traffic-control action (1028) auto-traffic-control release-timer (1026) snmp-server enable This command sends a trap when multicast traffic falls beneath the lower port-traps atc threshold after a storm control resp
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-alarm-fire Console(config-if)# RELATED COMMANDS auto-traffic-control alarm-fire-threshold (1030) snmp-server enable This command sends a trap when multicast traffic exceeds the upper port-traps atc threshold for automatic storm control and the apply timer expires. Use the multicast-control- no form to disable this trap.
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-controlrelease Console(config-if)# RELATED COMMANDS auto-traffic-control alarm-clear-threshold (1029) auto-traffic-control action (1028) auto-traffic-control release-timer (1026) ATC Display Commands show auto-traffic- This command shows global configuration settings for automatic storm control control.
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands EXAMPLE Console#show auto-traffic-control interface ethernet 1/1 Eth 1/1 Information -----------------------------------------------------------------------Storm Control: Broadcast Multicast State: Disabled Disabled Action: rate-control rate-control Auto Release Control: Disabled Disabled Alarm Fire Threshold(Kpps): 128 128 Alarm Clear Threshold(Kpps):128 128 Trap Storm Fire: Disabled Disabled Trap Storm Clear: Disabled Disabled T
CHAPTER 29 | Congestion Control Commands Automatic Traffic Control Commands – 1038 –
30 UNIDIRECTIONAL LINK DETECTION COMMANDS The switch can be configured to detect and disable unidirectional Ethernet fiber or copper links. When enabled, the protocol advertises a port’s identity and learns about its neighbors on a specific LAN segment; and stores information about its neighbors in a cache. It can also send out a train of echo messages under circumstances that require fast notifications or re-synchronization of the cached information.
CHAPTER 30 | UniDirectional Link Detection Commands If the link is deemed anything other than bidirectional at the end of the detection phase, this curve becomes a flat line with a fixed value of Mfast (7 seconds). If the link is instead deemed bidirectional, the curve will use Mfast for the first four subsequent message transmissions and then transition to an Mslow value for all other steady-state transmissions. Mslow is the value configured by this command.
CHAPTER 30 | UniDirectional Link Detection Commands problem. Because this type of detection can be event-less, and lack of information cannot always be associated to an actual malfunction of the link, this mode is optional and is recommended only in certain scenarios (typically only on point-to-point links where no communication failure between two neighbors is admissible). EXAMPLE This example enables UDLD aggressive mode on port 1.
CHAPTER 30 | UniDirectional Link Detection Commands show udld This command shows UDLD configuration settings and operational status for the switch or for a specified interface. SYNTAX show udld [interface interface] interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 30 | UniDirectional Link Detection Commands Table 121: show udld - display description (Continued) Field Description Port State Shows the UDLD port state (Unknown, Bidirectional, Unidirectional, Transmit-to-receive loop, Mismatch with neighbor state reported, Neighbor's echo is empty) The state is Unknown if the link is down or not connected to a UDLDcapable device. The state is Bidirectional if the link has a normal two-way connection to a UDLD-capable device.
CHAPTER 30 | UniDirectional Link Detection Commands – 1044 –
31 LOOPBACK DETECTION COMMANDS The switch can be configured to detect general loopback conditions caused by hardware problems or faulty protocol settings. When enabled, a control frame is transmitted on the participating ports, and the switch monitors inbound traffic to see if the frame is looped back.
CHAPTER 31 | Loopback Detection Commands loopback-detection This command enables loopback detection globally on the switch or on a specified interface. Use the no form to disable loopback detection. SYNTAX [no] loopback-detection DEFAULT SETTING Disabled COMMAND MODE Global Configuration Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE Loopback detection must be enabled globally for the switch by this command and enabled for a specific interface for this function to take effect.
CHAPTER 31 | Loopback Detection Commands COMMAND USAGE ◆ When the response to a detected loopback condition is set to block user traffic, loopback detection control frames may untagged or tagged depending on the port’s VLAN membership type. ◆ When the response to a detected loopback condition is set to block user traffic, ingress filtering for the port is enabled automatically if not already enabled by the switchport ingress-filtering command.
CHAPTER 31 | Loopback Detection Commands EXAMPLE Console(config)#loopback-detection recover-time 120 Console(config-if)# loopback-detection This command specifies the interval at which to transmit loopback transmit-interval detection control frames. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX loopback-detection transmit-interval seconds no loopback-detection transmit-interval seconds - The transmission interval for loopback detection control frames.
CHAPTER 31 | Loopback Detection Commands COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE Refer to the loopback-detection recover-time command for information on conditions which constitute loopback recovery. EXAMPLE Console(config)#loopback-detection trap both Console(config)# loopback-detection This command releases all interfaces currently shut down by the loopback release detection feature.
CHAPTER 31 | Loopback Detection Commands Trap : None Loopback Detection Port Information Port Admin State Oper State -------- ----------- ---------Eth 1/ 1 Enabled Normal Eth 1/ 2 Disabled Disabled Eth 1/ 3 Disabled Disabled . . .
32 ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified addresses, displaying current entries, clearing the table, or setting the aging time.
CHAPTER 32 | Address Table Commands EXAMPLE Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 100 Console(config)# mac-address-table This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN. Use static the no form to remove an address. SYNTAX mac-address-table static mac-address interface interface vlan vlan-id [action] no mac-address-table static mac-address vlan vlan-id mac-address - MAC address. interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 32 | Address Table Commands EXAMPLE Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de interface ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset Console(config)# clear This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database. mac-address-table dynamic DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#clear mac-address-table dynamic Console# show This command shows classes of entries in the bridge-forwarding database.
CHAPTER 32 | Address Table Commands COMMAND USAGE ◆ The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each interface. Note that the Type field may include the following types: ■ ■ Learn - Dynamic address entries Config - Static entry ◆ The mask should be hexadecimal numbers (representing an equivalent bit mask) in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx that is applied to the specified MAC address.
CHAPTER 32 | Address Table Commands show This command shows the number of MAC addresses used and the number mac-address-table of available MAC addresses for the overall system or for an interface. count SYNTAX show mac-address-table count interface interface interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 32 | Address Table Commands – 1056 –
33 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) globally for the switch, and commands that configure STA for the selected interface.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands Table 124: Spanning Tree Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode spanning-tree loopback-detection release-mode Configures loopback release mode for a port IC spanning-tree loopback-detection trap Enables BPDU loopback SNMP trap notification for a port IC spanning-tree mst cost Configures the path cost of an instance in the MST IC spanning-tree mst port-priority Configures the priority of an instance in the MST IC spanning-tree port-bpdu-flooding Floods
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands EXAMPLE This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch: Console(config)#spanning-tree Console(config)# spanning-tree This command configures spanning tree operation to be compatible with cisco-prestandard Cisco prestandard versions. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands COMMAND USAGE This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) a port will wait before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands spanning-tree This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally max-age for this switch. Use the no form to restore the default. SYNTAX spanning-tree max-age seconds no spanning-tree max-age seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 6-40 seconds) The minimum value is the higher of 6 or [2 x (hello-time + 1)]. The maximum value is the lower of 40 or [2 x (forward-time - 1)].
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ Spanning Tree Protocol This option uses RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode. It uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D BPDUs. This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network. If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network, the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops, thus isolating group members.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands spanning-tree This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning pathcost method Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default. SYNTAX spanning-tree pathcost method {long | short} no spanning-tree pathcost method long - Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 1-200,000,000. This method is based on the IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. short - Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 1-65535.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated port. The device with the highest priority (i.e., lower numeric value) becomes the STA root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands spanning-tree This command configures the system to flood BPDUs to all other ports on system-bpdu- the switch or just to all other ports in the same VLAN when spanning tree is flooding disabled globally on the switch or disabled on a specific port. Use the no form to restore the default. SYNTAX spanning-tree system-bpdu-flooding {to-all | to-vlan} no spanning-tree system-bpdu-flooding to-all - Floods BPDUs to all other ports on the switch.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands EXAMPLE Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4 Console(config)# max-hops This command configures the maximum number of hops in the region before a BPDU is discarded. Use the no form to restore the default. SYNTAX max-hops hop-number hop-number - Maximum hop number for multiple spanning tree. (Range: 1-40) DEFAULT SETTING 20 COMMAND MODE MST Configuration COMMAND USAGE An MSTI region is treated as a single node by the STP and RSTP protocols.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands DEFAULT SETTING 32768 COMMAND MODE MST Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ MST priority is used in selecting the root bridge and alternate bridge of the specified instance. The device with the highest priority (i.e., lowest numerical value) becomes the MSTI root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands which cover the same general area of your network. However, remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region (page 1068) with the same set of instances, and the same instance (on each bridge) with the same set of VLANs. Also, note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node, connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands DEFAULT SETTING 0 COMMAND MODE MST Configuration COMMAND USAGE The MST region name (page 1068) and revision number are used to designate a unique MST region. A bridge (i.e., spanning-tree compliant device such as this switch) can only belong to one MST region. And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5 Console(config-if)#spanning-tree edge-port Console(config-if)#spanning-tree bpdu-filter Console(config-if)# RELATED COMMANDS spanning-tree edge-port (1072) spanning-tree This command shuts down an edge port (i.e., an interface set for fast bpdu-guard forwarding) if it receives a BPDU. Use the no form without any keywords to disable this feature, or with a keyword to restore the default settings.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands RELATED COMMANDS spanning-tree edge-port (1072) spanning-tree spanning-disabled (1080) spanning-tree cost This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface. Use the no form to restore the default auto-configuration mode. SYNTAX spanning-tree cost cost no spanning-tree cost cost - The path cost for the port.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands ◆ When the path cost method (page 1063) is set to short, the maximum value for path cost is 65,535. EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5 Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 50 Console(config-if)# spanning-tree This command specifies an interface as an edge port. Use the no form to edge-port restore the default. SYNTAX spanning-tree edge-port [auto] no spanning-tree edge-port auto - Automatically determines if an interface is an edge port.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands spanning-tree This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree and link-type Multiple Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default. SYNTAX spanning-tree link-type {auto | point-to-point | shared} no spanning-tree link-type auto - Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting. point-to-point - Point-to-point link. shared - Shared medium.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands COMMAND USAGE ◆ If Port Loopback Detection is not enabled and a port receives it’s own BPDU, then the port will drop the loopback BPDU according to IEEE Standard 802.1W-2001 9.3.4 (Note 1). ◆ Port Loopback Detection will not be active if Spanning Tree is disabled on the switch.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands spanning-tree This command configures the release mode for a port that was placed in loopback-detection the discarding state because a loopback BPDU was received. Use the no release-mode form to restore the default. SYNTAX spanning-tree loopback-detection release-mode {auto | manual} no spanning-tree loopback-detection release-mode auto - Allows a port to automatically be released from the discarding state when the loopback state ends.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands spanning-tree This command enables SNMP trap notification for Spanning Tree loopback loopback-detection BPDU detections. Use the no form to restore the default.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands ◆ This command is used by the multiple spanning-tree algorithm to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to interfaces attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to interfaces with slower media. ◆ Use the no spanning-tree mst cost command to specify autoconfiguration mode. ◆ Path cost takes precedence over interface priority.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands RELATED COMMANDS spanning-tree mst cost (1076) spanning-tree This command floods BPDUs to other ports when spanning tree is disabled port-bpdu-flooding globally or disabled on a specific port. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands COMMAND USAGE ◆ This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree. ◆ Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5 Console(config-if)#spanning-tree edge-port Console(config-if)#spanning-tree root-guard Console(config-if)# spanning-tree This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified spanning-disabled interface. Use the no form to re-enable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#spanning-tree tc-prop-stop Console(config-if)# spanning-tree This command manually releases a port placed in discarding state by loopback-detection loopback-detection. release SYNTAX spanning-tree loopback-detection release interface interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands COMMAND USAGE If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can also use the spanning-tree protocol-migration command at any time to manually re-check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces (i.e., RSTP or STP-compatible).
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands ◆ Use the show spanning-tree mst command to display the spanning tree configuration for all instances within the Multiple Spanning Tree (MST), including global settings and settings for active interfaces. ◆ Use the show spanning-tree mst instance-id command to display the spanning tree configuration for an instance within the Multiple Spanning Tree (MST), including global settings and settings for all interfaces.
CHAPTER 33 | Spanning Tree Commands Loopback Detection Status Loopback Detection Release Mode Loopback Detection Trap Loopback Detection Action Root Guard Status BPDU Guard Status BPDU Guard Auto Recovery BPDU Guard Auto Recovery Interval BPDU Filter Status : : : : : : : : : Enabled Auto Disabled Block Disabled Disabled Disabled 300 Disabled . . . This example shows a brief summary of global and interface setting for the spanning tree.
34 ERPS COMMANDS The G.8032 recommendation, also referred to as Ethernet Ring Protection Switching (ERPS), can be used to increase the availability and robustness of Ethernet rings. This chapter describes commands used to configure ERPS.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands Table 127: ERPS Commands(Continued) Command Function Mode erps clear Manually clears protection state which has been invoked by a Forced Switch or Manual Switch command, and the node is operating under non-revertive mode; or before the WTR or WTB timer expires when the node is operating in revertive mode PE erps forcedswitch Blocks the specified ring port PE erps manualswitch Blocks the specified ring port, in the absence of a failure or an erps forced-switch command P
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands 7. Enable an ERPS ring: Before an ERPS ring can work, it must be enabled using the enable command. When configuration is completed and the ring enabled, R-APS messages will start flowing in the control VLAN, and normal traffic will begin to flow in the data VLANs. To stop a ring, it can be disabled on any node using the no enable command. 8.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ Service Instances within each ring are based on a unique maintenance association for the specific users, distinguished by the ring name, maintenance level, maintenance association’s name, and assigned VLAN. Up to 6 ERPS rings can be configured on the switch. ◆ R-APS information is carried in an R-APS PDUs. The last octet of the MAC address is designated as the Ring ID (01-19-A7-00-00-[Ring ID]).
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands ◆ Once the ring has been activated with the enable command, the configuration of the control VLAN cannot be modified. Use the no enable command to stop the ERPS ring before making any configuration changes to the control VLAN.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands guard-timer This command sets the guard timer to prevent ring nodes from receiving outdated R-APS messages. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX guard-timer milliseconds milliseconds - The guard timer is used to prevent ring nodes from receiving outdated R-APS messages. During the duration of the guard timer, all received R-APS messages are ignored by the ring protection control process, giving time for old messages still circulating on the ring to expire.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands server layer protection switch to have a chance to fix the problem before switching at a client layer. When a new defect or more severe defect occurs (new Signal Failure), this event will not be reported immediately to the protection switching mechanism if the provisioned hold-off timer value is non-zero. Instead, the hold-off timer will be started. When the timer expires, whether a defect still exists or not, the timer will be checked.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands meg-level This command sets the Maintenance Entity Group level for a ring. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX meg-level level level - The maintenance entity group (MEG) level which provides a communication channel for ring automatic protection switching (R-APS) information. (Range: 0-7) DEFAULT SETTING 1 COMMAND MODE ERPS Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ This parameter is used to ensure that received R-APS PDUs are directed for this ring.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE ERPS Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ If this command is used to monitor the link status of an ERPS node with CFM continuity check messages, then the MEG level set by the meglevel command must match the authorized maintenance level of the CFM domain to which the specified MEP belongs.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands For example, a node that has one ring port in SF condition and detects that the condition has been cleared, will continuously transmit R-APS (NR) messages with its own Node ID as priority information over both ring ports, informing its neighbors that no request is present at this node. When another recovered node holding the link blocked receives this message, it compares the Node ID information with its own.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands Figure 412: Non-ERPS Device Protection RPL A B blocked C D blocked fault X non-ERPS E F RPL Owner X non-ERPS When non-ERPS device protection is enabled on the ring, the ring ports on the RPL owner node and non-owner nodes will not be blocked when signal loss is detected by CCM loss events. ◆ When non-ERPS device protection is enabled on an RPL owner node, it will send non-standard health-check packets to poll the ring health when it enters the protection state.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands the erps clear command to used to return the RPL from Protection state to Idle state. ◆ Recovery for Protection Switching – A ring node that has one or more ring ports in an SF (Signal Fail) condition, upon detecting the SF condition cleared, keeps at least one of its ring ports blocked for the traffic channel and for the R-APS channel, until the RPL is blocked as a result of ring protection reversion, or until there is another higher priority request (e.g.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands c. When the operator issues the erps clear command for nonrevertive mode at the RPL Owner Node, the non-revertive operation is cleared, the RPL Owner Node blocks its RPL port, and transmits an R-APS (NR, RB) message in both directions, repeatedly. d. Upon receiving an R-APS (NR, RB) message, any blocking node should unblock its non-failed ring port. If it is an R-APS (NR, RB) message without a DNF indication, all ring nodes flush the FDB.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands ■ Recovery with non-revertive mode is handled in the following way: a. The RPL Owner Node, upon reception of an R-APS(NR) message and in the absence of any other higher priority request does not perform any action. b. Then, after the operator issues the erps clear command at the RPL Owner Node, this ring node blocks the ring port attached to the RPL, transmits an R-APS (NR, RB) message on both ring ports, informing the ring that the RPL is blocked, and flushes its FDB. c.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands condition. If it is an R-APS (NR, RB) message without a DNF indication, all Ethernet Ring Nodes flush their FDB. This action unblocks the ring port which was blocked as a result of an operator command. ■ Recovery with non-revertive mode is handled in the following way: a. The RPL Owner Node, upon reception of an R-APS (NR) message and in the absence of any other higher priority request does not perform any action. b.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands EXAMPLE Console(config-erps)#propagate-tc Console(config-erps)# raps-def-mac This command sets the switch’s MAC address to be used as the node identifier in R-APS messages. Use the no form to use the node identifier specified in the G8032 standards. SYNTAX [no] raps-def-mac DEFAULT SETTING Enabled COMMAND MODE ERPS Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ When ring nodes running ERPSv1 and ERPSv2 co-exist on the same ring, the Ring ID of each ring node must be configured as “1”.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands COMMAND USAGE ◆ A sub-ring may be attached to a primary ring with or without a virtual channel. A virtual channel is used to connect two interconnection points on the sub-ring, tunneling R-APS control messages across an arbitrary Ethernet network topology. If a virtual channel is not used to cross the intermediate Ethernet network, data in the traffic channel will still flow across the network, but the all R-APS messages will be terminated at the interconnection points.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands No R-APS messages are inserted or extracted by other rings or subrings at the interconnection nodes where a sub-ring is attached. Hence there is no need for either additional bandwidth or for different VIDs/ Ring IDs for the ring interconnection. Furthermore, protection switching time for a sub-ring is independent from the configuration or topology of the interconnected rings.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands COMMAND USAGE ◆ Each node must be connected to two neighbors on the ring. For convenience, the ports connected are referred to as east and west ports. Alternatively, the closest neighbor to the east should be the next node in the ring in a clockwise direction, and the closest neighbor to the west should be the next node in the ring in a counter-clockwise direction. ◆ Note that a ring port cannot be configured as a member of a spanning tree, a dynamic trunk, or a static trunk.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands of the RPL. If the switch is set as the RPL neighbor for an ERPS domain, the east ring port is set as the other end of the RPL. ◆ The east and west connections to the ring must be specified for all ring nodes using the ring-port command. When this switch is configured as the RPL neighbor, the east ring port is set as being connected to the RPL. ◆ Note that is not mandatory to declare a RPL neighbor.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands version This command specifies compatibility with ERPS version 1 or 2. SYNTAX version {1 | 2} 1 - ERPS version 1 based on ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. 2 - ERPS version 2 based on ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344 Version 2.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands wtr-timer This command sets the wait-to-restore timer which is used to verify that the ring has stabilized before blocking the RPL after recovery from a signal failure. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX wtr-timer minutes minutes - The wait-to-restore timer is used to verify that the ring has stabilized before blocking the RPL after recovery from a signal failure.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands erps clear This command manually clears the protection state which has been invoked by a forced switch or manual switch command, and the node is operating under non-revertive mode; or before the WTR or WTB timer expires when the node is operating in revertive mode. SYNTAX erps clear domain ring-name ring-name - Name of a specific ERPS ring.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands COMMAND USAGE ◆ A ring with no pending request has a logical topology with the traffic channel blocked at the RPL and unblocked on all other ring links. In this situation, the erps forced-switch command triggers protection switching as follows: a. The ring node where a forced switch command was issued blocks the traffic channel and R-APS channel on the ring port to which the command was issued, and unblocks the other ring port. b.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands Table 128: ERPS Request/State Priority (Continued) Request / State and Status Type R-APS (FS) remote | local SF* local | local clear SF local | R-APS (SF) remote | R-APS (MS) remote | MS local | WTR Expires local | WTR Running local | WTB Expires local | WTB Running local | R-APS (NR, RB) remote | R-APS (NR) remote lowest * Priority If an Ethernet Ring Node is in the Forced Switch state, local SF is ignored.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE ◆ A ring with no request has a logical topology with the traffic channel blocked at the RPL and unblocked on all other ring links. In this situation, the erps manual-switch command triggers protection switching as follows: a.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands c. An ring node with a local manual switch command that receives an R-APS message or a local request of higher priority than R-APS (MS) clear its manual switch request. The ring node then processes the new higher priority request. ◆ Recovery for manual switching under revertive and non-revertive mode is described under the Command Usage section for the non-revertive command.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands Table 129: show erps - summary display description Field Description Node Information ERPS Status Shows whether ERPS is enabled on the switch. Number of ERPS Domains Shows the number of ERPS rings configured on the switch. Domain Displays the name of each ring followed by a brief list of status information ID ERPS ring identifier used in R-APS messages. Enabled Shows if the specified ring is enabled. Ver Shows the ERPS version.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands This example displays detailed information for the specified ERPS ring.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands Table 130: show erps domain - detailed display description (Continued) Field Description WTB Expire The time before the wait-to-block timer expires. WTR Expire The time before the wait-to-restore timer expires. This example displays statistics for all configured ERPS rings.
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands Table 131: show erps statistics - detailed display description (Continued) Field Description EVENT Any request/state message, excluding FS, SF, MS, and NR HEALTH The number of non-standard health-check messages – 1115 –
CHAPTER 34 | ERPS Commands – 1116 –
35 VLAN COMMANDS A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment. This section describes commands used to create VLAN groups, add port members, specify how VLAN tagging is used, and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected interface.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network. This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces and globally for the switch, as well as how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension MIB.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands garp timer This command sets the values for the join, leave and leaveall timers. Use the no form to restore the timers’ default values. SYNTAX garp timer {join | leave | leaveall} timer-value no garp timer {join | leave | leaveall} {join | leave | leaveall} - Timer to set. timer-value - Value of timer.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands switchport This command configures forbidden VLANs. Use the no form to remove the forbidden vlan list of forbidden VLANs. SYNTAX switchport forbidden vlan {add vlan-list | remove vlan-list} no switchport forbidden vlan add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add. remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove. vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE GVRP cannot be enabled for ports set to Access mode using the switchport mode command. EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp Console(config-if)# show bridge-ext This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-16) DEFAULT SETTING Shows all GARP timers. COMMAND MODE Normal Exec, Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show garp timer ethernet 1/1 Eth 1/ 1 GARP Timer Status: Join Timer : 20 centiseconds Leave Timer : 60 centiseconds Leave All Timer : 1000 centiseconds Console# RELATED COMMANDS garp timer (1119) show gvrp This command shows if GVRP is enabled.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Editing VLAN Groups EDITING VLAN GROUPS Table 134: Commands for Editing VLAN Groups Command Function Mode vlan database Enters VLAN database mode to add, change, and delete VLANs GC vlan Configures a VLAN, including VID, name and state VC vlan database This command enters VLAN database mode. All commands in this mode will take effect immediately.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Editing VLAN Groups vlan This command configures a VLAN. Use the no form to restore the default settings or delete a VLAN. SYNTAX vlan vlan-id [name vlan-name] media ethernet [state {active | suspend}] [rspan] no vlan vlan-id [name | state] vlan-id - VLAN ID, specified as a single number, a range of consecutive numbers separated by a hyphen, or multiple numbers separated by commas. (Range: 1-4094) name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring VLAN Interfaces RELATED COMMANDS show vlan (1131) CONFIGURING VLAN INTERFACES Table 135: Commands for Configuring VLAN Interfaces Command Function Mode interface vlan Enters interface configuration mode for a specified VLAN IC switchport acceptableframe-types Configures frame types to be accepted by an interface IC switchport allowed vlan Configures the VLANs associated with an interface IC switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an inte
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring VLAN Interfaces RELATED COMMANDS shutdown (974) interface (968) vlan (1124) switchport This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port. Use the acceptable-frame- no form to restore the default. types SYNTAX switchport acceptable-frame-types {all | tagged} no switchport acceptable-frame-types all - The port accepts all frames, tagged or untagged. tagged - The port only receives tagged frames.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring VLAN Interfaces vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. (Range: 1-4094). DEFAULT SETTING All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default. The default frame type is untagged. COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE ◆ A port, or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid, must be assigned to at least one VLAN as untagged.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring VLAN Interfaces COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE ◆ Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames. ◆ If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to all other ports (except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port).
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring VLAN Interfaces COMMAND USAGE Access mode is mutually exclusive with VLAN trunking (see the vlantrunking command). If VLAN trunking is enabled on an interface, then that interface cannot be set to access mode, and vice versa.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring VLAN Interfaces vlan-trunking This command allows unknown VLAN groups to pass through the specified interface. Use the no form to disable this feature. SYNTAX [no] vlan-trunking DEFAULT SETTING Disabled COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE ◆ Use this command to configure a tunnel across one or more intermediate switches which pass traffic for VLAN groups to which they do not belong.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Displaying VLAN Information enabled. (In other words, VLAN trunking will still be effectively enabled for the unknown VLAN).
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling VLAN ID: 1 Type: Static Name: DefaultVlan Status: Active Ports/Port Channels : Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S) Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S) Eth1/26(S) Eth1/27(S) Console# Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/18(S) Eth1/23(S) Eth1/28(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 9(S) Eth1/14(S) Eth1/19(S) Eth1/24(S) Eth1/ 5(S) Eth1/10(S) Eth1/15(S) Eth1/20(S) Eth1/25(S) CONFIGURING IEEE 802.1Q TUNNELING IEEE 802.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling value is 0x8100. (See switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid.) 5. Configure the QinQ tunnel access port to join the SPVLAN as an untagged member (switchport allowed vlan). 6. Configure the SPVLAN ID as the native VID on the QinQ tunnel access port (switchport native vlan). 7. Configure the QinQ tunnel uplink port to dot1Q-tunnel uplink mode (switchport dot1q-tunnel mode). 8.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling RELATED COMMANDS show dot1q-tunnel (1138) show interfaces switchport (980) switchport This command configures an interface as a QinQ tunnel port. Use the no dot1q-tunnel mode form to disable QinQ on the interface. SYNTAX switchport dot1q-tunnel mode {access | uplink} no switchport dot1q-tunnel mode access – Sets the port as an 802.1Q tunnel access port. uplink – Sets the port as an 802.1Q tunnel uplink port.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling switchport This command creates a CVLAN to SPVLAN mapping entry. Use the no dot1q-tunnel form to delete a VLAN mapping entry. service match cvid SYNTAX switchport dot1q-tunnel service svid match cvid cvid svid - VLAN ID for the outer VLAN tag (Service Provider VID). (Range: 1-4094) cvid - VLAN ID for the inner VLAN tag (Customer VID).
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling The following example maps C-VLAN 10 to S-VLAN 100, C-VLAN 20 to SVLAN 200 and C-VLAN 30 to S-VLAN 300 for ingress traffic on port 1 of Switches A and B.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Step 2. Configure Switch C. 1. Create VLAN 100, 200 and 300. Console(config)#vlan database Console(config-vlan)#vlan 100,200,300 media ethernet state active 2. Configure port 1 and port 2 as tagged members of VLAN 100, 200 and 300. Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1,2 Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 100,200,300 tagged switchport This command sets the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of a tunnel dot1q-tunnel tpid port.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling RELATED COMMANDS show interfaces switchport (980) show dot1q-tunnel This command displays information about QinQ tunnel ports. SYNTAX show dot1q-tunnel [interface interface [service svid] | service [svid]] interface ethernet unit/port unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1) port - Port number. (Range: 1-28/52) port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-16) svid - VLAN ID for the outer VLAN tag (SPVID).
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring L2CP Tunneling CONFIGURING L2CP TUNNELING This section describes the commands used to configure Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT).
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring L2CP Tunneling across to the tunnel’s egress port. The egress port decapsulates these packets, restores the proper protocol and MAC address information, and then floods them onto the same VLANs at the customer’s remote site (via all of the appropriate tunnel ports and access ports26 connected to the same metro VLAN).
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring L2CP Tunneling ◆ other access ports for which L2PT is enabled after decapsulating the packet and restoring the proper protocol and MAC address information. ■ all uplink ports.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring L2CP Tunneling pvst+ - Cisco Per VLAN Spanning Tree Plus spanning-tree - Spanning Tree (STP, RSTP, MSTP) vtp - Cisco VLAN Trunking Protocol DEFAULT SETTING Disabled for all protocols COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE ◆ Refer to the Command Usage section for the l2protocol-tunnel tunnel-dmac command.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring Protocol-based VLANs CONFIGURING PROTOCOL-BASED VLANS The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN. This may require non-standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol. This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs, including security and easy accessibility.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring Protocol-based VLANs protocol-vlan This command creates a protocol group, or to add specific protocols to a protocol-group group. Use the no form to remove a protocol group. (Configuring Groups) SYNTAX protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id [{add | remove} frame-type frame protocol-type protocol] no protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id group-id - Group identifier of this protocol group. (Range: 1-2147483647) frame27 - Frame type used by this protocol.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring Protocol-based VLANs DEFAULT SETTING No protocol groups are mapped for any interface. Priority: 0 COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE ◆ When creating a protocol-based VLAN, only assign interfaces via this command. If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN commands (such as the vlan command), these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol type into the associated VLAN.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring Protocol-based VLANs COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE This shows protocol group 1 configured for IP over Ethernet: Console#show protocol-vlan protocol-group Protocol Group ID Frame Type Protocol Type ------------------ ------------- --------------1 ethernet 08 00 Console# show interfaces This command shows the mapping from protocol groups to VLANs for the protocol-vlan selected interfaces.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring IP Subnet VLANs CONFIGURING IP SUBNET VLANS When using IEEE 802.1Q port-based VLAN classification, all untagged frames received by a port are classified as belonging to the VLAN whose VID (PVID) is associated with that port. When IP subnet-based VLAN classification is enabled, the source address of untagged ingress frames are checked against the IP subnet-to-VLAN mapping table.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring IP Subnet VLANs is found, the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the frame. If no mapping is found, the PVID of the receiving port is assigned to the frame. ◆ The IP subnet cannot be a broadcast or multicast IP address. ◆ When MAC-based, IP subnet-based, and protocol-based VLANs are supported concurrently, priority is applied in this sequence, and then port-based VLANs last. EXAMPLE The following example assigns traffic for the subnet 192.168.12.192, mask 255.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring MAC Based VLANs CONFIGURING MAC BASED VLANS When using IEEE 802.1Q port-based VLAN classification, all untagged frames received by a port are classified as belonging to the VLAN whose VID (PVID) is associated with that port. When MAC-based VLAN classification is enabled, the source address of untagged ingress frames are checked against the MAC address-to-VLAN mapping table.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring Voice VLANs ◆ When MAC-based, IP subnet-based, and protocol-based VLANs are supported concurrently, priority is applied in this sequence, and then port-based VLANs last. EXAMPLE The following example assigns traffic from source MAC address 00-00-0011-22-33 to VLAN 10. Console(config)#mac-vlan mac-address 00-00-00-11-22-33 vlan 10 Console(config)# show mac-vlan This command displays MAC address-to-VLAN assignments.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring Voice VLANs Table 142: Voice VLAN Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode switchport voice vlan rule Sets the automatic VoIP traffic detection method for ports IC switchport voice vlan security Enables Voice VLAN security on ports IC show voice vlan Displays Voice VLAN settings PE voice vlan This command enables VoIP traffic detection and defines the Voice VLAN ID. Use the no form to disable the Voice VLAN.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring Voice VLANs voice vlan aging This command sets the Voice VLAN ID time out. Use the no form to restore the default. SYNTAX voice vlan aging minutes no voice vlan minutes - Specifies the port Voice VLAN membership time out. (Range: 5-43200 minutes) DEFAULT SETTING 1440 minutes COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE The Voice VLAN aging time is the time after which a port is removed from the Voice VLAN when VoIP traffic is no longer received on the port.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring Voice VLANs description - User-defined text that identifies the VoIP devices. (Range: 1-32 characters) DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ VoIP devices attached to the switch can be identified by the manufacturer’s Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI) in the source MAC address of received packets. OUI numbers are assigned to manufacturers and form the first three octets of device MAC addresses.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring Voice VLANs vlan rule command. When OUI is selected, be sure to configure the MAC address ranges in the Telephony OUI list using the voice vlan mac-address command. ◆ All ports are set to VLAN hybrid mode by default. Prior to enabling VoIP for a port (by setting the VoIP mode to Auto or Manual as described below), ensure that VLAN membership is not set to access mode using the switchport mode command.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring Voice VLANs switchport voice This command selects a method for detecting VoIP traffic on a port. Use vlan rule the no form to disable the detection method on the port. SYNTAX [no] switchport voice vlan rule {oui | lldp} oui - Traffic from VoIP devices is detected by the Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) of the source MAC address. lldp - Uses LLDP to discover VoIP devices attached to the port.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring Voice VLANs COMMAND USAGE ◆ Security filtering discards any non-VoIP packets received on the port that are tagged with the voice VLAN ID. VoIP traffic is identified by source MAC addresses configured in the Telephony OUI list, or through LLDP that discovers VoIP devices attached to the switch. Packets received from non-VoIP sources are dropped.
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring Voice VLANs Eth 1/10 Disabled Disabled OUI Console#show voice vlan oui OUI Address Mask ----------------- ----------------00-12-34-56-78-9A FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 00-11-22-33-44-55 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 00-98-76-54-32-10 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Console# – 1157 – 6 NA Description -----------------------------old phones new phones Chris' phone
CHAPTER 35 | VLAN Commands Configuring Voice VLANs – 1158 –
36 CLASS OF SERVICE COMMANDS The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion. This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port. Data packets in a port’s high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority queues.
CHAPTER 36 | Class of Service Commands Priority Commands (Layer 2) queue mode This command sets the scheduling mode used for processing each of the class of service (CoS) priority queues. The options include strict priority, Weighted Round-Robin (WRR), or a combination of strict and weighted queuing. Use the no form to restore the default value.
CHAPTER 36 | Class of Service Commands Priority Commands (Layer 2) ◆ Service time is shared at the egress ports by defining scheduling weights for WRR, or for the queuing mode that uses a combination of strict and weighted queuing. Service time is allocated to each queue by calculating a precise number of bytes per second that will be serviced on each round. ◆ The specified queue mode applies to all interfaces.
CHAPTER 36 | Class of Service Commands Priority Commands (Layer 2) EXAMPLE The following example shows how to assign round-robin weights of 1 - 4 to the CoS priority queues 0 - 3. Console(config)#queue weight 1 2 3 4 Console(config)# RELATED COMMANDS queue mode (1160) show queue weight (1163) switchport This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames. Use the no priority default form to restore the default value.
CHAPTER 36 | Class of Service Commands Priority Commands (Layer 2) EXAMPLE The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5: Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3 Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5 Console(config-if)# RELATED COMMANDS show interfaces switchport (980) show queue mode This command shows the current queue mode.
CHAPTER 36 | Class of Service Commands Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) PRIORITY COMMANDS (LAYER 3 AND 4) This section describes commands used to configure Layer 3 and 4 traffic priority mapping on the switch.
CHAPTER 36 | Class of Service Commands Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) DEFAULT SETTING Table 146: Default Mapping of CoS/CFI to Internal PHB/Drop Precedence 0 1 0 (0,0) (0,0) 1 (1,0) (1,0) 2 (2,0) (2,0) 3 (3,0) (3,0) 4 (4,0) (4,0) 5 (5,0) (5,0) 6 (6,0) (6,0) 7 (7,0) (7,0) CoS CFI COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Port, Static Aggregation) COMMAND USAGE ◆ The default mapping of CoS to PHB values shown in Table 146 is based on the recommended settings in IEEE 802.
CHAPTER 36 | Class of Service Commands Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5 Console(config-if)#qos map cos-dscp 0 0 from 0 1 Console(config-if)# qos map This command maps DSCP values in incoming packets to per-hop behavior dscp-mutation and drop precedence values for priority processing. Use the no form to restore the default settings. SYNTAX qos map dscp-mutation phb drop-precedence from dscp0 ... dscp7 no qos map dscp-mutation dscp0 ...
CHAPTER 36 | Class of Service Commands Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) ◆ This map is only used when the QoS mapping mode is set to “DSCP” by the qos map trust-mode command, and the ingress packet type is IPv4. ◆ Two QoS domains can have different DSCP definitions, so the DSCP-toPHB/Drop Precedence mutation map can be used to modify one set of DSCP values to match the definition of another domain.
CHAPTER 36 | Class of Service Commands Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) COMMAND USAGE ◆ Enter a queue identifier, followed by the keyword “from” and then up to eight internal per-hop behavior values separated by spaces. ◆ Egress packets are placed into the hardware queues according to the mapping defined by this command. EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5 Console(config-if)#qos map phb-queue 0 from 1 2 3 Console(config-if)# qos map trust-mode This command sets QoS mapping to DSCP or CoS.
CHAPTER 36 | Class of Service Commands Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) EXAMPLE This example sets the QoS priority mapping mode to use DSCP based on the conditions described in the Command Usage section. Console(config)#interface ge1/1 Console(config-if)#qos map trust-mode dscp Console(config-if)# show qos map This command shows ingress CoS/CFI to internal DSCP map. cos-dscp SYNTAX show qos map cos-dscp interface interface interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier.
CHAPTER 36 | Class of Service Commands Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE This map is only used when the QoS mapping mode is set to “DSCP” by the qos map trust-mode command, and the ingress packet type is IPv4.
CHAPTER 36 | Class of Service Commands Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) show qos map This command shows the QoS mapping mode. trust-mode SYNTAX show qos map trust-mode interface interface interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 36 | Class of Service Commands Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) – 1172 –
37 QUALITY OF SERVICE COMMANDS The commands described in this section are used to configure Differentiated Services (DiffServ) classification criteria and service policies. You can classify traffic based on access lists, IP Precedence or DSCP values, or VLANs. Using access lists allows you select traffic based on Layer 2, Layer 3, or Layer 4 information contained in each packet.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands To create a service policy for a specific category of ingress traffic, follow these steps: 1. Use the class-map command to designate a class name for a specific category of traffic, and enter the Class Map configuration mode. 2. Use the match command to select a specific type of traffic based on an access list, an IPv4 DSCP value, IPv4 Precedence value, IPv6 DSCP value, a VLAN, or a CoS value. 3.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands COMMAND USAGE ◆ First enter this command to designate a class map and enter the Class Map configuration mode. Then use match commands to specify the criteria for ingress traffic that will be classified under this class map. ◆ One or more class maps can be assigned to a policy map (page 1177). The policy map is then bound by a service policy to an interface (page 1188). A service policy defines packet classification, service tagging, and bandwidth policing.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands match This command defines the criteria used to classify traffic. Use the no form to delete the matching criteria. SYNTAX [no] match {access-list acl-name | cos cos | ip dscp dscp | ip precedence ip-precedence | ipv6 dscp dscp | vlan vlan} acl-name - Name of the access control list. Any type of ACL can be specified, including standard or extended IPv4/IPv6 ACLs and MAC ACLs. (Range: 1-16 characters) cos - A Class of Service value.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands This example creates a class map call “rd-class#2,” and sets it to match packets marked for IP Precedence service value 5. Console(config)#class-map rd-class#2 match-any Console(config-cmap)#match ip precedence 5 Console(config-cmap)# This example creates a class map call “rd-class#3,” and sets it to match packets marked for VLAN 1.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands COMMAND USAGE ◆ Use the policy-map command to specify the name of the policy map, and then use the class command to configure policies for traffic that matches the criteria defined in a class map. ◆ A policy map can contain multiple class statements that can be applied to the same interface with the service-policy command. ◆ Create a Class Map (page 1177) before assigning it to a Policy Map.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands ◆ ■ set ip dscp command sets the IP DSCP value in matching packets. (This modifies packet priority in the IP header.) ■ police commands define parameters such as the maximum throughput, burst rate, and response to non-conforming traffic. Up to 16 classes can be included in a policy map.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands COMMAND MODE Policy Map Class Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ You can configure up to 16 policers (i.e., class maps) for ingress ports. ◆ The committed-rate cannot exceed the configured interface speed, and the committed-burst cannot exceed 16 Mbytes. ◆ Policing is based on a token bucket, where bucket depth (i.e.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands police srtcm-color This command defines an enforcer for classified traffic based on a single rate three color meter (srTCM). Use the no form to remove a policer. SYNTAX [no] police {srtcm-color-blind | srtcm-color-aware} committed-rate committed-burst excess-burst conform-action transmit exceed-action {drop | new-dscp} violate action {drop | new-dscp} srtcm-color-blind - Single rate three color meter in color-blind mode.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands ◆ The srTCM as defined in RFC 2697 meters a traffic stream and processes its packets according to three traffic parameters – Committed Information Rate (CIR), Committed Burst Size (BC), and Excess Burst Size (BE). ◆ The PHB label is composed of five bits, three bits for per-hop behavior, and two bits for the color scheme used to control queue congestion.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands EXAMPLE This example creates a policy called “rd-policy,” uses the class command to specify the previously defined “rd-class,” uses the set phb command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive, and then uses the police srtcm-color-blind command to limit the average bandwidth to 100,000 Kbps, the committed burst rate to 4000 bytes, the excess burst rate to 6000 bytes, to remark any packets exceeding the committed burst size, and to drop any packets
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands violate-action - Action to take when rate exceeds the PIR. (There are not enough tokens in bucket BP to service the packet, the packet is set red.) drop - Drops packet as required by exceed-action or violate-action. transmit - Transmits without taking any action. new-dscp - Differentiated Service Code Point (DSCP) value. (Range: 0-63) DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Policy Map Class Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ You can configure up to 16 policers (i.e.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands When a packet of size B bytes arrives at time t, the following happens if trTCM is configured to operate in color-blind mode: ■ ■ ■ If Tp(t)-B < 0, the packet is red, else if Tc(t)-B < 0, the packet is yellow and Tp is decremented by B, else the packet is green and both Tp and Tc are decremented by B.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands COMMAND USAGE ◆ The set cos command is used to set the CoS value in the VLAN tag for matching packets. ◆ The set cos and set phb command function at the same level of priority. Therefore setting either of these commands will overwrite any action already configured by the other command.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands COMMAND USAGE The set ip dscp command is used to set the priority values in the packet’s ToS field for matching packets.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands EXAMPLE This example creates a policy called “rd-policy,” uses the class command to specify the previously defined “rd-class,” uses the set phb command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive, and then uses the police flow command to limit the average bandwidth to 100,000 Kbps, the burst rate to 4000 bytes, and configure the response to drop any violating packets.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands show class-map This command displays the QoS class maps which define matching criteria used for classifying traffic. SYNTAX show class-map [class-map-name] class-map-name - Name of the class map. (Range: 1-32 characters) DEFAULT SETTING Displays all class maps.
CHAPTER 37 | Quality of Service Commands Description: class rd-class set PHB 3 Console#show policy-map rd-policy class rd-class Policy Map rd-policy class rd-class set PHB 3 Console# show policy-map This command displays the service policy assigned to the specified interface interface. SYNTAX show policy-map interface interface input interface unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
38 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) to check for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service. It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only. It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping IGMP SNOOPING This section describes commands used to configure IGMP snooping on the switch.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping Table 151: IGMP Snooping Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode ip igmp snooping vlan static Adds an interface as a member of a multicast group GC ip igmp snooping vlan version Configures the IGMP version for snooping GC ip igmp snooping vlan version-exclusive Discards received IGMP messages which use a version different to that currently configured GC clear ip igmp snooping groups dynamic Clears multicast group information dynamical
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping ip igmp snooping This command assigns a priority to all multicast traffic. Use the no form to priority restore the default setting. SYNTAX ip igmp snooping priority priority no ip igmp snooping priority priority - The CoS priority assigned to all multicast traffic.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping COMMAND USAGE ◆ When proxy reporting is enabled with this command, the switch performs “IGMP Snooping with Proxy Reporting” (as defined in DSL Forum TR-101, April 2006), including last leave, and query suppression. Last leave sends out a proxy query when the last member leaves a multicast group, and query suppression means that specific queries are not forwarded from an upstream multicast router to hosts downstream from this device.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping DEFAULT SETTING Disabled COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE As described in Section 9.1 of RFC 3376 for IGMP Version 3, the Router Alert Option can be used to protect against DOS attacks.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping ip igmp snooping This command enables flooding of multicast traffic if a spanning tree tcn-flood topology change notification (TCN) occurs. Use the no form to disable flooding. SYNTAX [no] ip igmp snooping tcn-flood DEFAULT SETTING Disabled COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ When a spanning tree topology change occurs, the multicast membership information learned by the switch may be out of date.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping EXAMPLE The following example enables TCN flooding. Console(config)#ip igmp snooping tcn-flood Console(config)# ip igmp snooping This command instructs the switch to send out an IGMP general query tcn-query-solicit solicitation when a spanning tree topology change notification (TCN) occurs. Use the no form to disable this feature.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE Once the table used to store multicast entries for IGMP snooping and multicast routing is filled, no new entries are learned. If no router port is configured in the attached VLAN, and unregistered-flooding is disabled, any subsequent multicast traffic not found in the table is dropped, otherwise it is flooded throughout the VLAN.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping ip igmp snooping This command configures the IGMP snooping version. Use the no form to version restore the default.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping DEFAULT SETTING Global: Disabled VLAN: Disabled COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ If version exclusive is disabled on a VLAN, then this setting is based on the global setting. If it is enabled on a VLAN, then this setting takes precedence over the global setting. ◆ When this function is disabled, the currently selected version is backward compatible (see the ip igmp snooping version command.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping ip igmp This command immediately deletes a member port of a multicast service if snooping vlan a leave packet is received at that port and immediate-leave is enabled for immediate-leave the parent VLAN. Use the no form to restore the default. SYNTAX [no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-list immediate-leave vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. (Range: 1-4094).
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping ip igmp snooping This command configures the number of IGMP proxy group-specific or vlan last-memb- group-and-source-specific query messages that are sent out before the query-count system assumes there are no more local members. Use the no form to restore the default.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping COMMAND USAGE ◆ When a multicast host leaves a group, it sends an IGMP leave message. When the leave message is received by the switch, it checks to see if this host is the last to leave the group by sending out an IGMP groupspecific or group-and-source-specific query message, and starts a timer. If no reports are received before the timer expires, the group record is deleted, and a report is sent to the upstream multicast router.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping messages is not required and may be disabled using the no ip igmp snooping vlan mrd command. ◆ This command may also be used to disable multicast router solicitation messages when the upstream router does not support MRD, to reduce the loading on a busy upstream router, or when IGMP snooping is disabled in a VLAN. EXAMPLE This example disables sending of multicast router solicitation messages on VLAN 1.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping Rules Used for Proxy Reporting When IGMP Proxy Reporting is disabled, the switch will use a null IP address for the source of IGMP query and report messages unless a proxy query address has been set.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping ◆ This command applies when the switch is serving as the querier (page 1195), or as a proxy host when IGMP snooping proxy reporting is enabled (page 1194). EXAMPLE Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 query-interval 150 Console(config)# ip igmp This command configures the maximum time the system waits for a snooping vlan response to general queries. Use the no form to restore the default.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping ip igmp snooping This command adds a port to a multicast group. Use the no form to vlan static remove the port. SYNTAX [no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id static ip-address interface vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094) ip-address - IP address for multicast group interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping EXAMPLE Console#clear ip igmp snooping groups dynamic Console# clear ip igmp This command clears IGMP snooping statistics. snooping statistics SYNTAX clear ip igmp snooping statistics [interface interface] interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping EXAMPLE The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration: Console#show ip igmp snooping IGMP Snooping Router Port Expire Time Router Alert Check Router Port Mode TCN Flood TCN Query Solicit Unregistered Data Flood 802.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping sort-by-port - Display entries sorted by port. user - Display only the user-configured multicast entries. vlan-id - VLAN ID (1-4094) DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE Member types displayed include IGMP or USER, depending on selected options. EXAMPLE The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for VLAN 1.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping EXAMPLE The following shows the ports in VLAN 1 which are attached to multicast routers. Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 VLAN M'cast Router Ports Type Expire ---- ------------------- ------- -------1 Eth 1/4 Dynamic 0:4:28 1 Eth 1/10 Static Console# show ip igmp This command shows IGMP snooping protocol statistics for the specified snooping statistics interface.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping Table 152: show ip igmp snooping statistics input - display description Field Description Interface Shows interface. Report The number of IGMP membership reports received on this interface. Leave The number of leave messages received on this interface. G Query The number of general query messages received on this interface. G(-S)-S Query The number of group specific or group-and-source specific query messages received on this interface.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands Static Multicast Routing Table 154: show ip igmp snooping statistics vlan query - display description Field Description Querier IP Address The IP address of the querier on this interface. Querier Expire Time The time after which this querier is assumed to have expired. General Query Received The number of general queries received on this interface. General Query Sent The number of general queries sent from this interface.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Filtering and Throttling COMMAND USAGE ◆ Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router or switch connected over the network to an interface (port or trunk) on this switch, that interface can be manually configured to join all the current multicast groups.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Filtering and Throttling Table 156: IGMP Filtering and Throttling Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode show ip igmp profile Displays IGMP profiles and settings PE show ip igmp query-drop Shows if the interface is configured to drop IGMP query PE packets show ip igmp throttle interface Displays the IGMP throttling setting for interfaces PE show ip multicast-data-drop Shows if the interface is configured to drop multicast data packets PE ip i
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Filtering and Throttling ip igmp profile This command creates an IGMP filter profile number and enters IGMP profile configuration mode. Use the no form to delete a profile number. SYNTAX [no] ip igmp profile profile-number profile-number - An IGMP filter profile number. (Range: 1-4294967295) DEFAULT SETTING Disabled COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE A profile defines the multicast groups that a subscriber is permitted or denied to join.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Filtering and Throttling EXAMPLE Console(config)#ip igmp profile 19 Console(config-igmp-profile)#permit Console(config-igmp-profile)# range This command specifies multicast group addresses for a profile. Use the no form to delete addresses from a profile. SYNTAX [no] range low-ip-address [high-ip-address] low-ip-address - A valid IP address of a multicast group or start of a group range.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Filtering and Throttling COMMAND USAGE ◆ If IGMP authentication is enabled on an interface, and a join report is received on the interface, the switch will send an access request to the RADIUS server to perform authentication. ◆ Only when the RADIUS server responds with an authentication success message will the switch learn the group report.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Filtering and Throttling Table 157: IGMP Authentication RADIUS Attribute Value Pairs Attribute Name AVP Type Entry NAS_PORT 5 User Port Number FRAMED_IP_ADDRESS 8 Multicast Group ID EXAMPLE This example shows how to enable IGMP Authentication on all of the switch’s Ethernet interfaces.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Filtering and Throttling ip igmp max-groups This command sets the IGMP throttling number for an interface on the switch. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX ip igmp max-groups number no ip igmp max-groups number - The maximum number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Filtering and Throttling COMMAND USAGE When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the switch can take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace.” If the action is set to deny, any new IGMP join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Filtering and Throttling COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet) COMMAND USAGE This command can be used to stop multicast services from being forwarded to users attached to the downstream port (i.e., the interfaces specified by this command). EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#ip multicast-data-drop Console(config-if)# show ip igmp This command displays the interface settings for IGMP authentication.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Filtering and Throttling show ip igmp filter This command displays the global and interface settings for IGMP filtering. SYNTAX show ip igmp filter [interface interface] interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Filtering and Throttling Deny Range 239.1.1.1 239.1.1.1 Range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.100 Console# show ip igmp This command shows if the specified interface is configured to drop IGMP query-drop query packets. SYNTAX show ip igmp throttle interface [interface] interface ethernet unit/port unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Filtering and Throttling COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE Using this command without specifying an interface displays information for all interfaces. EXAMPLE Console#show ip igmp throttle interface ethernet 1/1 Eth 1/1 Information Status : TRUE Action : Deny Max Multicast Groups : 32 Current Multicast Groups : 0 Console# show ip This command shows if the specified interface is configured to drop multicast-data-drop multicast data packets.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Snooping MLD SNOOPING Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping operates on IPv6 traffic and performs a similar function to IGMP snooping for IPv4. That is, MLD snooping dynamically configures switch ports to limit IPv6 multicast traffic so that it is forwarded only to ports with users that want to receive it. This reduces the flooding of IPv6 multicast packets in the specified VLANs. There are two versions of the MLD protocol, version 1 and version 2.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Snooping ipv6 mld snooping This command enables MLD Snooping globally on the switch. Use the no form to disable MLD Snooping. SYNTAX [no] ipv6 mld snooping DEFAULT SETTING Disabled COMMAND MODE Global Configuration EXAMPLE The following example enables MLD Snooping: Console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping Console(config)# ipv6 mld snooping This command allows the switch to act as the querier for MLDv2 snooping. querier Use the no form to disable this feature.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Snooping ipv6 mld snooping This command configures the interval between sending MLD general query-interval queries. Use the no form to restore the default. SYNTAX ipv6 mld snooping query-interval interval no ipv6 mld snooping query-interval interval - The interval between sending MLD general queries.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Snooping EXAMPLE Console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping query-max-response-time seconds 15 Console(config)# ipv6 mld snooping This command configures the MLD Snooping robustness variable. Use the robustness no form to restore the default value. SYNTAX ipv6 mld snooping robustness value no ipv6 mld snooping robustness value - The number of the robustness variable.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Snooping COMMAND USAGE The router port expire time is the time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port (i.e., the interface that had been receiving query packets) to have expired. EXAMPLE Console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping router-port-expire-time 300 Console(config)# ipv6 mld snooping This command sets the action for dealing with unknown multicast packets. unknown-multicast Use the no form to restore the default.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Snooping ipv6 mld snooping This command configures the MLD snooping version. Use the no form to version restore the default. SYNTAX ipv6 mld snooping version {1 | 2} 1 - MLD version 1. 2 - MLD version 2.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Snooping Console(config)#interface vlan 1 Console(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave Console(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping This command statically configures an IPv6 multicast router port. Use the vlan mrouter no form to remove the configuration. SYNTAX [no] ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter interface vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094) interface ethernet unit/port unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Snooping ipv6-address - An IPv6 address of a multicast group. (Format: X:X:X:X::X) interface ethernet unit/port unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Snooping clear ipv6 mld This command clears MLD snooping statistics. snooping statistics SYNTAX clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics [interface interface] interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Snooping show ipv6 mld This command shows known multicast groups, member ports, and the snooping group means by which each group was learned.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Filtering and Throttling Option: Filter Mode: Include, Exclude Console# show ipv6 mld This command shows MLD Snooping multicast router information. snooping mrouter SYNTAX show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter vlan vlan-id vlan-id - A VLAN identification number.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Filtering and Throttling Table 159: IGMP Filtering and Throttling Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode ipv6 multicast-data-drop Enable multicast data guard mode on a port interface IC show ipv6 mld filter Displays the MLD filtering status PE show ipv6 mld profile Displays MLD profiles and settings PE show ipv6 mld query-drop Shows if the interface is configured to drop MLD query packets PE show ipv6 mld throttle interface Displays the MLD t
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Filtering and Throttling ipv6 mld profile This command creates an MLD filter profile number and enters MLD profile configuration mode. Use the no form to delete a profile number. SYNTAX [no] ipv6 mld profile profile-number profile-number - An MLD filter profile number. (Range: 1-4294967295) DEFAULT SETTING Disabled COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE A profile defines the multicast groups that a subscriber is permitted or denied to join.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Filtering and Throttling EXAMPLE Console(config)#ipv6 mld profile 19 Console(config-mld-profile)#permit Console(config-mld-profile)# range This command specifies multicast group addresses for a profile. Use the no form to delete addresses from a profile. SYNTAX [no] range low-ipv6-address [high-ipv6-address] low-ipv6-address - A valid IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of a multicast group or start of a group range.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Filtering and Throttling COMMAND USAGE ◆ The MLD filtering profile must first be created with the ipv6 mld profile command before being able to assign it to an interface. ◆ Only one profile can be assigned to an interface. ◆ A profile can also be assigned to a trunk interface. When ports are configured as trunk members, the trunk uses the filtering profile assigned to the first port member in the trunk.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Filtering and Throttling EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#ipv6 mld max-groups 10 Console(config-if)# ipv6 mld This command sets the MLD throttling action for an interface on the switch. max-groups action SYNTAX ipv6 mld max-groups action {deny | replace} deny - The new multicast group join report is dropped. replace - The new multicast group replaces an existing group.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Filtering and Throttling COMMAND USAGE This command can be used to drop any query packets received on the specified interface. If this switch is acting as a Querier, this prevents it from being affected by messages received from another Querier. EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#ipv6 mld query-drop Console(config-if)# ipv6 Use this command to enable multicast data guard mode on a port multicast-data-drop interface.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Filtering and Throttling EXAMPLE Console#show ipv6 mld filter MLD filter Enabled Console#show ipv6 mld filter interface ethernet 1/3 Ethernet 1/3 information --------------------------------MLD Profile 19 Deny Range ff05::101 ff05::103 Console# show ipv6 mld This command displays MLD filtering profiles created on the switch. profile SYNTAX show ipv6 mld profile [profile-number] profile-number - An existing MLD filter profile number.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MLD Filtering and Throttling DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE Using this command without specifying an interface displays all interfaces. EXAMPLE Console#show ipv6 mld query-drop interface ethernet 1/1 Ethernet 1/1: Enabled Console# show ipv6 mld This command displays the interface settings for MLD throttling.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 MVR FOR IPV4 This section describes commands used to configure Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 (MVR). A single network-wide VLAN can be used to transmit multicast traffic (such as television channels) across a service provider’s network. Any multicast traffic entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all subscribers.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 Table 160: Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode show mvr interface Shows MVR settings for interfaces attached to the MVR PE VLAN show mvr members Shows information about the current number of entries in the forwarding database, or detailed information about a specific multicast address PE show mvr profile Shows all configured MVR profiles PE show mvr statistics Shows MVR protocol statistics for the
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 COMMAND MODE Global Configuration EXAMPLE The following an MVR group address profile to domain 1: Console(config)#mvr domain 1 associated-profile rd Console(config)# RELATED COMMANDS mvr profile (1249) mvr domain This command enables Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) for a specific domain. Use the no form of this command to disable MVR for a domain. SYNTAX [no] mvr domain domain-id domain-id - An independent multicast domain.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 DEFAULT SETTING Disabled COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE This command can be used to set a high priority for low-latency multicast traffic such as a video-conference, or to set a low priority for normal multicast traffic not sensitive to latency. EXAMPLE Console(config)#mvr priority 6 Console(config)# RELATED COMMANDS show mvr mvr profile This command maps a range of MVR group addresses to a profile.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 ◆ IGMP snooping and MVR share a maximum number of 1024 groups. Any multicast streams received in excess of this limitation will be flooded to all ports in the associated domain. EXAMPLE The following example maps a range of MVR group addresses to a profile: Console(config)#mvr profile rd 228.1.23.1 228.1.23.10 Console(config)# mvr proxy- This command configures the interval at which the receiver port sends out query-interval general queries.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ When MVR proxy-switching is enabled, an MVR source port serves as the upstream or host interface. The source port performs only the host portion of MVR by sending summarized membership reports, and automatically disables MVR router functions. ◆ Receiver ports are known as downstream or router interfaces.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 mvr This command configures the expected packet loss, and thereby the robustness-value number of times to generate report and group-specific queries. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX mvr robustness-value value no mvr robustness-value value - The robustness used for all interfaces.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 streams are sent to all source ports on the switch and to all receiver ports that have elected to receive data on that multicast address. ◆ When the mvr source-port-mode dynamic command is used, the switch only forwards multicast streams which the source port has dynamically joined. In other words, both the receiver port and source port must subscribe to a multicast group before a multicast stream is forwarded to any attached client.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 mvr vlan This command specifies the VLAN through which MVR multicast data is received. Use the no form of this command to restore the default MVR VLAN. SYNTAX mvr [domain domain-id] vlan vlan-id no mvr [domain domain-id] vlan domain-id - An independent multicast domain. (Range: 1-5) vlan-id - Specifies the VLAN through which MVR multicast data is received. This is also the VLAN to which all source ports must be assigned.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 DEFAULT SETTING Disabled COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE ◆ Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports. When enabled, the receiver port is immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave message.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 DEFAULT SETTING The port type is not defined. COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE ◆ A port which is not configured as an MVR receiver or source port can use IGMP snooping to join or leave multicast groups using the standard rules for multicast filtering. ◆ Receiver ports can belong to different VLANs, but should not normally be configured as a member of the MVR VLAN.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 group - Defines a multicast service sent to the selected port. ip-address - Statically configures an interface to receive multicast traffic from the IPv4 address specified for an MVR multicast group. (Range: 224.0.1.0 - 239.255.255.255) DEFAULT SETTING No receiver port is a member of any configured multicast group.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 Example Console#clear mrv groups dynamic Console# clear mrv statistics This command clears MRV statistics. SYNTAX clear mrv statistics [interface interface] interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 MVR Robustness Value MVR Proxy Query Interval MVR Source Port Mode MVR MVR MVR MVR MVR MVR . . . Domain Config Status Running Status Multicast VLAN Current Learned Groups Upstream Source IP : 1 : 125(sec.) : Always Forward : : : : : : 1 Enabled Active 1 10 192.168.0.3 Table 161: show mvr - display description Field Description MVR 802.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 EXAMPLE The following displays the profiles bound to domain 1: Console#show mvr domain 1 associated-profile Domain ID : 1 MVR Profile Name Start IP Addr. End IP Addr. -------------------- --------------- --------------rd 228.1.23.1 228.1.23.10 testing 228.2.23.1 228.2.23.10 Console# show mvr interface This command shows MVR configuration settings for interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 Table 162: show mvr interface - display description (Continued) Field Description Status Shows the MVR status and interface status. MVR status for source ports is “ACTIVE” if MVR is globally enabled on the switch. MVR status for receiver ports is “ACTIVE” only if there are subscribers receiving multicast traffic from one of the MVR groups, or a multicast group has been statically assigned to an interface.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 EXAMPLE The following shows information about the number of multicast forwarding entries currently active in domain 1: Console#show mvr domain 1 members MVR Domain : 1 MVR Forwarding Entry Count :1 Flag: S - Source port, R - Receiver port. H - Host counts (number of hosts joined to group on this port). P - Port counts (number of ports joined to group). Up time: Group elapsed time (d:h:m:s). Expire : Group remaining time (m:s).
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 show mvr profile This command shows all configured MVR profiles. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE The following shows all configured MVR profiles: Console#show mvr profile MVR Profile Name Start IP Addr. End IP Addr. -------------------- --------------- --------------rd 228.1.23.1 228.1.23.10 testing 228.2.23.1 228.2.23.10 Console# show mvr statistics This command shows MVR protocol-related statistics for the specified interface.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 EXAMPLE The following shows MVR protocol-related statistics received: Console#show mvr domain 1 statistics input MVR Domain : 1 , MVR VLAN: 2 Input Statistics: Interface Report Leave G Query G(-S)-S Query Drop Join Succ Group --------- -------- -------- -------- ------------- -------- --------- -----Eth 1/ 1 23 11 4 10 5 20 9 Eth 1/ 2 12 15 8 3 5 19 4 DVLAN 1 2 0 0 2 2 20 9 MVLAN 1 2 0 0 2 2 20 9 Console# Table 164: show mvr statistics input - displa
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 Table 165: show mvr statistics output - display description (Continued) Field Description G Query The number of general query messages sent from this interface. G(-S)-S Query The number of group specific or group-and-source specific query messages sent from this interface.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 The following shows MVR summary statistics for an interface: Console#show mvr domain 1 statistics summary interface ethernet 1/1 Domain 1: Number of Groups: 0 Querier: : Report & Leave: : Transmit : Transmit : General : 0 Report : 7 Group Specific : 0 Leave : 4 Recieved : Recieved : General : 0 Report : 0 Group Specific : 0 Leave : 0 V1 Warning Count: 0 Join Success : 0 V2 Warning Count: 0 Filter Drop : 0 V3 Warning Count: 0 Source Port Drop: 0 Others
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv4 The following shows MVR summary statistics for the MVR VLAN: Console#show mvr domain 1 statistics summary interface mvr-vlan Domain 1: Number of Groups: 0 Querier: : Report & Leave: : Other Querier : None Host IP Addr : 192.168.0.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 Table 168: show mvr statistics summary interface mvr vlan - description Field Description Transmit Report Number of reports sent out from source port. Leave Number of leaves sent out from source port. Received Field header Report Number of reports received. Leave Number of leaves received. Join Success Number of join reports processed successfully. Filter Drop Number of report/leave messages dropped by IGMP filter.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 Table 169: Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode mvr6 immediate-leave Enables immediate leave capability IC mvr6 type Configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port IC mvr6 vlan group Statically binds a multicast group to a port IC clear mvr6 groups dynamic Clears multicast group information dynamically learned through MVR6 PE clear mvr6 statistics Clears the MVR statistics globally o
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 EXAMPLE The following an MVR6 group address profile to domain 1: Console(config)#mvr6 domain 1 associated-profile rd Console(config)# mvr6 domain This command enables Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) for a specific domain. Use the no form of this command to disable MVR for a domain. SYNTAX [no] mvr6 domain domain-id domain-id - An independent multicast domain.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 DEFAULT SETTING No profiles are defined COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ Use this command to statically configure all multicast group addresses that will join the MVR VLAN. Any multicast data associated with an MVR group is sent from all source ports, and to all receiver ports that have registered to receive data from that multicast group. ◆ IGMP snooping and MVR share a maximum number of 1024 groups.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 COMMAND USAGE This command sets the general query interval at which active receiver ports send out general queries. This interval is only effective when proxy switching is enabled with the mvr6 proxy-switching command. EXAMPLE This example sets the proxy query interval for MVR6.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 ◆ When MVR proxy switching is disabled: ■ Any membership reports received from receiver/source ports are forwarded to all source ports. ■ When a source port receives a query message, it will be forwarded to all downstream receiver ports. ■ When a receiver port receives a query message, it will be dropped. EXAMPLE The following example enable MVR6 proxy switching.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 mvr6 This command configures the switch to only forward multicast streams source-port-mode which the source port has dynamcially joined. Use the no form to restore dynamic the default setting. SYNTAX [no] mvr6 source-port-mode dynamic DEFAULT SETTING Forwards all multicast streams which have been specified in a profile and bound to a domain.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE All IPv6 addresses must be according to RFC 2373 “IPv6 Addressing Architecture,” using 8 colon-separated 16-bit hexadecimal values. One double colon may be used in the address to indicate the appropriate number of zeros required to fill the undefined fields. (Note that the IP address ff02::X is reserved.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 mvr6 This command causes the switch to immediately remove an interface from immediate-leave a multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group. Use the no form to restore the default settings. SYNTAX [no] mvr6 domain domain-id immediate-leave domain-id - An independent multicast domain.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 source - Configures the interface as an uplink port that can send and receive multicast data for the configured multicast groups. Note that the source port must be manually configured as a member of the MVR6 VLAN using the switchport allowed vlan command. DEFAULT SETTING The port type is not defined.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 mvr6 vlan group This command statically binds a multicast group to a port which will receive long-term multicast streams associated with a stable set of hosts. Use the no form to restore the default settings. SYNTAX [no] mvr6 domain domain-id vlan vlan-id group ip-address domain-id - An independent multicast domain. (Range: 1-5) vlan-id - Receiver VLAN to which the specified multicast traffic is flooded.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 clear mvr6 groups This command clears multicast group information dynamically learned dynamic through MVR6. SYNTAX clear mvr6 groups dynamic [domain domain-id] domain-id - An independent multicast domain. (Range: 1-5) COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE This command only clears entries learned though MVR6. Statically configured multicast addresses are not cleared.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 show mvr6 This command shows information about MVR domain settings, including MVR operational status, the multicast VLAN, the current number of group addresses, and the upstream source IP address. SYNTAX show mvr6 [domain domain-id] domain-id - An independent multicast domain. (Range: 1-5) DEFAULT SETTING Displays configuration settings for all MVR domains.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 Table 170: show mvr6 - display description (Continued) Field Description MVR6 Multicast VLAN Shows the VLAN used to transport all MVR multicast traffic. MVR6 Upstream Source IP The source IP address assigned to all upstream control packets. show mvr6 This command shows the profiles bound the specified domain. associated-profile SYNTAX show mvr6 [domain domain-id] associated-profile domain-id - An independent multicast domain.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 EXAMPLE The following displays information about the interfaces attached to the MVR6 VLAN in domain 1: Console#show mvr6 domain 1 interface MVR6 Domain : 1 Port Type Status Immediate Leave Static Group Address -------- -------- ------------------- ---------------- --------------------Eth1/ 1 Source Active/Forwarding Eth1/ 2 Receiver Active/Forwarding Disabled ff00::1(VLAN2) Console# Table 171: show mvr6 interface - display description Field Descript
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 EXAMPLE The following shows information about the number of multicast forwarding entries currently active in domain 1: Console#show mvr6 domain 1 members MVR6 Domain : 1 MVR6 Forwarding Entry Count :1 Flag: S - Source port, R - Receiver port. H - Host counts (number of hosts join the group on this port). P - Port counts (number of forwarding ports). Up time: Group elapsed time (d:h:m:s). Expire : Group remaining time (m:s).
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 show mvr6 profile This command shows all configured MVR profiles. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE The following shows all configured MVR6 profiles: Console#show mvr6 profile MVR Profile Name Start IPv6 Addr. End IPv6 Addr. -------------------- ------------------------- ------------------------rd ff01::fe ff01::ff Console# show mvr6 This command shows MVR protocol-related statistics for the specified statistics interface.
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 EXAMPLE The following shows MVR6 protocol-related statistics received: Console#show mvr6 domain 1 statistics input MVR6 Domain 1, MVR6 VLAN 2: Input Statistics: Interface Report Leave G Query G(-S)-S Query Drop Join Succ Group --------- -------- -------- -------- ------------- -------- --------- -----Eth 1/ 1 23 11 4 10 5 20 9 Eth 1/ 2 12 15 8 3 5 19 4 DVLAN 1 2 0 0 2 2 20 9 MVLAN 2 2 0 0 2 2 20 9 Console# Table 173: show mvr6 statistics input - disp
CHAPTER 38 | Multicast Filtering Commands MVR for IPv6 Table 174: show mvr6 statistics output - display description (Continued) Field Description G(-S)-S Query The number of group specific or group-and-source specific query messages sent from this interface. Group The number of MVR groups active on this interface.
39 LLDP COMMANDS Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain. LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device. Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value (TLV) format according to the IEEE 802.1AB standard, and can include details such as device identification, capabilities and configuration settings.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands Table 176: LLDP Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode lldp basic-tlv system-name Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its IC system name lldp dot1-tlv proto-ident* Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the supported protocols IC lldp dot1-tlv proto-vid* Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise port-based protocol related VLAN information IC lldp dot1-tlv pvid* Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its IC default VLAN ID lldp dot1-tlv vla
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands lldp This command enables LLDP globally on the switch. Use the no form to disable LLDP. SYNTAX [no] lldp DEFAULT SETTING Enabled COMMAND MODE Global Configuration EXAMPLE Console(config)#lldp Console(config)# lldp This command configures the time-to-live (TTL) value sent in LLDP holdtime-multiplier advertisements. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands lldp This command specifies the amount of MED Fast Start LLDPDUs to transmit med-fast-start-count during the activation process of the LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX lldp med-fast-start-count packets seconds - Amount of packets.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands time of a notification are included in the transmission. An SNMP agent should therefore periodically check the value of lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime to detect any lldpRemTablesChange notification-events missed due to throttling or transmission loss. EXAMPLE Console(config)#lldp notification-interval 30 Console(config)# lldp refresh-interval This command configures the periodic transmit interval for LLDP advertisements. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands COMMAND USAGE When LLDP is re-initialized on a port, all information in the remote systems LLDP MIB associated with this port is deleted. EXAMPLE Console(config)#lldp reinit-delay 10 Console(config)# lldp tx-delay This command configures a delay between the successive transmission of advertisements initiated by a change in local LLDP MIB variables. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands lldp admin-status This command enables LLDP transmit, receive, or transmit and receive mode on the specified port. Use the no form to disable this feature. SYNTAX lldp admin-status {rx-only | tx-only | tx-rx} no lldp admin-status rx-only - Only receive LLDP PDUs. tx-only - Only transmit LLDP PDUs. tx-rx - Both transmit and receive LLDP Protocol Data Units (PDUs).
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands enterprise specific or other starting points for the search, such as the Interface or Entity MIB. ◆ Since there are typically a number of different addresses associated with a Layer 3 device, an individual LLDP PDU may contain more than one management address TLV.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands lldp basic-tlv This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its system system-capabilities capabilities. Use the no form to disable this feature. SYNTAX [no] lldp basic-tlv system-capabilities DEFAULT SETTING Enabled COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE The system capabilities identifies the primary function(s) of the system and whether or not these primary functions are enabled.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands lldp basic-tlv This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the system system-name name. Use the no form to disable this feature. SYNTAX [no] lldp basic-tlv system-name DEFAULT SETTING Enabled COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE The system name is taken from the sysName object in RFC 3418, which contains the system’s administratively assigned name, and is in turn based on the hostname command.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands lldp dot1-tlv This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise port-based proto-vid protocol VLAN information. Use the no form to disable this feature. SYNTAX [no] lldp dot1-tlv proto-vid DEFAULT SETTING Enabled COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE This option advertises the port-based protocol VLANs configured on this interface (see "Configuring Protocol-based VLANs" on page 1143).
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands lldp dot1-tlv This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its VLAN vlan-name name. Use the no form to disable this feature. SYNTAX [no] lldp dot1-tlv vlan-name DEFAULT SETTING Enabled COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE This option advertises the name of all VLANs to which this interface has been assigned. See "switchport allowed vlan" on page 1126 and "protocolvlan protocol-group (Configuring Interfaces)" on page 1144.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands lldp dot3-tlv This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its MAC and mac-phy physical layer capabilities. Use the no form to disable this feature. SYNTAX [no] lldp dot3-tlv mac-phy DEFAULT SETTING Enabled COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE This option advertises MAC/PHY configuration/status which includes information about auto-negotiation support/capabilities, and operational Multistation Access Unit (MAU) type.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands lldp med-location This command configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its civic-addr location identification details. Use the no form to restore the default settings. SYNTAX lldp med-location civic-addr [[country country-code] | [what device-type] | [ca-type ca-value]] no lldp med-location civic-addr [[country] | [what] | [ca-type]] country-code – The two-letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands Table 177: LLDP MED Location CA Types (Continued) CA Type Description CA Value Example 18 Street suffix or type Avenue 19 House number 320 20 House number suffix A 21 Landmark or vanity address Tech Center 26 Unit (apartment, suite) Apt 519 27 Floor 5 28 Room 509B Any number of CA type and value pairs can be specified for the civic address location, as long as the total does not exceed 250 characters.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands COMMAND USAGE ◆ This option sends out SNMP trap notifications to designated target stations at the interval specified by the lldp notification-interval command. Trap notifications include information about state changes in the LLDP MIB (IEEE 802.1AB), the LLDP-MED MIB (ANSI/TIA 1057), or organization-specific LLDP-EXT-DOT1 and LLDP-EXT-DOT3 MIBs. ◆ SNMP trap destinations are defined using the snmp-server host command.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands lldp med-tlv location This command configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its location identification details. Use the no form to disable this feature. SYNTAX [no] lldp med-tlv location DEFAULT SETTING Enabled COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE This option advertises location identification details.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands lldp med-tlv This command configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its network-policy network policy configuration. Use the no form to disable this feature. SYNTAX [no] lldp med-tlv network-policy DEFAULT SETTING Enabled COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE This option advertises network policy configuration information, aiding in the discovery and diagnosis of VLAN configuration mismatches on a port.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands An SNMP agent should therefore periodically check the value of lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime to detect any lldpRemTablesChange notification-events missed due to throttling or transmission loss. EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#lldp notification Console(config-if)# show lldp config This command shows LLDP configuration settings for all ports. SYNTAX show lldp config [detail interface] detail - Shows configuration summary.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands 802.1 specific TLVs Advertised : 802.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands LLDP Local Port Information Port Port ID Type Port ID Port Description -------- ---------------- ----------------- --------------------------------Eth 1/1 MAC Address 70-72-CF-6E-F2-B1 Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 1 Eth 1/2 MAC Address 70-72-CF-6E-F2-B2 Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 2 Eth 1/3 MAC Address 70-72-CF-6E-F2-B3 Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 3 Eth 1/4 MAC Address 70-72-CF-6E-F2-B4 Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 4 . . .
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands Port ID Type Port ID Time To Live Port Description System Description System Capabilities Enabled Capabilities : : : : : : : MAC Address 70-72-CF-18-B7-E1 120 seconds Ethernet Port on unit 0, port 1 ECS3510-28T Bridge Bridge Management Address : 192.168.0.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands Power Source Power Priority Power Value Inventory : Hardware Revision Firmware Revision Software Revision Serial Number Manufacture Name Model Name Asset ID : Unknown : Unknown : 0 Watts : : : : : : : R0A 1.2.6.0 1.2.6.0 S123456 Prye VP101 340937 Console# show lldp info This command shows statistics based on traffic received through all statistics attached LLDP-enabled interfaces. SYNTAX show lldp info statistics [detail interface] detail - Shows configuration summary.
CHAPTER 39 | LLDP Commands Frames Sent TLVs Unrecognized TLVs Discarded Neighbor Ageouts : : : : 761 0 0 0 Console# – 1310 –
40 CFM COMMANDS Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) is an OAM protocol that includes proactive connectivity monitoring using continuity check messages, fault verification through loop back messages, and fault isolation by examining end-to-end connections between provider edge devices or between customer edge devices. CFM is implemented as a service level protocol based on service instances which encompass only that portion of the metropolitan area network supporting a specific customer.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Table 178: CFM Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode ethernet cfm mep Sets an interface as a domain boundary, defines it as a maintenance end point (MEP), and sets direction of the MEP in regard to sending and receiving CFM messages IC ethernet cfm port-enable Enables CFM processing on an interface IC clear ethernet cfm ais mpid Clears AIS defect information for the specified MEP PE show ethernet cfm configuration Displays CFM configuration settings, including gl
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Table 178: CFM Commands (Continued) Command Function Mode Link Trace Operations ethernet cfm linktrace cache Enables caching of CFM data learned through link trace GC messages ethernet cfm linktrace cache hold-time Sets the hold time for CFM link trace cache entries GC ethernet cfm linktrace cache size Sets the maximum size for the link trace cache GC ethernet cfm linktrace Sends CFM link trace messages to the MAC address for a MEP PE clear ethernet cfm linktrace-cac
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures 5. Enable CFM globally on the switch with the ethernet cfm enable command. 6. Enable CFM on the local MEPs with the ethernet cfm port-enable command. 7. Enable continuity check operations with the ethernet cfm cc enable command. 8. Enable cross-check operations with the ethernet cfm mep crosscheck command.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures EXAMPLE This example sets the maintenance level for sending AIS messages within the specified MA. Console(config)#ethernet cfm ais level 4 md voip ma rd Console(config)# ethernet cfm ais ma This command enables the MEPs within the specified MA to send frames with AIS information following detection of defect conditions. Use the no form to disable this feature. SYNTAX [no] ethernet cfm ais md domain-name ma ma-name domain-name – Domain name.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures ethernet cfm ais This command configures the interval at which AIS information is sent. Use period the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX ethernet cfm ais period period md domain-name ma ma-name no ethernet cfm ais period md domain-name ma ma-name period – The interval at which AIS information is sent. (Options: 1 second, 60 seconds) domain-name – Domain name. (Range: 1-43 alphanumeric characters) ma-name – Maintenance association name.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures COMMAND USAGE ◆ For multipoint connectivity, a MEP cannot determine the specific maintenance level entity that has encountered defect conditions upon receiving a frame with AIS information. More importantly, it cannot determine the associated subset of its peer MEPs for which it should suppress alarms since the received AIS information does not contain that information.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures pass, and only if a maintenance end point (MEP) is created at some lower MA Level. none – No MIP can be created for any MA configured in this domain. DEFAULT SETTING No maintenance domains are configured. No MIPs are created for any MA in the specified domain. COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ A domain can only be configured with one name.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures Also note that while MEPs are active agents which can initiate consistency check messages (CCMs), transmit loop back or link trace messages, and maintain the local CCM database. MIPs, on the other hand are passive agents which can only validate received CFM messages, and respond to loop back and link trace messages. The MIP creation method defined by the ma index name command takes precedence over the method defined by this command.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures ma index name This command creates a maintenance association (MA) within the current maintenance domain, maps it to a customer service instance (S-VLAN), and sets the manner in which MIPs are created for this service instance. Use the no form with the vlan keyword to remove the S-VLAN from the specified MA. Or use the no form with only the index keyword to remove the MA from the current domain.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures EXAMPLE This example creates a maintenance association, binds it to VLAN 1, and allows MIPs to be created within this MA using the default method. Console(config)#ethernet cfm domain index 1 name voip level 3 Console(config-ether-cfm)#ma index 1 name rd vlan 1 mip-creation default Console(config-ether-cfm)# ma index This command specifies the name format for the maintenance association name-format as IEEE 802.1ag character based, or ITU-T SG13/SG15 Y.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures ethernet cfm mep This command sets an interface as a domain boundary, defines it as a maintenance end point (MEP), and sets direction of the MEP in regard to sending and receiving CFM messages. Use the no form to delete a MEP. SYNTAX ethernet cfm mep mpid mpid md domain-name ma ma-name [up] no ethernet cfm mep mpid mpid ma ma-name mpid – Maintenance end point identifier. (Range: 1-8191) domain-name – Domain name.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures ethernet cfm This command enables CFM processing on an interface. Use the no form to port-enable disable CFM processing on an interface. SYNTAX [no] ethernet cfm port-enable DEFAULT SETTING Enabled COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) COMMAND USAGE ◆ An interface must be enabled before a MEP can be created with the ethernet cfm mep command.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures COMMAND USAGE This command can be used to clear AIS defect entries if a MEP does not exit the AIS state when all errors are resolved. EXAMPLE This example clears AIS defect entries on port 1. Console#clear ethernet cfm ais mpid 1 md voip ma rd Console(config)# show ethernet cfm This command displays CFM configuration settings, including global configuration settings, SNMP traps, and interface settings.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures This example shows the configuration status for continuity check and cross-check traps.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures show ethernet cfm This command displays the configured maintenance domains. md SYNTAX show ethernet cfm md [level level] level – Maintenance level. (Range: 0-7) DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE This example shows all configured maintenance domains. Console#show ethernet cfm md MD Index MD Name -------- -------------------1 rd Console# Level ----0 MIP Creation -----------default Archive Hold Time (m.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures show ethernet cfm This command displays the maintenance points configured on this device. maintenance-points local SYNTAX show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local {mep [domain domain-name | interface interface | level level-id] | mip [domain domain-name | level level-id]} mep – Displays only local maintenance end points. mip – Displays only local maintenance intermediate points. domain-name – Domain name.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures show ethernet cfm This command displays detailed CFM information about a local MEP in the maintenance-points continuity check database. local detail mep SYNTAX show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local detail mep [domain domain-name | interface interface | level level-id] domain-name – Domain name. (Range: 1-43 alphanumeric characters) interface – Displays CFM status for the specified interface. ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures Table 180: show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local detail mep - display Field Description MPID MEP identifier MD Name The maintenance domain for this entry.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Defining CFM Structures ma-name – Maintenance association name. (Range: 1-43 alphanumeric characters) DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE Use the mpid keyword with this command to display information about a specific maintenance point, or use the mac keyword to display information about all maintenance points that have the specified MAC address. EXAMPLE This example shows detailed information about the remote MEP designated by MPID 2.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Continuity Check Operations Table 181: show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote detail - display Field Description Port State Port states include: Up – The port is functioning normally. Blocked – The port has been blocked by the Spanning Tree Protocol. No port state – Either no CCM has been received, or nor port status TLV was received in the last CCM.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Continuity Check Operations is registered. The interval at which CCMs are issued should therefore be configured to detect connectivity problems in a timely manner, as dictated by the nature and size of the MA. ◆ The maintenance of a MIP CCM database by a MIP presents some difficulty for bridges carrying a large number of Service Instances, and for whose MEPs are issuing CCMs at a high frequency. For this reason, slower CCM transmission rates may have to be used.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Continuity Check Operations ◆ If a maintenance point receives a CCM with an invalid MEPID or MA level or an MA level lower than its own, a failure is registered which indicates a configuration error or cross-connect error (i.e., overlapping MAs). EXAMPLE This example enables continuity check messages for the specified maintenance association.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Continuity Check Operations EXAMPLE This example enables SNMP traps for mep-up events. Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps ethernet cfm cc mep-up Console(config)# RELATED COMMANDS ethernet cfm mep crosscheck (1339) mep This command sets the time that data from a missing MEP is retained in archive-hold-time the continuity check message (CCM) database before being purged. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Continuity Check Operations DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE Use this command without any keywords to clear all entries in the CCM database. Use the domain keyword to clear the CCM database for a specific domain, or the level keyword to clear it for a specific maintenance level.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Continuity Check Operations show ethernet cfm This command displays the CFM continuity check errors logged on this errors device. SYNTAX show ethernet cfm errors [domain domain-name | level level-id] domain-name – Domain name. (Range: 1-43 alphanumeric characters) level-id – Authorized maintenance level for this domain.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Cross Check Operations Cross Check Operations ethernet cfm mep This command sets the maximum delay that a device waits for remote crosscheck MEPs to come up before starting the cross-check operation. Use the no start-delay form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX ethernet cfm mep crosscheck start-delay delay delay – The time a device waits for remote MEPs to come up before the cross-check is started.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Cross Check Operations mep-unknown – Sends a trap if an unconfigured MEP comes up. DEFAULT SETTING All continuity checks are enabled. COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ For this trap type to function, cross-checking must be enabled on the required maintenance associations using the ethernet cfm mep crosscheck command.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Cross Check Operations COMMAND USAGE ◆ Use this command to statically configure remote MEPs that exist inside the maintenance association. These remote MEPs are used in the crosscheck operation to verify that all endpoints in the specified MA are operational. ◆ Remote MEPs can only be configured with this command if domain service access points (DSAPs) have already been created with the ethernet cfm mep command at the same maintenance level and in the same MA.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Link Trace Operations ◆ The cross-check process is disabled by default, and must be manually started using this command with the enable keyword. EXAMPLE This example enables cross-checking within the specified maintenance association. Console#ethernet cfm mep crosscheck enable md voip ma rd Console# show ethernet cfm This command displays information about remote MEPs statically maintenance-points configured in a cross-check list.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Link Trace Operations COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ A link trace message is a multicast CFM frame initiated by a MEP, and forwarded from MIP to MIP, with each MIP generating a link trace reply, up to the point at which the link trace message reaches its destination or can no longer be forwarded. ◆ Use this command to enable the link trace cache to store the results of link trace operations initiated on this device.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Link Trace Operations EXAMPLE This example sets the aging time for entries in the link trace cache to 60 minutes. Console(config)#ethernet cfm linktrace cache hold-time 60 Console(config)# ethernet cfm This command sets the maximum size for the link trace cache. Use the no linktrace cache size form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX ethernet cfm linktrace cache size entries entries – The number of link trace responses stored in the link trace cache.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Link Trace Operations ethernet cfm This command sends CFM link trace messages to the MAC address of a linktrace remote MEP. SYNTAX ethernet cfm linktrace {dest-mep destination-mpid | src-mep source-mpid {dest-mep destination-mpid | mac-address} | mac-address} md domain-name ma ma-name [ttl number] destination-mpid – The identifier of a remote MEP that is the target of the link trace message.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Link Trace Operations When using the command line or web interface, the source MEP used by to send a link trace message is chosen by the CFM protocol. However, when using SNMP, the source MEP can be specified by the user. ◆ EXAMPLE This example sends a link trace message to the specified MEP with a maximum hop count of 25. Console#linktrace ethernet dest-mep 2 md voip ma rd ttl 25 Console# clear ethernet cfm This command clears link trace messages logged on this device.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Loopback Operations Table 183: show ethernet cfm linktrace-cache - display description Field Description Ing. Action Action taken on the ingress port: IngOk – The target data frame passed through to the MAC Relay Entity. IngDown – The bridge port’s MAC_Operational parameter is false.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Fault Generator Operations transmit-count – The number of times the loopback message is sent. (Range: 1-1024) packet-size – The size of the loopback message. (Range: 64-1518 bytes) DEFAULT SETTING Loop back count: One loopback message is sent. Loop back size: 64 bytes COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE ◆ Use this command to test the connectivity between maintenance points.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Fault Generator Operations DEFAULT SETTING 3 seconds COMMAND MODE CFM Domain Configuration COMMAND USAGE A fault alarm is issued when the MEP fault notification generator state machine detects that a time period configured by this command has passed with one or more defects indicated, and fault alarms are enabled at or above the priority level set by the mep fault-notify lowest-priority command. EXAMPLE This example set the delay time before generating a fault alarm.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Fault Generator Operations notification generator state machine has been reset, and repeat those steps until the fault is resolved. ◆ Only the highest priority defect currently detected is reported in the fault alarm. ◆ Priority defects include the following items: Table 184: Remote MEP Priority Levels Priority Level Level Name Description 1 allDef All defects. 2 macRemErrXcon DefMACstatus, DefRemoteCCM, DefErrorCCM, or DefXconCCM.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Fault Generator Operations mep fault-notify This command configures the time after a fault alarm has been issued, and reset-time no defect exists, before another fault alarm can be issued. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX mep fault-notify reset-time reset-time no fault-notify reset-time reset-time – The time that must pass without any further defects indicated before another fault alarm can be generated.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Delay Measure Operations Table 186: show fault-notify-generator - display description Field Description MD Name The maintenance domain for this entry. MA Name The maintenance association for this entry. Hihest Defect The highest defect that will generate a fault alarm. (This is disabled by default.) Lowest Alarm The lowest defect that will generate a fault alarm (see the mep faultnotify lowest-priority command).
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Delay Measure Operations Size: 64 bytes Timeout: 5 seconds COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE ◆ Delay measurement can be used to measure frame delay and frame delay variation between MEPs. ◆ A local MEP must be configured for the same MA before you can use this command. ◆ If a MEP is enabled to generate frames with delay measurement (DM) information, it periodically sends DM frames to its peer MEP in the same MA., and expects to receive DM frames back from it.
CHAPTER 40 | CFM Commands Delay Measure Operations – 1352 –
41 OAM COMMANDS The switch provides OAM (Operation, Administration, and Maintenance) remote management tools required to monitor and maintain the links to subscriber CPEs (Customer Premise Equipment). This section describes functions including enabling OAM for selected ports, loop back testing, and displaying device information.
CHAPTER 41 | OAM Commands efm oam This command enables OAM functions on the specified port. Use the no form to disable this function. SYNTAX [no] efm oam DEFAULT SETTING Disabled COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ If the remote device also supports OAM, both exchange Information OAMPDUs to establish an OAM link. ◆ Not all CPEs support OAM functions, and OAM is therefore disabled by default.
CHAPTER 41 | OAM Commands detected, fan failure, CRC error in flash memory, insufficient memory, or other hardware faults. ◆ Dying gasp events are caused by an unrecoverable failure, such as a power failure or device reset. NOTE: When system power fails, the switch will always send a dying gasp trap message prior to power down.
CHAPTER 41 | OAM Commands efm oam This command sets the threshold for errored frame link events. Use the no link-monitor form to restore the default setting. frame threshold SYNTAX efm oam link-monitor frame threshold count no efm oam link-monitor frame threshold count - The threshold for errored frame link events.
CHAPTER 41 | OAM Commands (page 1356) is reached or exceeded within the period specified by this command. The Errored Frame Event TLV includes the number of errored frames detected during the specified period. EXAMPLE This example set the window size to 5 seconds. Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#efm oam link-monitor frame window 50 Console(config-if)# efm oam mode This command sets the OAM mode on the specified port. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
CHAPTER 41 | OAM Commands clear efm oam This command clears statistical counters for various OAMPDU message counters types. SYNTAX clear efm oam counters [interface-list] interface-list - unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number or list of ports. To enter a list, separate nonconsecutive port identifiers with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of ports.
CHAPTER 41 | OAM Commands efm oam This command starts or stops OAM loopback test mode to the attached remote-loopback CPE. SYNTAX efm oam remote-loopback {start | stop} interface start - Starts remote loopback test mode. stop - Stops remote loopback test mode. interface - unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number. (Range: 1-28/52) DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE ◆ OAM remote loop back can be used for fault localization and link performance testing.
CHAPTER 41 | OAM Commands efm oam This command performs a remote loopback test, sending a specified remote-loopback number of packets. test SYNTAX efm oam remote-loopback test interface [number-of-packets [packet-size]] interface - unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number. (Range: 1-28/52) number-of-packets - Number of packets to send. (Range: 1-99999999) packet-size - Size of packets to send.
CHAPTER 41 | OAM Commands show efm oam This command displays counters for various OAM PDU message types. counters interface SYNTAX show efm oam counters interface [interface-list] interface-list - unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number or list of ports. To enter a list, separate nonconsecutive port identifiers with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of ports.
CHAPTER 41 | OAM Commands EXAMPLE Console#show efm oam event-log interface 1/1 OAM event log of Eth 1/1: 00:24:07 2001/01/01 "Unit 1, Port 1: Dying Gasp at Remote" Console# This command can show OAM link status changes for link partner as shown in this example.
CHAPTER 41 | OAM Commands show efm oam This command displays the results of an OAM remote loopback test. remote-loopback interface SYNTAX show efm oam remote-loopback interface [interface-list] interface-list - unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number or list of ports. To enter a list, separate nonconsecutive port identifiers with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of ports.
CHAPTER 41 | OAM Commands Link Monitor: Errored Frame Window (100msec) : 10 Errored Frame Threshold : 1 Console#show efm oam status interface 1/1 brief $ = local OAM in loopback * = remote OAM in loopback Port Admin Mode State ---- ------- ------1/1 Enabled Active Console# Remote Loopback -------Disabled Dying Gasp ------Enabled Critical Event -------Enabled Errored Frame ------Enabled show efm oam This command displays information about attached OAM-enabled devices.
42 DOMAIN NAME SERVICE COMMANDS These commands are used to configure Domain Naming System (DNS) services. Entries can be manually configured in the DNS domain name to IP address mapping table, default domain names configured, or one or more name servers specified to use for domain name to address translation. Note that domain name services will not be enabled until at least one name server is specified with the ip name-server command and domain lookup is enabled with the ip domain-lookup command.
CHAPTER 42 | Domain Name Service Commands COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ Domain names are added to the end of the list one at a time. ◆ When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS service on this switch, it will work through the domain list, appending each domain name in the list to the host name, and checking with the specified name servers for a match. ◆ If there is no domain list, the domain name specified with the ip domain-name command is used.
CHAPTER 42 | Domain Name Service Commands ◆ If all name servers are deleted, DNS will automatically be disabled. EXAMPLE This example enables DNS and then displays the configuration. Console(config)#ip domain-lookup Console(config)#end Console#show dns Domain Lookup Status: DNS Enabled Default Domain Name: sample.com Domain Name List: sample.com.jp sample.com.uk Name Server List: 192.168.1.55 10.1.0.
CHAPTER 42 | Domain Name Service Commands Name Server List: Console# RELATED COMMANDS ip domain-list (1365) ip name-server (1369) ip domain-lookup (1366) ip host This command creates a static entry in the DNS table that maps a host name to an IPv4 address. Use the no form to remove an entry. SYNTAX [no] ip host name address name - Name of an IPv4 host. (Range: 1-100 characters) address - Corresponding IPv4 address.
CHAPTER 42 | Domain Name Service Commands ip name-server This command specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for name-to-address resolution. Use the no form to remove a name server from this list. SYNTAX [no] ip name-server server-address1 [server-address2 … server-address6] server-address1 - IPv4 or IPv6 address of domain-name server. server-address2 … server-address6 - IPv4 or IPv6 address of additional domain-name servers.
CHAPTER 42 | Domain Name Service Commands ipv6 host This command creates a static entry in the DNS table that maps a host name to an IPv6 address. Use the no form to remove an entry. SYNTAX [no] ipv6 host name ipv6-address name - Name of an IPv6 host. (Range: 1-100 characters) ipv6-address - Corresponding IPv6 address. This address must be entered according to RFC 2373 “IPv6 Addressing Architecture,” using 8 colon-separated 16-bit hexadecimal values.
CHAPTER 42 | Domain Name Service Commands clear host This command deletes dynamic entries from the DNS table. SYNTAX clear host {name | *} name - Name of the host. (Range: 1-100 characters) * - Removes all entries. DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE Use the clear host command to clear dynamic entries, or the no ip host command to clear static entries. EXAMPLE This example clears all dynamic entries from the DNS table.
CHAPTER 42 | Domain Name Service Commands show dns cache This command displays entries in the DNS cache. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show dns cache No. Flag Type ------- ------- ------3 4 Host 4 4 CNAME 5 4 CNAME Console# IP Address TTL Host --------------- ------- -------209.131.36.158 115 www-real.wa1.b.yahoo.com POINTER TO:3 115 www.yahoo.com POINTER TO:3 115 www.wa1.b.yahoo.com Table 189: show dns cache - display description Field Description No.
CHAPTER 42 | Domain Name Service Commands Table 190: show hosts - display description Field Description No. The entry number for each resource record. Flag The field displays “2” for a static entry, or “4” for a dynamic entry stored in the cache. Type This field includes “Address” which specifies the primary name for the owner, and “CNAME” which specifies multiple domain names (or aliases) which are mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry.
CHAPTER 42 | Domain Name Service Commands – 1374 –
43 DHCP COMMANDS These commands are used to configure Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) client and relay functions. Any VLAN interface on this switch can be configured to automatically obtain an IP address through DHCP. This switch can also be configured to relay DHCP client configuration requests to a DHCP server on another network.
CHAPTER 43 | DHCP Commands DHCP Client DHCP for IPv4 ip dhcp client This command specifies the DCHP client vendor class identifier for the class-id current interface. Use the no form to remove the class identifier from the DHCP packet. SYNTAX ip dhcp client class-id [text text | hex hex] no ip dhcp client class-id text - A text string. (Range: 1-32 characters) hex - A hexadecimal value.
CHAPTER 43 | DHCP Commands DHCP Client ip dhcp restart client This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request. DEFAULT SETTING None COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE ◆ This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode through the ip address command. ◆ DHCP requires the server to reassign the client’s last address if available.
CHAPTER 43 | DHCP Commands DHCP Client DEFAULT SETTING Disabled COMMAND MODE Global Configuration COMMAND USAGE ◆ DHCPv6 clients can obtain configuration parameters from a server through a normal four-message exchange (solicit, advertise, request, reply), or through a rapid two-message exchange (solicit, reply). The rapid-commit option must be enabled on both client and server for the two-message exchange to be used. ◆ This command allows two-message exchange method for prefix delegation.
CHAPTER 43 | DHCP Commands DHCP Client flag (M flag) and Other Stateful Configuration flag (O flag) received in Router Advertisement messages will determine the information this switch should attempt to acquire from the DHCPv6 server as described below. ■ Both M and O flags are set to 1: DHCPv6 is used for both address and other configuration settings. This combination is known as DHCPv6 stateful, in which a DHCPv6 server assigns stateful addresses to IPv6 hosts.
CHAPTER 43 | DHCP Commands DHCP Client EXAMPLE Console(config-if)#ipv6 address autoconfig Console(config-if)#end Console#show ipv6 dhcp duid DHCPv6 Unique Identifier (DUID): 0001-0001-4A8158B4-00E00C0000FD Console# show ipv6 dhcp vlan This command shows DHCPv6 information for the specified interface(s). SYNTAX show ipv6 dhcp vlan vlan-id vlan-id - VLAN ID, specified as a single number, a range of consecutive numbers separated by a hyphen, or multiple numbers separated by commas.
CHAPTER 43 | DHCP Commands DHCP Relay Option 82 DHCP RELAY OPTION 82 This section describes commands used to configure the switch to relay DHCP requests from local hosts to a remote DHCP server.
CHAPTER 43 | DHCP Commands DHCP Relay Option 82 client requests to a DHCP server. Up to five DHCP servers can be specified in order of preference. If any of the specified DHCP server addresses are not located in the same network segment with this switch, use the ip default-gateway or ipv6 default-gateway command to specify the default router through which this switch can reach other IP subnetworks. EXAMPLE Console(config)#ip dhcp relay server 192.168.10.
CHAPTER 43 | DHCP Commands DHCP Relay Option 82 Otherwise, the switch’s DHCP relay agent will not be able to forward client requests to a DHCP server. ◆ DHCP provides a relay agent information option for sending information about its DHCP clients or the relay agent itself to the DHCP server. Also known as DHCP Option 82, it allows compatible DHCP servers to use this information when assigning IP addresses, or to set other services or policies for clients.
CHAPTER 43 | DHCP Commands DHCP Relay Option 82 ◆ DHCP reply packets received by the relay agent are handled as follows: When the relay agent receives a DHCP reply packet with Option 82 information over the management VLAN, it first ensures that the packet is destined for itself. ◆ ■ If the RID in the DHCP reply packet is not identical with that configured on the switch, the option 82 information is retained, and the packet is flooded onto the VLAN through which it was received.
CHAPTER 43 | DHCP Commands DHCP Relay Option 82 EXAMPLE This example enables Option 82, and sets the frame format of the remote ID for the option to use the MAC address of the switch’s CPU.
CHAPTER 43 | DHCP Commands DHCP Relay Option 82 EXAMPLE This example sets the Option 82 policy to keep the client information in the request packet received by the relay agent, and forward this packet on to the DHCP server. Console(config)#ip dhcp relay information policy keep Console(config)# RELATED COMMANDS ip dhcp relay information option (1382) ip dhcp relay server (1381) ip dhcp snooping (892) show ip dhcp relay This command displays the configuration settings for DHCP relay service.
44 IP INTERFACE COMMANDS An IP Version 4 and Version 6 address may be used for management access to the switch over the network. Both IPv4 or IPv6 addresses can be used simultaneously to access the switch. You can manually configure a specific IPv4 or IPv6 address or direct the switch to obtain an IPv4 address from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is powered on. An IPv6 address can either be manually configured or dynamically generated.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv4 Interface BASIC IPV4 This section describes commands used to configure IP addresses for VLAN CONFIGURATION interfaces on the switch.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv4 Interface directed to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything other than this format is not be accepted by the configuration program. ◆ An interface can have only one primary IP address, but can have many secondary IP addresses. In other words, secondary addresses need to be specified if more than one IP subnet can be accessed through this interface.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv4 Interface ip default-gateway This command specifies the default gateway through which this switch can reach other subnetworks. Use the no form to remove a default gateway. SYNTAX ip default-gateway gateway no ip default-gateway gateway - IP address of the default gateway DEFAULT SETTING No default gateway is established.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv4 Interface RELATED COMMANDS ip default-gateway (1390) show ipv6 default-gateway (1407) show ip interface This command displays the settings of an IPv4 interface. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show ip interface VLAN 1 is Administrative Up - Link Up Address is 00-E0-00-00-00-01 Index: 1001, MTU: 1500 Address Mode is DHCP IP Address: 192.168.0.2 Mask: 255.255.255.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv4 Interface time exceeded messages parameter problem message echo request messages echo reply messages redirect messages timestamp request messages timestamp reply messages source quench messages address mask request messages address mask reply messages ICMP sent output errors destination unreachable messages time exceeded messages parameter problem message echo request messages echo reply messages redirect messages timestamp request messages timestamp reply messages s
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv4 Interface ◆ The traceroute command first sends probe datagrams with the TTL value set at one. This causes the first router to discard the datagram and return an error message. The trace function then sends several probe messages at each subsequent TTL level and displays the roundtrip time for each message. Not all devices respond correctly to probes by returning an “ICMP port unreachable” message.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv4 Interface COMMAND USAGE ◆ Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached. ◆ The following are some results of the ping command: ◆ ■ Normal response - The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds, depending on network traffic. ■ Destination does not respond - If the host does not respond, a “timeout” appears in ten seconds.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv4 Interface ARP CONFIGURATION This section describes commands used to configure the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) on the switch.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv4 Interface clear arp-cache This command deletes all dynamic entries from the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE This example clears all dynamic entries in the ARP cache. Console#clear arp-cache This operation will delete all the dynamic entries in ARP Cache. Are you sure to continue this operation (y/n)?y Console# show arp This command displays entries in the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface IPV6 INTERFACE This switch supports the following IPv6 interface commands.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface Interface Address Configuration and Utilities ipv6 This command sets an IPv6 default gateway to use when the destination is default-gateway located in a different network segment. Use the no form to remove a previously configured default gateway. SYNTAX ipv6 default-gateway ipv6-address no ipv6 address ipv6-address - The IPv6 address of the default next hop router to use when the destination is located in a different network segment.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface ipv6 address This command configures an IPv6 global unicast address and enables IPv6 on an interface. Use the no form without any arguments to remove all IPv6 addresses from the interface, or use the no form with a specific IPv6 address to remove that address from the interface. SYNTAX [no] ipv6 address ipv6-address[/prefix-length] ipv6-address - A full IPv6 address including the network prefix and host address bits.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface Joined group address(es): FF02::1:FF00:72 FF02::1:FF00:FD FF02::1 IPv6 link MTU is 1500 bytes ND DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 3.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface EXAMPLE This example assigns a dynamic global unicast address of 2001:DB8:2222:7272:2E0:CFF:FE00:FD to the switch.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (VLAN) COMMAND USAGE ◆ The prefix must be formatted according to RFC 2373 “IPv6 Addressing Architecture,” using 8 colon-separated 16-bit hexadecimal values. One double colon may be used in the address to indicate the appropriate number of zeros required to fill the undefined fields.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface IPv6 is enabled Link-local address: FE80::2E0:CFF:FE00:FD/64 Global unicast address(es): 2001:DB8::1:2E0:CFF:FE00:FD/64, subnet is 2001:DB8::1:0:0:0:0/64[EUI] 2001:DB8:2222:7272::72/96, subnet is 2001:DB8:2222:7272::/96[EUI] Joined group address(es): FF02::1:FF00:72 FF02::1:FF00:FD FF02::1 IPv6 link MTU is 1500 bytes ND DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 3.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface ◆ If a duplicate address is detected, a warning message is sent to the console. EXAMPLE This example assigns a link-local address of FE80::269:3EF9:FE19:6779 to VLAN 1. Note that a prefix in the range of FE80~FEBF is required for linklocal addresses, and the first 16-bit group in the host address is padded with a zero in the form 0269.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface COMMAND USAGE ◆ This command enables IPv6 on the current VLAN interface and automatically generates a link-local unicast address. The address prefix uses FE80, and the host portion of the address is generated by converting the switch’s MAC address to modified EUI-64 format (see page 1401). This address type makes the switch accessible over IPv6 for all devices attached to the same local subnet.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface ipv6 mtu This command sets the size of the maximum transmission unit (MTU) for IPv6 packets sent on an interface. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX ipv6 mtu size no ipv6 mtu size - Specifies the MTU size.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface show ipv6 This command displays the current IPv6 default gateway. default-gateway COMMAND MODE Normal Exec, Privileged Exec EXAMPLE The following shows the default gateway configured for this device: Console#show ipv6 default-gateway IPv6 default gateway 2001:DB8:2222:7272::254 Console# show ipv6 interface This command displays the usability and configured settings for IPv6 interfaces.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface ND ND ND ND ND ND DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 3.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface This example displays a brief summary of IPv6 addresses configured on the switch.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface show ipv6 traffic This command displays statistics about IPv6 traffic passing through this switch.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface neighbor solicit messages neighbor advertisement messages redirect messages group membership query messages group membership response messages group membership reduction messages multicast listener discovery version 2 reports UDP Statistics: input no port errors other errors output Console# Table 201: show ipv6 traffic - display description Field Description IPv6 Statistics IPv6 recived total received The total number of input datagrams received by the
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface Table 201: show ipv6 traffic - display description (Continued) Field Description reassembly succeeded The number of IPv6 datagrams successfully reassembled. Note that this counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface Table 201: show ipv6 traffic - display description (Continued) Field Description echo request messages The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received by the interface. echo reply messages The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received by the interface. router solicit messages The number of ICMP Router Solicit messages received by the interface.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface Table 201: show ipv6 traffic - display description (Continued) Field Description group membership response messages The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages sent. group membership reduction messages The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages sent. multicast listener discovery version 2 reports The number of MLDv2 reports sent by the interface.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface size - Number of bytes in a packet. (Range: 48-18024 bytes) The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified because the router adds header information. DEFAULT SETTING count: 5 size: 100 bytes COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec COMMAND USAGE ◆ Use the ping6 command to see if another site on the network can be reached, or to evaluate delays over the path.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface traceroute6 This command shows the route packets take to the specified destination. SYNTAX traceroute6 {ipv6-address | host-name} [max-failures failure-count] ipv6-address - The IPv6 address of a neighbor device. You can specify either a link-local or global unicast address formatted according to RFC 2373 “IPv6 Addressing Architecture,” using 8 colon-separated 16-bit hexadecimal values.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface Traceroute to FE80::2E0:CFF:FE9C:CA10%1/64, 30 hops max, timeout is 3 seconds, 5 max failure(s) before termination. Hop Packet 1 Packet 2 Packet 3 IPv6 Address --- -------- -------- -------- -------------------------------------------1 <10 ms <10 ms <10 ms FE80::2E0:CFF:FE9C:CA10%1/64 Trace completed.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface global unicast address is detected, it is not used. All configuration commands associated with a duplicate address remain configured while the address is in “duplicate” state. ◆ If the link-local address for an interface is changed, duplicate address detection is performed on the new link-local address, but not for any of the IPv6 global unicast addresses already associated with the interface.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface COMMAND MODE Interface Configuration (VLAN) COMMAND USAGE ◆ This command specifies the interval between transmitting neighbor solicitation messages when resolving an address, or when probing the reachability of a neighbor. Therefore, avoid using very short intervals for normal IPv6 operations.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface COMMAND USAGE ◆ IPv6 Router Advertisements (RA) convey information that enables nodes to auto-configure on the network. This information may include the default router address taken from the observed source address of the RA message, as well as on-link prefix information.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface clear ipv6 neighbors This command deletes all dynamic entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache. COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE The following deletes all dynamic entries in the IPv6 neighbor cache: Console#clear ipv6 neighbors Console# show ipv6 nd This command displays the configuration setting for RA Guard. raguard SYNTAX show ipv6 nd raguard [interface] interface ethernet unit/port unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1) port - Port number.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands IPv6 Interface be used in the address to indicate the appropriate number of zeros required to fill the undefined fields. DEFAULT SETTING All IPv6 neighbor discovery cache entries are displayed.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands ND Snooping ND Snooping Neighbor Discover (ND) Snooping maintains an IPv6 prefix table and user address binding table. These tables can be used for stateless address autoconfiguration or for address filtering by IPv6 Source Guard. ND snooping maintains a binding table in the process of neighbor discovery. When it receives an Neighbor Solicitation (NS) packet from a host, it creates a new binding.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands ND Snooping ipv6 nd snooping This command enables ND snooping globally or on a specified VLAN or range of VLANs. Use the no form to disable this feature. SYNTAX [no] ipv6 nd snooping [vlan {vlan-id | vlan-range}] vlan-id - VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094) vlan-range - A consecutive range of VLANs indicated by the use a hyphen, or a random group of VLANs with each entry separated by a comma.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands ND Snooping ■ If an RA message is received in response to the original NS message (indicating a duplicate address) before the dynamic binding timeout period expires, the entry is deleted. Otherwise, when the timeout expires, the entry is dropped if the auto-detection process is not enabled. ■ If the auto-detection process is enabled, the switch periodically sends an NS message to determine is the client still exists.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands ND Snooping ipv6 nd snooping This command sets the number of times the auto-detection process sends auto-detect an NS message to determine if a dynamic user binding is still valid. Use the retransmit count no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit count retransmit-times no ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit count retransmit-times – The number of times to send an NS message to determine if a client still exists.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands ND Snooping COMMAND USAGE The timeout after which the switch will delete a dynamic user binding if no RA message is received is set to the retransmit count (see the ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit count command) x the retransmit interval. Based on the default settings, this is 3 seconds.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands ND Snooping ipv6 nd snooping This command sets the maximum number of address entries in the max-binding dynamic user binding table which can be bound to a port. Use the no form to restore the default setting. SYNTAX ipv6 nd snooping max-binding max-bindings no ipv6 nd snooping max-binding max-bindings – The maximum number of address entries in the dynamic user binding table which can be bound to a port.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands ND Snooping EXAMPLE Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 Console(config-if)#ipv6 nd snooping trust Console(config-if)# clear ipv6 nd This command clears all entries in the dynamic user address binding table.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands ND Snooping show ipv6 nd This command shows the configuration settings for ND snooping.
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands ND Snooping COMMAND MODE Privileged Exec EXAMPLE Console#show ipv6 nd snooping prefix Prefix entry timeout: 100 (second) Prefix Len Valid-Time Expire VLAN Interface -------------------------------------- --- ---------- ---------- ---- --------2001:b000:: 64 2592000 100 1 Eth 1/1 2001:: 64 600 34 2 Eth 1/2 Console# – 1431 –
CHAPTER 44 | IP Interface Commands ND Snooping – 1432 –
SECTION IV APPENDICES This section provides additional information and includes these items: ◆ "Software Specifications" on page 1435 ◆ "Troubleshooting" on page 1439 ◆ "License Information" on page 1441 – 1433 –
SECTION IV | Appendices – 1434 –
A SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS SOFTWARE FEATURES MANAGEMENT Local, RADIUS, TACACS+, Port Authentication (802.1X), HTTPS, SSH, Port AUTHENTICATION Security, IP Filter CLIENT ACCESS Access Control Lists (512 rules), Port Authentication (802.
APPENDIX A | Software Specifications Management Features VLAN SUPPORT Up to 4094 groups; port-based, protocol-based, tagged (802.
APPENDIX A | Software Specifications Standards RMON Groups 1, 2, 3, 9 (Statistics, History, Alarm, Event) STANDARDS Ethernet Service OAM (ITU-T Y.1731) - partial support IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol IEEE 802.1D-2004 Spanning Tree Algorithm and traffic priorities Spanning Tree Protocol Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802.1p Priority tags IEEE 802.1Q VLAN IEEE 802.1v Protocol-based VLANs IEEE 802.1X Port Authentication IEEE 802.
APPENDIX A | Software Specifications Management Information Bases DNS Resolver MIB (RFC 1612) Entity MIB (RFC 2737) Ether-like MIB (RFC 2665) Extended Bridge MIB (RFC 2674) Extensible SNMP Agents MIB (RFC 2742) Forwarding Table MIB (RFC 2096) IGMP MIB (RFC 2933) Interface Group MIB (RFC 2233) Interfaces Evolution MIB (RFC 2863) IP Multicasting related MIBs IPV6-MIB (RFC 2065) IPV6-ICMP-MIB (RFC 2066) IPV6-TCP-MIB (RFC 2052) IPV6-UDP-MIB (RFC2054) Link Aggregation MIB (IEEE 802.
B TROUBLESHOOTING PROBLEMS ACCESSING THE MANAGEMENT INTERFACE Table 204: Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Action Cannot connect using Telnet, web browser, or SNMP software ◆ Be sure the switch is powered on. ◆ Check network cabling between the management station and the switch. Make sure the ends are properly connected and there is no damage to the cable. Test the cable if necessary. ◆ Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the port you are using has not been disabled.
APPENDIX B | Troubleshooting Using System Logs USING SYSTEM LOGS If a fault does occur, refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you encountered is actually caused by the switch. If the problem appears to be caused by the switch, follow these steps: 1. Enable logging. 2. Set the error messages reported to include all categories. 3. Enable SNMP. 4. Enable SNMP traps. 5. Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages. 6.
C LICENSE INFORMATION This product includes copyrighted third-party software subject to the terms of the GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), or other related free software licenses. The GPL code used in this product is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY and is subject to the copyrights of one or more authors. For details, refer to the section "The GNU General Public License" below, or refer to the applicable license as included in the source-code archive.
APPENDIX C | License Information The GNU General Public License GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 1. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License.
APPENDIX C | License Information The GNU General Public License 4.
APPENDIX C | License Information The GNU General Public License practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 9.
GLOSSARY ACL Access Control List. ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each packet for certain IP or MAC (i.e., Layer 2) information. ARP Address Resolution Protocol converts between IP addresses and MAC (hardware) addresses. ARP is used to locate the MAC address corresponding to a given IP address. This allows the switch to use IP addresses for routing decisions and the corresponding MAC addresses to forward packets from one hop to the next.
GLOSSARY DIFFSERV Differentiated Services provides quality of service on large networks by employing a well-defined set of building blocks from which a variety of aggregate forwarding behaviors may be built. Each packet carries information (DS byte) used by each hop to give it a particular forwarding treatment, or per-hop behavior, at each network node.
GLOSSARY GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol. GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN containing registered endstations. Formerly called Group Address Registration Protocol. GMRP Generic Multicast Registration Protocol. GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups.
GLOSSARY IEEE 802.1X Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication. IEEE 802.3AC Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging. IEEE 802.3X Defines Ethernet frame start/stop requests and timers used for flow control on full-duplex links. (Now incorporated in IEEE 802.3-2002) IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol. A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services.
GLOSSARY LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol. Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP-configured ports on another device. LAYER 2 Data Link layer in the ISO 7-Layer Data Communications Protocol. This is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses. LINK AGGREGATION See Port Trunk.
GLOSSARY MVR Multicast VLAN Registration is a method of using a single network-wide multicast VLAN to transmit common services, such as such as television channels or video-on-demand, across a service-provider’s network. MVR simplifies the configuration of multicast services by using a common VLAN for distribution, while still preserving security and data isolation for subscribers residing in both the MVR VLAN and other standard or private VLAN groups.
GLOSSARY QOS Quality of Service. QoS refers to the capability of a network to provide better service to selected traffic flows using features such as data prioritization, queuing, congestion avoidance and traffic shaping. These features effectively provide preferential treatment to specific flows either by raising the priority of one flow or limiting the priority of another flow. RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service.
GLOSSARY TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol, and IP as the network layer protocol. TELNET Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCP/IP. TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol. A TCP/IP protocol commonly used for software downloads. UDP User Datagram Protocol. UDP provides a datagram mode for packet- switched communications.
COMMAND LIST aaa accounting commands 816 aaa accounting dot1x 817 aaa accounting exec 818 aaa accounting update 819 aaa authorization exec 820 aaa group server 821 absolute 763 access-list arp 962 access-list ip 944 access-list ipv6 950 access-list mac 956 accounting commands 822 accounting dot1x 822 accounting exec 823 alias 969 arp timeout 1395 authentication enable 806 authentication login 807 authorization exec 823 auto-traffic-control 1027 auto-traffic-control action 1028 auto-traffic-control alarm-cl
COMMAND LIST configure 693 control-vlan 1088 copy 718 databits 729 delete 721 delete public-key 836 description 1175 description 970 dir 721 disable 694 discard 971 disconnect 736 dos-protection echo-chargen 933 dos-protection smurf 934 dos-protection tcp-flooding 934 dos-protection tcp-null-scan 935 dos-protection tcp-syn-fin-scan 935 dos-protection tcp-xmas-scan 936 dos-protection udp-flooding 936 dos-protection win-nuke 937 dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control 1133 dot1x default 841 dot1x eapol-pass-throu
COMMAND LIST ip ip ip ip ip ip ip ip ip ip ip dhcp snooping vlan 897 domain-list 1365 domain-lookup 1366 domain-name 1367 host 1368 http port 825 http secure-port 826 http secure-server 827 http server 826 igmp authentication 1218 igmp filter (Global Configuration) 1216 ip igmp filter (Interface Configuration) 1220 ip igmp max-groups 1221 ip igmp max-groups action 1221 ip igmp profile 1217 ip igmp query-drop 1222 ip igmp snooping 1193 ip igmp snooping priority 1194 ip igmp snooping proxy-reporting 1194 ip
COMMAND LIST ipv6 nd reachable-time 1420 ipv6 nd snooping 1424 ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect 1425 ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit count 1426 ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit interval 1426 ipv6 nd snooping max-binding 1428 ipv6 nd snooping prefix timeout 1427 ipv6 nd snooping trust 1428 ipv6 source-guard 921 ipv6 source-guard binding 919 ipv6 source-guard max-binding 922 jumbo frame 715 l2protocol-tunnel tunnel-dmac 1139 lacp 998 lacp admin-key (Ethernet Interface) 1000 lacp admin-key (Port Ch
COMMAND LIST mvr6 source-port-mode dynamic 1274 mvr6 type 1276 mvr6 upstream-source-ip 1274 mvr6 vlan 1275 mvr6 vlan group 1278 name 1068 negotiation 973 network-access aging 872 network-access dynamic-qos 874 network-access dynamic-vlan 875 network-access guest-vlan 876 network-access link-detection 877 network-access link-detection link-down 877 network-access link-detection link-up 878 network-access link-detection link-updown 878 network-access mac-filter 873 network-access max-mac-count 879 network-ac
COMMAND LIST show accounting 824 show arp 1396 show auto-traffic-control 1036 show auto-traffic-control interface 1036 show banner 707 show bridge-ext 1121 show cable-diagnostics 991 show calendar 761 show class-map 1189 show cluster 769 show cluster candidates 770 show cluster members 770 show discard 977 show dns 1371 show dns cache 1372 show dos-protection 937 show dot1q-tunnel 1138 show dot1x 852 show efm oam counters interface 1361 show efm oam event-log interface 1361 show efm oam remote-loopback int
COMMAND LIST show lldp info local-device 1306 show lldp info remote-device 1307 show lldp info statistics 1309 show log 743 show logging 744 show logging sendmail 749 show loopback-detection 1049 show mac access-group 961 show mac access-list 961 show mac-address-table 1053 show mac-address-table aging-time 1054 show mac-address-table count 1055 show mac-vlan 1150 show management 856 show memory 708 show mvr 1258 show mvr associated-profile 1259 show mvr interface 1260 show mvr members 1261 show mvr profil
COMMAND LIST snmp-server enable port-traps mac-notification 779 snmp-server enable traps 776 snmp-server engine-id 780 snmp-server group 782 snmp-server host 777 snmp-server location 774 snmp-server notify-filter 789 snmp-server user 783 snmp-server view 784 sntp client 750 sntp poll 751 sntp server 751 spanning-tree 1058 spanning-tree bpdu-filter 1069 spanning-tree bpdu-guard 1070 spanning-tree cisco-prestandard 1059 spanning-tree cost 1071 spanning-tree edge-port 1072 spanning-tree forward-time 1059 span
COMMAND LIST web-auth session-timeout 887 web-auth system-auth-control 888 – 1461 – whichboot 722 wtr-timer 1106
COMMAND LIST – 1462 –
INDEX NUMERICS 802.1Q tunnel 208, 1132 access 215, 1134 configuration, guidelines 211 configuration, limitations 211 CVID to SVID map 213, 1135 description 208 ethernet type 212, 1137 interface configuration 215, 1134–1137 mode selection 215, 1134 status, configuring 212, 1133 TPID 212, 1137 uplink 215, 1134 802.
INDEX shut down port on receipt 249, 1070 bridge extension capabilities, displaying 123, 1121 broadcast storm, threshold 260, 261, 1021, 1022 C cable diagnostics 170, 990 canonical format indicator 280 CDP discard 971 CFM basic operations 514 continuity check errors 547, 1335, 1336 continuity check messages 503, 512, 514, 515, 1094, 1311, 1331, 1332 cross-check errors 1333, 1337, 1339 cross-check message 512, 515, 1311, 1337, 1339, 1340 cross-check start delay 516, 1337 delay measure 535, 1350 description
INDEX VLAN configuration 413, 897 DHCPv6 snooping 902 enabling 903 global configuration 903 remote ID 905 remote ID policy 906 specifying trusted interfaces 908 VLAN configuration 907 Differentiated Code Point Service See DSCP Differentiated Services See DiffServ DiffServ 283, 1173 binding policy to interface 297, 1188 class map 284, 1174, 1178 class map, description 1175 classifying QoS traffic 284, 1176 color aware, srTCM 292, 1181 color aware, trTCM 293, 1183 color blind, srTCM 292, 1181 color blind, tr
INDEX F fault isolation, CFM 512, 1311, 1343 fault notification generator, CFM 515, 521, 546, 1347, 1349 fault notification, CFM 512, 546, 1311, 1346, 1347, 1349 fault verification, CFM 512, 1311 firmware displaying version 120, 713 upgrading 124, 718 upgrading automatically 129, 723 upgrading with FTP or TFP 129, 723 version, displaying 120, 713 G GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See GVRP gateway, IPv4 default 564, 1390 gateway, IPv6 default 569, 1398 general security measures 305, 865 GVRP enabling 205,
INDEX explicit configuration 570, 1404 global unicast 575, 1399 link-local 576, 1400 manual configuration (global unicast) 84, 575, 1399 manual configuration (link-local) 84, 576, 1403 setting 83, 568, 1399 IPv6 source guard configuring static entries 405, 919 setting filter criteria 403, 921 setting maximum bindings 404, 922 J jumbo frame 122, 715 K key private 341, 831 public 341, 831 user public, importing 346, 718 key pair host 341, 831 host, generating 345, 836 L LACP configuration 175, 995 group
INDEX management access, IP filter 379, 855 Management Information Bases (MIBs) 1437 matching class settings, classifying QoS traffic 285, 1176 media-type 152, 973 memory status 145, 708 utilization, showing 145, 708 memory utiilzation, setting trap 791 MEP archive, CFM 522, 1334 mirror port configuring 156, 1009 configuring local traffic 156, 1009 configuring remote traffic 158, 1012 MLD filter profiles for IPv6, configuration 1239 filtering & throttling 1237 filtering & throttling for IPv6, configuring p
INDEX max bindings 1428 trusted interface 1428 Neighbor Discovery Snooping See ND snooping network access authentication 327, 871 dynamic QoS assignment 332, 874 dynamic VLAN assignment 332, 875 MAC address filter 332, 881 port configuration 331, 880 reauthentication 330, 874 secure MAC information 336, 884, 885 NTP authentication keys, specifying 138, 753 client, enabling 135, 754 specifying servers 137, 755 NTP, setting the system clock 137, 752–756 O OAM active mode 549, 1357 displaying settings and st
INDEX policing flow 287, 291 srTCM 288, 1181 srTCM police meter 292, 1181 trTCM 289, 1183 trTCM police meter 293, 1183 QoS policy, committed information rate 291, 292, 293, 1179, 1181, 1183 QoS policy, peak information rate 293, 1183 Quality of Service See QoS query interval, IGMP snooping 619, 1206 query response interval, IGMP snooping 619, 1207 queue weight, assigning to CoS 271, 1161 R RADIUS logon authentication 309, 808 settings 309, 808 rate limit port 259, 1020 setting 259, 1019 remote engine ID 4
INDEX port/trunk loopback detection 238, 1073 protocol migration 249, 1081 transmission limit 242, 1065 standards, IEEE 1437 startup files creating 124, 718 displaying 124, 711, 722 setting 124, 717 static addresses, setting 229, 1052 statistics ARP 1391 ICMP 1391 IP 1391 TCP 1391 UDP 1391 statistics, port 162, 978 storm control storm sample type 1021 STP 240, 1061 Also see STA summary, accounting 315, 824 summer time, setting 756–759 switch clustering, for management 482, 765 switch settings restoring 126
INDEX PVID 201, 1129 tunneling unknown groups 192, 1130 voice 299, 1150 voice VLANs 299, 1150 detecting VoIP devices 300, 1151 enabling for ports 303, 1153–1154 identifying client devices 301, 1152 VoIP traffic 299, 1150 ports, configuring 302, 1153–1154 telephony OUI, configuring 301, 1152 voice VLAN, configuring 299, 1150 VoIP, detecting devices 303, 1155 W web authentication 324, 888 address, re-authenticating 326, 889 configuring 325, 888 port information, displaying 326, 890 ports, configuring 326, 8
E022019-CS-R05 M0NEC3510201Z 149100000204A
